JP6510957B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a result of a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed results in a predetermined result.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a process (A) for setting image data of a symbol (special symbol), a notice, a background, an awakening mode commentary, and a symbol commentary in order from the front of five display layers Commentary, design commentary, design (special design), notice B, processing B to set image data of background, and call appearance description, design (special design), notice, background, design It has been proposed that processing C for setting data can be executed, and processing B or C will be executed at the timing for displaying the call-up mode commentary (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-152332 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 above, processing B or C is executed at the timing to display the effect image (image such as the awakening mode commentary), and the effect image is identified information (special symbol) Depending on the display position and size of the effect image, the identification information may be hidden in the effect image and the identification information may not be visible depending on the display position and the size of the effect image. If identification information is not visible, it is difficult to understand the state of the variable display game (whether or not it is changing, whether or not a reach is being generated, etc.), the stop result mode (such as what the stop symbol is) Become.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of visually recognizing identification information even when a predetermined effect image appears.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a result of a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed becomes a predetermined result,
The game apparatus further comprises an effect control means for displaying the variable display game on the effect display device,
The effect control means creates a display screen to be displayed on the effect display device by one display layer or a plurality of stacked display layers, and generates a predetermined effect image on the effect display device at a predetermined timing. While being able to display, the identification information and additional information corresponding to the identification information can be displayed on the effect display device,
The predetermined effect image includes a first preview image displayed by a first preview image layer of the plurality of display layers, and a second preview image displayed by a second preview image layer of the plurality of display layers . The preview image and the background image displayed by the background image layer of the plurality of display layers are included,
The identification information includes first identification information and second identification information of the plurality of identification information, and is displayed by an identification information layer of the plurality of display layers.
The additional information includes first additional information corresponding to the first identification information and second additional information corresponding to the second identification information, and is displayed by the additional information layer among the plurality of display layers.
The display priority of the first notice image, the first identification information, the second rather lower than the display priority of the identification information and the second warning image, and the first additional information, the second additional information and as Naru rather higher than the display priority of the background image, the first warning image layers, as well as positioned on the lower layer side than the identification information layer, from the additional information layer and the background image layer Also located on the upper side ,
Display priority of the second warning image, the first identification information, the second identification information, the first warning image, before Symbol first additional information, the priority of display of the second additional information, and the background image The second preview image layer is located above the identification information layer, the first preview image layer, the additional information layer, and the background image layer so as to be higher than the rank .

  According to the present invention, even when a predetermined effect image appears, visual recognition of identification information becomes possible.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a prize winning device. It is a figure explaining the detail of a package display. It is a figure explaining the detail of an effect operation part. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining input processing. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining starting opening error monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flow chart explaining pre-reading big hit decision processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and (b) is a flow chart for explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. (A) is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process, (b) is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining special drawing information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 1 during fan fare / interval. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. (A) is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 1, (b) is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. (A) is a flow chart explaining distribution processing, and (b) is a flow chart explaining 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a common drawing usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing transfer setting processing during common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a power transmission operation shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a routine charge residual ball process. It is a flow chart explaining end processing per common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining starting opening signal editing processing. It is a flow chart explaining the power on reset processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining a command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining a receiving command range check process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining change pattern corresponding symbol judgment processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the scenario data setting process for customer waiting. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario data setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 reservation information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a no reach variation setting process. It is a flowchart explaining stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining fluctuation pattern classification processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating random number lottery processing A. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining advance production setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining cut in character replacement judgment processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining cut in character substitution judging processing 2. It is a flow chart explaining cut in character substitution judging processing 3. It is a flow chart explaining cut in character substitution judging processing 3. It is a flowchart explaining the scenario data setting process for PB preliminary announcement. 15 is a flowchart illustrating inter-sub transmission start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the inter-sub reception task process. It is a flowchart explaining transmission data edit processing between sub. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating inter-sub ack response task processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining the setting processing between sub effects. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario analysis process. (A) is a flowchart explaining a motion registration process, (b) is a figure explaining the structure of a motion management area | region, (c) is a figure explaining the structure of a display information area. (A) is a flowchart explaining the motion data initialization process 1, (b) is a flowchart explaining the motion data initialization process 2. (A) is a flowchart explaining a motion deletion process, (b) is a flowchart explaining a motion continuation process. (A) is a flowchart explaining a constant weight process, (b) is a flowchart explaining a variable weight process. (A) is a flowchart illustrating PB waiting processing, and (b) is a flowchart illustrating PB determination branching processing. It is a flow chart explaining symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart explaining a pattern backcalculation replacement process. It is a flowchart explaining change scenario switching processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining an iterative process, and (b) is a flowchart explaining an ending process. It is a flowchart explaining a motion control process. It is a flowchart explaining a motion command execution process. It is a flowchart explaining a motion command execution process. It is a flowchart explaining a bitmap addition process. It is a flow chart explaining animation addition processing. It is a flowchart explaining 1 point designation object movement processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining an effect type specification process, (b) is a flowchart explaining an effect parameter specification process. (A) is a flowchart explaining an object deletion process, (b) is a flowchart explaining an object change process. It is a flow chart explaining object animation decoding processing. It is a flowchart explaining a behavioral index setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a character drawing process. (A) is a flowchart explaining display left symbol conversion processing, (b) is a flowchart explaining PB color conversion processing, (c) is a flowchart explaining reach character conversion processing. It is a flowchart explaining military commander 1 serif conversion processing. It is a flowchart explaining VDP interruption processing. It is a flow chart explaining V blank start interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the address area of a scenario management area, and a scenario management area. It is a figure which shows an example of the address area | region of a motion management area | region. It is a figure which shows an example of the background scenario table at the time of customer waiting start. It is a figure which shows an example of the motion table at the time of the left symbol normal fluctuation | variation start. It is a figure which shows an example of the display result by the motion table shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of virtual drawing space (frame buffer). It is a figure explaining the difference between 2nd Embodiment and 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the difference between 2nd Embodiment and 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the difference between 2nd Embodiment and 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the address area | region of the motion management area | region in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display layer structure in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen produced by the several display layer containing the number part layer and the notice layer between patterns. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen produced by the several display layer containing the number part layer and the notice layer between patterns. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen produced by the several display layer containing the number part layer and the notice layer between patterns. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen produced by the several display layer containing the number part layer and the notice layer between patterns. It is a figure which shows an example of the change display aspect of a decorative symbol.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  Further, on the upper part of the glass frame 15, a lighting device (moving light) 16 incorporating a lamp and a motor inside and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a dispensing abnormality are provided. In addition, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 which incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration or effect, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effect). There is. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device, and the like. Furthermore, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a rendering operation unit 550 for receiving an operation input from the player is provided. The effect operation unit 550 is the effect button 25 incorporating the effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player, and the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 contacts the player A touch panel 29 for receiving an operation input is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key 26 for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  In addition, on the front of the glass frame 15 above the upper tray 21, a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card being ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine A discharge button 28 to be operated, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, by the player operating the effect operation unit 550, in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect such as causing the player's operation to intervene is performed. Can.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in the upper right portion of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 for providing a game effect by operating is provided. The panel effect device 44 includes two arms having a sub display device 42 attached to the tip end thereof, and the sub display device 42 is rotated relative to the display device 41 by pivoting the arm about the base end. It is possible to convert the state of overlapping in the front-rear direction and the state of not overlapping.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common view variation display game. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 6).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning area is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the common view starting gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 6).

In addition, on the left side of the common drawing start gate 34, a normal change winning device 37 (starting winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the second special view variable display game (special view 2 variable display game) is provided. ing.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right, and a partition 37d for restricting the flow of the game ball. ing. The movable member 37b always stands upright so as to keep the distance from the partition 37d equal to or less than the diameter of the gaming ball, that is, the closed state (convenient for the player) in which the gaming ball can not flow. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 by the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 6) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 6).

Furthermore, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a special fluctuation winning device (big winning opening) 38 which can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept There is.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the big winning opening (blocked state which is disadvantageous for the player) is converted into the opened state (which is advantageous for the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38 has a special winning opening which is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by, for example, a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 6) as a drive device. By converting the closed state of the mouth to the open state, the flow of the game ball into the big winning opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 6) is disposed inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the gaming balls having flowed into the large winning openings are detected by any of the large winning openings switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of large winning opening switch 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball flowing into the large winning opening.

Further, below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and a second special view for giving a start condition of the first special view variation display game (special view 1 variation display game) There is provided a winning device 90 provided with a second start winning opening 97 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the variable display game (special view 2 variable display game).
The winning device 90 is provided with a sorting member 92 which alternately distributes the gaming balls having flowed into the inflow port 90a in the upper part into the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 6), and the gaming ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 has the start opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 6) Is detected by
Further, below the winning device 90, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that have not been won in a winning port or the like.

Fig.3 (a)-(c) is a front view of the prize-winning device 90 of this embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the state which removed the front cover member.
As shown in FIG. 3A, the winning device 90 is provided with a distributing member 92 at a position immediately below the inflow port 90a in the inside thereof. Further, a first start winning combination port 36 is disposed at the lower left of the distributing member 92, and a second starting winning opening 97 is disposed at the lower right of the distributing member 92.
Furthermore, a front cover member is provided to cover the front of the distributing member 92, the first start winning opening 36, and the second start winning opening 97. The front cover member is transparent or translucent so that the behavior of the gaming ball in the winning device 90 can be viewed.

The distributing member 92 is rotatable about an axial pin 92a along the front-rear direction, and an upper arm 92b extending upward from a position where the axial pin 92a is disposed and a left arm 92c extending leftward And a right arm 92d extending rightward. Of the three arms, a left holding portion 92e for temporarily holding a game ball is formed by the upper arm 92b and the left arm 92c on the left of the upper arm 92b, and on the right of the upper arm 92b The upper arm 92b and the right arm 92d form a right holding portion 92f that temporarily holds the gaming ball.
With the upper arm 92b always facing upward, as shown in FIG. 3 (b), the distributing member 92 can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a, as shown in FIG. As shown in c), the right holding portion 92f can be pivoted between a position where it can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a.

As shown in FIG. 3B, when the left holding portion 92e is in a position where it can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a, the right holding portion 92f faces the second start winning opening 97 and the gaming ball is It will flow down.
Further, as shown in FIG. 3C, when the right holding portion 92f is in a position where it can receive the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a, the left holding portion 92e is directed to the first start winning opening 36 It will be in the state which made the ball flow down.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3A, the distributing member side magnet 96a is attached to the rear of the upper arm 92b of the distributing member 92. Further, of the base member 93 to which the distributing member 92 is attached from the front, the base member side magnet 96b is attached at a position facing the distributing member side magnet 96a when the upper arm 92b is vertical. There is. The distributing member-side magnet 96a and the base member-side magnet 96b are attached such that the opposing poles are the same pole, and the upper arm 92b of the distributing member 92 is vertical due to the repulsive force of the magnets 96a and 96b. It is urged to turn to either left or right without staying in the state of becoming. As a result, in a state in which the rotation of the distributing member 92 is stopped, either the left holding portion 92e or the right holding portion 92f can receive the gaming ball which has flowed into the inflow port 90a.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 (b) and 3 (c), the gaming ball having flowed into the inflow port 90a is ready to be received toward the inflow port 90a of the left holding portion 92e and the right holding portion 92f. It is held by one holder. When the game ball is held by one of the holding portions, the weight of the game ball causes the distributing member 92 to rotate in the direction of the one holding portion, and the held gaming ball is rotated by the distributing member 92. It flows down toward the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97 in the direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 3 (b), when the game ball which has flowed in the left holding portion 92e is received, the distributing member 92 is turned to the left by the weight of the game ball and the game ball is moved to the first start winning opening 36. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 3C, the right holding portion 92f stops in a state where it can receive the next game ball. Then, as shown in FIG. 3 (c), when the game ball which has flowed in the right holding portion 92f is received, the distributing member 92 is rotated to the right by the weight of the game ball and the game ball is moved to the second start winning opening 97. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 3B, the left holding portion 92e stops in a state where it can receive the next game ball.

  There is a high possibility that the game balls flowed down from the holding portions 92e and 92f may flow into the first start winning hole 36 or the second start winning hole 97, but they may not flow in, and if they do not flow out of the winning device 90 leak. In particular, when the momentum when flowing into the holding portions 92e and 92f is strong, there is a high possibility that the fluid does not flow into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97. In addition, you may be comprised so that it may be prize-winning by any starting prize-winning opening.

  Further, when the distributing member 92 rotates, the other holding portion which is not the holding portion holding the gaming ball is in a state of being able to be received toward the inflow port 90a. Then, the game ball accepted next time is guided to the winning opening on the other holding unit side. As a result, the game balls sequentially flowing into the inflow port 90a are alternately distributed to the first start winning opening 36 and the second start winning opening 97.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) so that the player can aim for the winning to the winning device 90, and the game ball is fired to the right side game area (so-called right It is possible to aim for winning in the common drawing starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by striking.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 making the special view change display game. A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the collective display device 50 is a special view 1 display for the first special view variation display game configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like as shown in FIG. Fluctuation display part) 51a (D1) and the special figure 2 display (the second special figure fluctuation display part) 51b (D2) for the second special figure fluctuation display game, and a common drawing fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps Variable display unit 52 (common view display unit) 52 (D10, D18), and storage display units 53, 54, 55 (D11 to D16) for informing the starting memory number of each variable display game similarly formed of LED lamps. Equipped with

  In addition, a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator, right strike notification unit) 56 (D8) that informs the collective display device 50 that the game state is more advantageous to hit the right than to hit the left. ), A second gaming status display unit (second gaming status indicator, time saving status notification unit) 57 (D9) that lights up when time saving status occurs and notifies time saving status occurrence; probability of big hit when the gaming machine 10 is powered on The third gaming state display unit (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) 58 (D17) indicating that the state is a high probability state, the number of rounds at the big hit (opening and closing of the special fluctuation winning device 38 A round display unit 59 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of times is provided. The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies of the occurrence of the big hit.

  The special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51a and the special view 2 display 51b is, for example, the middle of the variation display game, ie, while the decorative special view variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51a, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segments is also blinked to drive variation. The display of the inside is displayed so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. Then, when the result of the game is "detachment", for example, the central segment (in addition to the special segment 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on as a result mode of the declination, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the game result is displayed with the result mode (e.g., numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the offset being on as the result mode of the hit (special result mode).

  The common indicator 52 blinks the lamp during fluctuation to indicate that it is fluctuating, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or lighting color according to the game result. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4D, when the symbol number for variation is “0” out of the lamps D10 and D18 constituting the common view display 52 (that is, the game result is lost) ), Only the lamp D10 is turned on, and only the lamp D18 is turned on when the variation symbol number is “1” (ie, the game result is hit and the stop symbol number is “1”). When the variation symbol number is "2" (ie, when the game result is hit and the stop symbol number is "2"), both the lamp D10 and the lamp D18 are turned on.

  Further, the common drawing suspension display 55 displays the number of start memories (= the number of holdings) of the common drawing start gate 34 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the common drawing display 52 by turning off, blinking and lighting a plurality of LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4C, of the lamps D15 and D16 that constitute the common view reservation display 55, when the number of reservations is "0", both the lamps D15 and D16 are selected. When the number of reservations is "1", only the lamp D15 is turned on. When the number of reservations is "2", both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are turned on. When the number of reservations is "3" Is configured to turn on the lamp D15 and turn on the lamp D16, and to turn on both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 when the number of reservations is "4".

  The special figure 1 reserve display 53 turns off the plurality of LEDs for the number of first start memories (special figure 1 reserve) which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 1 indicator 51a. Displayed by blinking or lighting. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, of the lamps D11 and D12 constituting the special view 1 suspension display 53, when the number of special view start memories is “0”, the lamp D11 and When both lamps D12 are turned off, and when the number of start memories is "1", only lamp D11 is turned on. When the number of start memories is "2", both lamps D11 and D12 are turned off. The lamp D11 is turned on and the lamp D12 is turned on when the number of start memories is "3", and the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are set when the number of start memories is "4". Is configured to cause both sides to blink.

  The special figure 2 reserve display 54 turns off the plurality of LEDs for the number of second start memories (special figure 2 reserve) which is the right to execute the second special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 2 indicator 51 b. , Blink, display by lighting. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, of the lamps D13 and D14 constituting the special view 2 suspension display 54, when the number of special view 2 start memories is “0”, the lamp D13 and When both lamps D14 are turned off, and when the number of starting memories is "1", only lamp D13 is lit, and when the number of starting memories is "2", both lamps D13 and D14 are turned off. Is turned on, the lamp D13 is turned on and the lamp D14 is turned on when the number of start memories in the special view 2 is "3", and the number of lights stored in the start table is "4", the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are turned on. Is configured to cause both sides to blink.

  The first gaming state display unit (right hitting notification unit) 56 is composed of an LED lamp etc. For example, as shown in FIG. 4 (f), the gaming condition in which the left hitting is more advantageous than the right hitting (normal hitting state In the case of), the lamp is turned off, and in the gaming state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting (right hitting), the lamp is turned on.

  The second game state display unit (time reduction state notification unit) 57 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, and as shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, in the normal game state where time reduction state is not generated At the time), the lamp is turned off, and when the short time condition is occurring (during the short time operation), the lamp is turned on.

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 58 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, and for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of the probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the probability state of the big hit is the high probability state (probable change state) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 59 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, for example, turns off the lamp when not in the special game state based on the jackpot, and corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn on the lamp. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4E, when the selected number of rounds is "16" among the lamps D3 to D7 constituting the round display unit 59, the lamps D3, D5, and D7 are lit. In the state, when the number of rounds selected is "2", the lamps D4 and D6 are configured to be in the lighting state. The round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

FIG. 5 shows details of the effect operation unit 550.
FIG. 5A is a plan view of the effect operation unit 550. As shown in FIG. 5A, the effect operation unit 550 of the present embodiment is configured to include an effect button (push button) 25 and a touch panel 29 provided on the upper surface of the effect button (push button) 25. It is done. That is, the effect operation unit 550 has a touch sensor function (touch panel function) in addition to the physical push button function.

  Then, sensitivity setting data and LED brightness data are transmitted from the effect control board (effect control device) 300 to the effect operation unit 550, and from the effect operation portion 550 to the effect control board (effect control device) 300, an effect button The push button signal (press detection signal) from the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the (push button) 25 and the touch ON / OFF signal (contact / non-contact detection signal) from the touch sensor 29a included in the touch panel 29 are output It is configured to be

  In the case of the present embodiment, a pressing operation on the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 550 (a pressing operation of pushing the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 550 and pressing down the rendering operation unit 550) by the presentation button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the presentation button (push button) 25 ) To detect. A plurality of points are provided on the top surface of the effect operation unit 550, and a touch sensor provided on the touch panel 29 detects a touch operation on the points provided on the top surface of the effect operation unit 550.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, nine points “TSW1” to “TSW8” and “Pa” are provided as the plurality of points. More specifically, the "TSW4" point provided at the center of the top surface of the effect operation unit 550, the "TSW1" point provided to the left of the "TSW4" point, and the back side of the "TSW4" point The "TSW3" point provided on the board 30 side, the "TSW6" point provided on the right of the "TSW4" point, and the "TSW8" provided on the near side (player's side) of the "TSW4" point Point, "TSW2" point provided between "TSW1" point and "TSW3" point, "TSW5" point provided between "TSW3" point and "TSW6" point, and "TSW6" Between the "TSW7" point provided between the point and the "TSW8" point, and between the "TSW8" point and the "TSW1" point And "Pa" point, which is provided, is provided. The number of points is not limited to nine and can be arbitrarily changed. Further, in FIG. 5B, for convenience, each point of “TSW1” to “TSW8” is described as “TSW1” to “TSW8”, however, in the rendering operation unit 550 of this embodiment, FIG. As shown in (a), there is no such notation.

  The points at which a touch operation can be detected by the touch sensor of the touch panel 29 are eight points of “TSW1” to “TSW8” points, and the touch operation is not detected at the “Pa” point. Of course, the touch operation may be detected even at the “Pa” point. In addition, at each of nine points “TSW1” to “TSW8” points and “Pa” points, LEDs (systems of full color in the case of the present embodiment) of independent systems are arranged.

  The “Pa” point is, for example, using the “Pa” point LED as a notification lamp for one-shot notification, or sequentially turning on the LED at each point on the top of the effect operation unit 550 like a roulette “Pa” point It can be used for the production of a definite system, such as using the LED of the “the exact (or definite variation confirmed)” point, and using the “Pa” point the LED for the accurate pre-reading.

  Here, the lighting brightness of the LED for illuminating the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 (specifically, the LED disposed at the “TSW1” to “TSW8” point, “Pa” point, etc.) is adjusted to the brightness (hall setting) , And player adjustment) are excluded from the subject. That is, the lighting brightness of the LED is constant without being affected by the brightness adjustment. In addition, the touch sensor has a function of forcibly turning off the touch when the touch on state (contact state) continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 35 seconds (basic setting)). Has a function of outputting a signal. That is, the touch sensor (touch detection IC) is configured to be unable to detect a continuous touch operation for a predetermined time or more.

  Examples of the operation of the player detected by the effect operation unit 550 include an operation shown in FIG. 5C. The “single hit” is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 once, and the “continuous hit” is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 a plurality of times at intervals within a predetermined time. The “long press” is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 for a predetermined time or more, and the “touch” is an operation of touching the touch panel 29. "" Pa "operation (TSW1 or 8) + long press" is in contact with one or both of "Pa" point or two points "TSW1" point and "TSW8" point adjacent to it. “Flick” is an operation of sliding so that the user touches the touch panel 29 while the user is touching it. Of course, the operation to be detected is not limited to these operations.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38 or the outflow 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 flows into the gaming area 32 Discharged from And, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38, the number of the number according to the type of winning opening won. The winning balls are discharged from the dispensing unit controlled by the dispensing control device 200 (see FIG. 6) to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 6) including a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided in the common view start gate 34. When the gaming ball driven into the area 32 passes through the common drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and the common drawing variation display game is played. In addition, a state in which the common drawing fluctuation display game can not be started, for example, a state in which the common drawing fluctuation display game is already played and the common drawing fluctuation display game is not ended, or the common drawing fluctuation display game hits When 37 is converted to the open state and the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start gate 34, the common drawing start memory number is added if the common drawing start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) By 1), one common figure starting memory is stored. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 55 of the batch display device 50. Further, a random number value (hit random number value) for hit determination for determining the result of the common pattern variation display game is stored in the common drawing start memory, and the hit random number value is determined as the hit value. And determine the result of the general drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

  The common drawing variation display game is provided on the collective display device 50, and is displayed on the fluctuation display unit (general drawing indicator) 52 configured by the LED, and the lighting mode and lighting color of this LED are ordinary Make identification information (general drawing, normal symbol). Note that the general-purpose display 52 is configured as a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. You may. If the stop display of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a common drawing specification result, it becomes a hit of the common drawing, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened for a predetermined time. Thereby, the game ball easily wins the second starting winning opening inside the normal variation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special view variation display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the winning ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are each provided with a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 3 provided therein. It is detected by the switch 97a and the start opening 2 switch 37a. The gaming ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as a starting winning ball for the first special view variation display game, and is stored as a first starting memory within a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected as the start winning ball of the second special view fluctuation display game, and is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) as the second start memory. Is stored in In addition, when the starting winning ball is detected, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted random value is within the gaming control device 100 (see FIG. 6). The special map storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special map start storage within a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). Then, the number of storages of this special view start storage is displayed on the storage display unit (special view 1 suspension display 53, special view 2 suspension display 54) for the start winning number notification of the collective display device 50 and the center The display device 41 of the case 40 is also displayed as a decorative special view start memory display.

  The game control device 100 is a special figure 1 display 51a (variation display device) based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, or their start memory. Alternatively, the first or second special view variation display game is played on the special view 2 display 51b (the variation display device). The first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figure, identification information) and then displaying a predetermined result mode as a stop. Further, a decorative special-figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed on the display device (image display device) 41 is executed. Then, when the display mode of the special view 1 display 51a or the special view 2 display 51b becomes the special result mode (special result) as a result of the special view variation display game, it becomes a big hit and the special gaming state ( It becomes so-called, the big hit state). In addition, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode.

  The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a right variation display area In each of the second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, while performing the variable display game by the decoration special symbol corresponding to the special drawing start memory number, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest.

  The special view 1 display 51 a and the special view 2 display 51 b may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 a and the special view 2 display 51 b in the gaming machine 10.

  In addition, the first start winning opening 36 (or the second starting winning opening) is possible in a state where the first special view changing display game (second special view changing display game) can be started and the number of starting memories is 0. When the gaming ball wins in 97 or the normal variation winning device 37), the starting memory is stored along with the generation of the starting right, and the number of starting memories is increased by one, and immediately after the starting memory, the first special The figure variation display game (the second special figure variation display game) is started, and at this time, the number of starting memories is decremented by one. On the other hand, the first special view variation display game (second special view variation display game) can not be started immediately, for example, the first or second special view variation display game is already played, and the special view variation display game is ended. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36 (or the second starting winning opening 97 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37) when the player is not in the state or in the special game state, the number of starting memories is the upper limit number If less, the number of starting memories is incremented by one and one starting memory is stored. Then, when the number of starting memories becomes 1 or more, the first special view variation display game (the second special view variation display game) can be started (the previous special view variation display game is ended or in the special gaming state) At the end, the number of starting memories is decremented by one, and the first special view variation display game (the second special view variation display game) is started based on the stored starting storage. In the following description, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as a special view variation display game.

  In addition, although it does not specifically limit, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the 1st starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 3 switch 97a in the 2nd starting winning opening 97, the starting opening 2 switch in the normal fluctuation winning a prize apparatus 37 37a, gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, large winning opening switch 38a, a coil for detecting magnetism is a noncontact type that detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil Magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are targets of replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach) and Special 3 reach (SP3 reach) are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or break) of the special figure variation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current gaming state, the current game Select one of the variation pattern tables from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the operating condition (time saving operation condition (general power support condition)) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the condition, the number of starting memories, etc. Get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting opening 2 switch in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 37a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning opening 97, the gate switch 34a in the common view starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, these switches An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which is supplied with a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from the circuit and is converted to a 0 V-5 V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the start opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the big winning opening switch 38a are second inputs. It is input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the above and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38 b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special fluctuation winning device 38 and a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37 c opening the movable member 37 b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided to output open / close data of The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the common power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 Third driver 138c outputting on / off driving signal of lead-in side digit line, fourth driver 138d outputting external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to external device such as management device to external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG. 7.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at power failure A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the rendering device 44 (for example, a movable combination that enhances the rendering effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, a frame rendering device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for presentation) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame rendering device is provided. Also good.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the common drawing based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34 The game is compared with the judgment value stored in the table to determine the hit-off of the common drawing fluctuation display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the regular drawing display 52, processing is performed to display a regular drawing fluctuation display game which is stopped and displayed. If the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit, the common drawing display 52 displays special result modes corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol, and the common current solenoid 37c is displayed. In operation, the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing display 52.

  In addition, starting winning combination (starting memory) is remembered on the basis of the input of detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 1 switch 36a which is equipped in 1st starting winning a prize opening 36, on the basis of this starting memory, 1st special figure fluctuation indication A process of determining the hit of the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed by extracting a random number value for the big hit determination of the game and comparing it with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 2 switch 37a which is equipped to normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 and starting opening 3 switch 97a which is equipped to 2nd starting winning a prize opening 97 remembers starting memory, Based on the starting memory, the random number value for the big hit judgment of the second special figure fluctuation display game is extracted, it compares with the judgment value which is remembered in ROM 111B, it does the process of judging the hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game .

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (rendering control command) including the determination result of the first special view variation display game or the second special view variation display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special view 1 display 51a or the special view 2 display 51b, processing is performed to display a special view fluctuation display game in which the stop display is performed. That is, the game control apparatus 100 is a variable display game based on winning on the starting winning area (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32. It constitutes game control means to control the progress.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  And, when the result of the special view fluctuation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special view 1 display 51a or the special view 2 display 51b, and generates the special gaming state. Do the process of In the processing for generating the special gaming state, for example, the CPU 111A performs control to open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b, and to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. . Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51a or the special figure 2 display 51b.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state (low probability state). In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 determines the time saving state (also referred to as a specific gaming state, a common drawing high probability state, and a general power support state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends. It is possible to occur. In this short time state, the probability (the probability per common drawing) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (generally drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) It is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state.

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set to perform control to set the common fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (E.g., 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability (the probability per common drawing) to be hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 0/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a high probability (generally high probability state, eg 250/251).

  In the time reduction state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power open times, the common power open time, and the common drawing probability. Make the time for state change longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, after the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed first, the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc. when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. The device can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. It is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on from the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (step S16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17), If normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection region 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the check sums of the two match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. 9 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

  Further, it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal power failure inspection area check data (step S17; N or step S18). N: If it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 9 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  In step S21 of FIG. 9, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined. Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S22). Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25. Also, when the special drawing is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 (On) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S25), step S31 Go to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a screen designated command (a command for a customer waiting demo screen when waiting for a customer, other than that If so, a plurality of commands such as a recovery screen command are sent.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying a predetermined time ( For example, a plurality of commands such as a command for performing notification of RAM initialization with light and sound for 30 seconds) are transmitted.

  In step S31, processing is performed to activate a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) Save a specific area of RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number), random number which determines hit of common drawing (hit random number), random number which determines hit symbol of common drawing (touch symbol random number) From step S33, the interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock at a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, the big hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing unit timer interrupt It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as processing. In addition, in the big hit design random number, in per random number, in per design random number, adopting the so-called “initial value change method” which changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of random number There is. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by the hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step S35, set the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus (step S36), It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and the initial value random number update processing in the above step S35 is performed in both cases when such a method is adopted. In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing for temporarily prohibiting the interrupt (step S39) A process (step S40) of outputting off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), and then a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.
Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.
Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 10 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), and the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56). It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 11 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number updating process, first, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61). Then, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62), and the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.
Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, “the initial hit random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the common view variation display game, and “the first hit random number symbol” is a random number that determines the stop symbol for the common view variation display game It is a random number that becomes the initial value of. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 12 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) is performed to control the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, a common power solenoid 37c).
Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) are performed. Thereafter, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the start opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a of the common drawing, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a Also, a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) is performed to monitor errors (whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is opened). In addition, special figure game processing (step S109) which performs processing concerning a special figure fluctuation display game and common drawing game processing (step S110) which performs processing concerning a common drawing fluctuation display game is performed.

Next, segment LED editing processing (step S111) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying the special view variation display game and displaying various information related to the game to display desired content (step S111) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality or board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) is performed to set signals output to various external devices in the output buffer (step S114), and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122, is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122), and the read input port 1 state is saved in the switch control area 1 in RWM ( Storage) (step S123).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 122) are as follows.
<1> Glass frame open detection switch 63 (bit 0)
<2> Main unit frame open detection switch 64 (bit 1)
<3> RAM initialization switch 112 (bit 2) (used in this process)
<4> Power failure monitoring signal (bit 3) (used in this process)
<5> Dispensing error status signal (bit 4)
<6> Shoot ball out switch signal (bit 5)
<7> Overflow switch signal (bit 6)
<8> Touch switch signal (bit 7)

  Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data Are prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 123) are as follows. The switch monitored by the input port 2 has no inverted bit.
<1> Starting opening 2 switch 37a (bit 0) (Also output as "Starting opening 2 winning signal" and "Normal electric combination 1 winning signal 1" by the pattern branch)
<2> Start opening 1 switch 36a (bit 1) ("Start opening 1 winning signal")
<3> Left winning opening switch (bit 2) ("normal winning opening 1 winning signal")
<4> Right winning opening switch (bit 3) ("normal winning opening 2 winning signal")
The “left winning opening switch” is a winning opening switch 35 a provided on the left side of the winning device 90, and the “right winning opening switch” is a winning opening switch 35 a provided on the right of the winning device 90.
<5> Gate switch 34a (bit 4) ("Normal signal 1 related to gate passing signal 1")
<6> large winning opening switch 38a (bit 5) ("special electric role 1 winning signal 1")
<7> Starting opening 3 switch 97a (bit 6) ("Starting opening 3 winning signal")
<8> Not used (bit 7) (The circuit is connected to a relay board (not shown) as a gate switch spare, and is fixed to GND connection (Low: 0) on the relay board so as to be always off.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data Are prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is ended.

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 124) are as follows.
<1> Board radio wave sensor 62 (bit 0) (inverted bit)
<2> Switch error detection signal (bit 1)
<3> Magnetic sensor 61 (bit 2)
<4> Frame radio error signal (bit 3)
<5> Payout busy signal (bit 4)
<6> unused (bit 5 to 7)

Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 may be different data but may be data of the same value as a result. is there.
Moreover, although the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, there is a possibility that they may be data of the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the bit requiring inversion is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state of the target switch control area is entered. Save (store) (step S144). Then, it waits for the delay time (for example, about 100 microseconds) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

  When the delay time has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state of the target switch control area ( The first data) is loaded, and the inverted data (second data) is saved (stored) (step S149). Thereafter, a definite bit pattern in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit in the other is 0 in the first and second readings is created (step S150), and the logic between the definite bit pattern and the port input state (second data) The product is taken, and it is set as the decided bit this time (step S151).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the state is 0 and the other bit is 1 in the first and second readings is created (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step S154), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Finish the switch reading process.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing the result with the previous reading result. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has changed. However, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interruption process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 which outputs data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output is synthesized and output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the common power solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, data of "door / frame open" data of "security signal") are output ports for digit / external information output It outputs to 136 (step S166).

  Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). In this embodiment, when the digit counter value is 0, the digit line and segment line of the special view 1 display 51a are selected, and when the digit counter value is 1, the digit line of the special view 2 display 51b is selected. And segment lines are selected. Also, when the digit counter value is 2, the digit line and segment line of the general display 52 are selected, and when the digit counter value is 3, the special view 1 reserve display 53, the special figure 2 reserve display Digit lines and segment lines of the display 54, the right-handed notification unit 56, the short time condition notification unit 57, the probability condition display unit 58, and the round display unit 59 are selected. As a result, the plurality of light emitting display portions provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information are synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal" Output data of 4 "data of" pattern decision number signal ", data of" starting opening signal ", data of" main prize ball signal ") and output data of firing permission (step S170), and the synthesized data is The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S172). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 Then (step S176), the output process is finished.

The output data of the segment line corresponding to each digit line is set in the segment area for each display provided in the RAM 111C (RWM) in the process described later. Specifically, it is set in the symbol variation control process (see FIG. 51) in the special view game process shown in FIG. 25 and the common-play game process shown in FIG. 53, and the segment LED editing process shown in FIG.
Since all of these processes are performed in one timer interrupt process, output data corresponding to all the segment lines is set in the segment area in the RAM 111C regardless of the value of the digit counter. Then, among the output data of the segment lines set in this manner, the output data of the segment lines corresponding to the value of the digit counter of this time is selected and used.
Further, as described above, the RAM 111C can hold stored data even if the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped. The segment area for storing output data of segment lines in the RAM 111C and the area for storing the value of the digit counter are subject to checksum calculation in the checksum calculation process executed when the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped. Is included in the Therefore, it is the target of the determination of the legitimacy performed when the supply of power to the gaming machine is resumed. As a result, when the gaming machine recovers normally from the power failure, it is possible to restart the display of the batch display device 50 from the state at the time of the power failure.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition, the display related to the game controlled by the game control means (game control device 100) to control the game in an integrated manner and the game control means The display device includes a plurality of light emitting display units (a special display 1 display 51a, a special display 2 display 51b, a generic display 52, a special display 1 suspension display). Device 53, special view 2 suspension indicator 54, general drawing suspension indicator 55, right-handed alert unit 56, short time status alert unit 57, probability status indicator 58, and round indicator 59), and the game control means Memory means (RAM 111C) capable of holding data even when supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, and validity of predetermined data stored in the storage means when supply of power to the gaming machine is started Legitimacy to judge the sex The game control apparatus 100 is configured to restart the game based on the data stored in the storage unit when the legitimacy determination unit confirms the legitimacy, and executes the game at predetermined intervals. In the timer interrupt, the digit counter which is information for selecting the common line (digit line) of a plurality of light emitting display units is updated, and dynamic control is performed to output segment data according to the value of the digit counter to the display device. The display control of a plurality of light emission display units is performed, and in the timer interrupt processing, all of the segment data corresponding to each common line are generated regardless of the value of the digit counter and stored in the storage unit. Only the segment data corresponding to the value of the digit counter is used from the inside, and the validity determination means is The predetermined data to sex determination target, and thus contained all the segment data corresponding to each common line stored in at least the storage means.
Therefore, since the predetermined data to be judged as the validity of the validity determination means includes all of the segment data corresponding to each common line stored in the storage means, the supply of power to the gaming machine is When it is started, the game can be started from the state where the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, and the display of the fluctuation display game without discomfort can be made.

Further, the game control means can execute a plurality of types of variable display games (first special view variable display game, second special view variable display game, common drawing variable display game) having different start conditions, and the display device is A plurality of light emitting display units including a plurality of light emitting units are provided corresponding to each of a plurality of types of variable display games, and the plurality of light emitting display units correspond to different common lines.
Therefore, the game can be started from the state where the supply of the power to the gaming machine is stopped when the supply of the power to the gaming machine is started in any of the plurality of types of variable display games, and the fluctuation display without a sense of discomfort The game can be displayed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.
The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counter area is set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls in the case of this embodiment). The counter number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1, respectively. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining winning balls area (step S187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, whenever the number of remaining winning balls is ten, the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number area of the winning balls (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).
The payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. Be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay the prize ball. When in the state, it is configured to transmit a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.
The conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy status) are, for example, during the payout operation, the ball lending operation, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the frame radio wave illegal occurrence, the payout ball detection switch (dispensed The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a shot ball, a shortage of payout error, a payout excess error, and the number of unpaid balls Etc) (when it is not = 0) etc.

  If the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, "0" in the winning number counter area to be checked Determine if there is a non-count number.

  Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S 197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a counted number (step S195; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 The payout amount command corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.
As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.
Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is generally performed, and the winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special) provided in the game area 32 The game control means (the game control apparatus 100) which transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 38), and the payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command sent from the game control means And the gaming control means is a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control. Control to transmit the winning ball command to the payout control means based on the above, and when a power failure occurs and returns from the blackout, a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is outputted from the payout control means If Also, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the prize ball is displayed in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means continuously output for a predetermined period. The command is to be sent to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas (a first start winning port 36, a second starting winning port 97, a normal fluctuation winning device 37, a general winning hole 35, a special fluctuation winning device 38) having different winning balls. The control means (game control apparatus 100) is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of specifying presence / absence of non-transmission of a prize ball command for instructing payout control of gaming balls for each number of prize balls. When the signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200). The status signal indicates that whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control is performed prior to the identification of whether or not there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter. It will be

  In addition, game control is generally performed, and a game to a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special fluctuation winning device 38) A game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a winning ball command based on the winning of a ball, and a payout control means (payout control) for performing payout control of the gaming ball based on the winning ball command transmitted from the game control means And the gaming control means indicates that the status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when there is, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the gaming ball in a predetermined winning area Prize ball signal External information output means (game control apparatus 100) for outputting the prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means is a state signal output from the This means that the winning ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the control can be started.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (a first start winning opening 36, a second start winning opening 97, a normal fluctuation winning apparatus One winning ball command is generated when a winning ball command is generated on the basis of one winning on 37, the general winning opening 35, and the special variation winning device 38), and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command counter (the game control device 100) can store the information of the winning on the basis of one winning in a predetermined winning area Yes, given The number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball in the prize area at the time of winning, and updating the game ball in response to transmission to the prize ball command to the payout control means. The information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined winning area, and outputs the winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the cumulative value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter can store information on winnings in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and updates the game ball at the time of winning in a predetermined winning area, as well as external information By performing updating in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of winning balls by the output means, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 17 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number update processing. In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether or not the random number for the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value (step S213), and it is determined whether or not the random number per block is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (Step S214).

  If the hit random number in the drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number in the drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). If the random number per block is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial stage of the random number per block is loaded The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216), and the hit symbol random number waits for the next initial value (start value) setting It is determined whether there is any (step S217).

  If the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. Also, if the hit pattern random number of the common drawing is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the next time initial value is loaded and the initial symbol random number is loaded (step S218). The next initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 18 shows the random number updating process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random update processing 2 Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for main process is performed for either upper 1 byte or lower 1 byte. Are configured to

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the variation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when “1”, the variation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when “2” The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is "3", the variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referenced based on the calculated address (step S234). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

  Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing DRAM etc. In addition, although the counter "M1 counter" which operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M 1 counter with the mask value as the added value Is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S 237), and the process proceeds to step S 239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value ( The process proceeds to step S239). The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), Go to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated as the lower 1 byte of the random value (1 A byte is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S 242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S 237 or S 238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S 233 (step S243). Then, if the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in a lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is taken as a new random number again (step S244). The data is saved in a lower random number area of byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number updating process 2 is ended. If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), the new random number value (when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the high-order random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S247). And the random number updating process 2 ends.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) on the effect random number update table. The address of the update area, etc. is defined for the type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A is configured to display the special view fluctuation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls to the start region of the first start winning opening 36 and the second start winning opening 97 and the normal change winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation aspect (variation pattern) is provided.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 19 shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the high winning opening Even though the key is not open, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor whether the prize winning opening has an illegal prize and to detect a normal prize.
After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an incorrect winning and normal winning is achieved. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S304) to detect is performed.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud winning error notification command, a fraud winning The information of the number upper limit value (the number of irregularities judged), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. In addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit, lower address of winning number counter area 1, winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each of the switches to be monitored.

  Next, prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general public (step S305), and monitor whether there is an incorrect winning and detect the normal winning while the fraud & winning monitoring process (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening switch (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35 (left winning opening switch, right winning opening switch) ) Is prepared (step S307), a winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the winning number is performed, and a starting hole error monitoring process (step S309) is performed.

Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the present monitoring is updated (step S310). In the case of the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S312) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.
In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. The monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is configured. Ru.

Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S313). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S314) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.
In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The monitoring of the state is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is It is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S315). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S315; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S315; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S316), and the gaming machine determines whether or not an error has occurred. A state check process (step S317) is performed.
In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S318) is performed to check a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing in steps S316 to S318 is performed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is performed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S316 to S318 are performed every 16 ms.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 20 shows the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, and S306) in the above-described prize hole switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two big winning opening switches 38a of the special variation winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37. The detection of winnings is easy for the large winnings opening (special variation winning device 38) and the Fuden (normal variation winning device 37) because the opening and closing members are forcibly opened to insert the game balls and the award balls are paid out. In addition to the monitoring of fraud.

  In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S 321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S 322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning hole switch targeted for error monitoring is the large winning hole switch 38a, and the winning hole switch for error monitoring is started In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is being executed based on the hit of the drawing.

  Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (Step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (Step S332). If there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of updated incorrect winnings is equal to or greater than the number of monitoring targets. It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning opening switch subject to error monitoring, the number of fraud determination determinations is set to five, but the number of unauthorized occurrences defines a different number for each type of winning opening switch. It can also be done.
For example, when the winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the winning opening, and the gaming ball is in the effective period of the winning opening switch. The reason is that it is not to judge that the signal is illegitimate if the player has won a prize or the signal has a noise, and it is not so easy to judge it as an error although it is not illegitimate.

Then, if the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (Step S325; N), a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (Step S330). In the winning opening monitoring table (corruption monitoring table) prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input on the target switch, lower address of fraud monitoring information The lower address of the illegal prize number area, the illegal prize error notification command, the illegal prize number upper limit value (incorrect judgment judgment number), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. .
If the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the number of fraudulent occurrences (step S326). (For example, 60000 ms) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step S328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if the fraud monitoring period is not underway (step S322; N), the winning hole monitoring table of the target winning hole switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning balls is performed. Do. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and it is determined whether or not the update permission of the notification timer is permitted (step S333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. When updating of the notification timer is permitted (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is one big winning opening switch 38a, and is not permitted when the winning hole switch subject to error monitoring is the other big winning opening switch 38a. As a result, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently as the fraudulent notification about the special variation winning device 38, and it is prevented that time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . When the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335), and if the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step S336) and set the fraud recovery flag as a fraud flag. Prepare (step S337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S 338; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step S339), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S 338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted The value of the incorrect flag area is compared (step S340).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S341), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step S 342), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 21 shows winning number counter updating processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening monitoring table (step S 351), and whether there is an input (accurate change in input) to the target winning opening switch It determines (step S352). In the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table (corruption monitoring table) prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, a monitoring switch bit for each switch in addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches), Information of the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined.

  If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). If the target winning opening switch has an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether it overflows (step S355). When no overflow occurs (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). If an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for winning balls (delivery command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S 357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S 358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step S 359). When no overflow occurs (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has ended (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main winning ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

  If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (step S362; N), the process returns to the process (step S352) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Starting mouth error monitoring process]
FIG. 22 shows the starting opening error monitoring processing (step S309) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. In this starting opening error monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the starting opening 1 switch 36a (step S371). When it is determined that there is no input to the start opening 1 switch 36a (step S371; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the start opening 3 switch 97a (step S375) and there is an input to the start opening 1 switch 36a When it is determined (step S371; Y), it is determined whether the previous winning is also a winning to the first starting opening (first start winning opening 36) (step S372).

In step S372, when it is determined that the previous winning is also a winning to the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step S372; Y), that is, the game ball is the first starting winning in the winning device 90 When the opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 are not alternately distributed, the value of the continuous winning number area is updated by +1 (step S 373), and the value of the continuous winning number area is the upper limit value (this embodiment). In the case of, it is determined whether or not four or more (step S 374). When it is determined that the value of the continuous winning number area is equal to or more than the upper limit (step S 374; Y), the process proceeds to step S 379, and the value of the continuous winning number area is determined not to be equal to or more than the upper limit. In (Step S 374; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 3 switch 97 a (Step S 375).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S372 that the previous winning is not the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step S372; N), 1 is saved in the continuous winning number area ( Step S384) Save the starting opening 1 winning combination information in the starting opening determination data area (step S385), and determine whether there is an input to the starting opening 3 switch 97a (step S375).

If it is determined in step S375 that there is no input to the starting opening 3 switch 97a (step S375; N), it is determined whether the starting opening error notification timer is 0 (step S388).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S 375 that there is an input on start opening 3 switch 97 a (step S 375; Y), it is determined whether the previous winning was also the third starting opening (second start winning opening 97). (Step S376).

  When it is determined in step S376 that the previous winning is also a winning to the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step S376; Y), that is, the gaming ball is the first starting winning in the winning device 90 When the opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 are not alternately distributed, the value of the continuous winning number area is updated by +1 (step S377), and the value of the continuous winning number area is the upper limit value (this embodiment). In the case of, it is determined whether or not four or more (step S378). If it is determined that the value of the continuous winning number area is not the upper limit value or more (step S378; N), it is determined whether the starting opening error notification timer is 0 (step S388) and the value of the continuous winning number area is If it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded (step S378; Y), the process proceeds to step S379.

In step S379, the value of the continuous winning number area is kept at the upper limit (step 379).
Next, an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the starting opening error notification timer area (step S380), an error occurring flag is saved in the starting opening error flag area (step S381), and a starting opening error occurring command is prepared. (Step S382), effect command setting processing (step S383) is performed, and the starting opening error monitoring processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S376 that the previous winning is not a winning to the third starting opening (the second starting winning opening 97) (step S376; N), 1 is saved in the continuous winning number area ( Step S386) The starting opening 3 winning combination information is saved in the starting opening determination data area (step S387), and it is determined whether the starting opening error notification timer is 0 (step S388).
If it is determined in step S388 that the starting opening error notification timer is 0 (step S388; Y), the starting opening error monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S388 that the starting opening error notification timer is not 0 (step S388; N), the starting opening error notification timer is updated by -1 (step S389), and the starting opening error notification timer is 0 It is determined whether or not (step S390).

If it is determined in step S390 that the starting opening error notification timer is not 0 (step S390; N), the starting opening error monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S390 that the starting opening error notification timer is 0 (step S390; Y), the normal middle flag is saved in the starting opening error flag area (step S391). Are prepared (step S392), rendering command setting processing (step S393) is performed, and the starting opening error monitoring processing is ended.
In the winning device 90, the game balls are configured to be alternately distributed to the first starting opening (the first starting winning opening 36) and the third starting opening (the second starting winning opening 97). In the case of winning continuously in the starting opening, there is a possibility of a failure in the winning device 90 or an incorrect winning due to a fishing line or the like, so in the starting opening error monitoring processing, it is checked. In this embodiment, an error is treated when the same starting opening is won four times in a row.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 23 shows gaming machine state check processing (steps S312, S314, and S317) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S401), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step S402).
Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process). As this information, for example, the lower address of the head address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal Judgment data of ON, state OFF command (make error notification end command in case of error system), state ON command (make error notification start command in case of error system), state OFF monitoring timer comparison value, state ON monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step S402; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S403), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S404). Thereafter, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S405), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S409). If the target signal is not on (step S402; N), it is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (is normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S402; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S406), and the state on command of the target is acquired and prepared (step S407). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S408), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S409). When the target signal is on (step S402; Y), it is a state indicating that the error signal is an error (abnormal or incorrect) in the error signal, and the signal from the touch switch is touched. Is a state showing

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step S409; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S412) It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S413). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S409; N), ie, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ((step S409) Step S410). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S411), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S412), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S413).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S413; N), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. When the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S413; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by −1 and the comparison value is held at the value of −1 (step S414). The status flag thus compared is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S415).

  Then, if the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S415; Y), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S415; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S416), and the rendering command setting process is performed. The process is then performed (step S417), and the gaming machine state check process is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S404 or the state on command prepared in step S407 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 24 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S318) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, it is determined first whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S421). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is on (step S421; Y), a busy status flag is prepared as a status flag (step S422), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S423) It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S426). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S421; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S424), and an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S425). ), It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S426). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

  If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S426; N), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S427), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (Step S428), and the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S429). If the value in the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S426; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S429).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S423 or step S425 (step S430), and if it is not greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S430; N), The payout busy signal check process ends. Also, if it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S430; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the comparison value is kept at -1 (step S431), and prepared in step S422 or step S424. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S432), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be influenced by
In addition, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an undefined state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, and the start opening 3 switch 97a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the display of the special view are performed.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 have a game ball prize, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted and In the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the game result prior determination which determines in advance the game result based on the winning is performed.
Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the gaming ball at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A8) is performed to set information necessary for performing processing.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit The special chart display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process, and the like.
If the special figure game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A11) is performed.

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for ball processing.
If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A7, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for the execution.
If the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51a (step A15), the symbol variation control process (step A16) according to the special view 1 display 51a is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 51b (step A17), the symbol variation control processing (step A18) concerning the special figure 2 display 51b is performed, and the special figure game processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A15 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the jackpot is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 1 switch 36a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is provided. Set the information to indicate that there was a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the first starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 1 (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general public support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless it is left hitting the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), and does not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 unless it is hit right. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the first start port (first start winning port 36) (step A107), the special view start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, a second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared for a prize monitoring table (step A109), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 2 switch 37a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is provided. Set the information to indicate that there was a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the second starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 2 (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is in operation, ie, normal fluctuation If it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which winning of the gaming ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y), It transfers to the process of A114 and performs the process after it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether a common electric charge fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In step A113, when the number of incorrect winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the determined number of fraud occurrences (for example, 5), it is determined that the fraud is in progress. In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114), After the special view starting opening switch common process (step A115) is performed, the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. If it is determined in step A113 that a common electric power fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, a third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) is prepared for a prize monitoring table (step A116), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition processing, when the target starting port switch (in this case, the starting port 3 switch 97a) has an input, the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port Set the information to indicate that there was a prize. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the third starting opening which is the starting opening of the special view 2 (step A118).
If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning on the third starting opening (step A118; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A118 that there is a winning on the third starting opening (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general support) (step A119). ).

When it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is not short (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is short (step A119; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless it is hit left to the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), and does not win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 if it is hit right. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a winning in the third starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third start port (the second start winning port 97) (step A122), the special view start port switch common process (step A123) is performed to monitor the start port switch. End the process.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110, and A117) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting port (the first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (the normal fluctuation winning device 37), and the third starting port (the second starting winning) Among the openings 97), the prize absence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A131), and the starting opening to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a It is determined whether there is an input on the switch (step A132).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.
If latch data exists in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A135). Then, among the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), the winning opening of the starting opening to be monitored The presence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process is ended.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-mentioned starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special view starting port switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a.

As shown in FIG. 28, in the special view starting port switch common process, first, the number of winnings on the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a. Is loaded the number of times of starting opening signal output which is the number of times of outputting information related to the outside to the control device of the gaming machine 10 (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), the number of outputs overflows It is determined (step A143).
If the output number does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal output number area (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows and saving is not performed.

Next, whether the number of to-be-updated special views (starting memory) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a is less than the upper limit It determines (step A145).
If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends.
In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of special figures 1 or number of special figures 2) is updated by +1 Step A146), prepare the decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special drawing reservation number (step A 147), perform the rendering command setting process (step A 148), and start the starting opening winning flag Is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations is calculated (step A150), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110 and A117 is RWM. In the big hit random number storage area (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting opening switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A153). The jackpot symbol random number is used in the special image reservation information determination process (step A157).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 2) are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A154).
Next, the address (one of places from 1 to 8) of the change order flag storage area corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number is calculated (step A 155), and the calculated area is targeted The variation order flag of (Special figure 1 or special figure 2) is saved (step A156), the special figure reservation information determination process (step A157) is performed, and the special figure starting opening switch common process is ended.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of gaming balls into the start winning area of the first start winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 97, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A start storage means is provided which stores a predetermined number at the upper limit as a start storage which becomes the right of execution of the variable display game. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100), various random number values which are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 36 which is the starting mouth of the special figure 1 Various starting random numbers that are stored as starting memory and extracted based on winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 which is the starting opening of the special figure 2, the second starting with a predetermined number as the upper limit Store as a memory.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view holding information determination process (step A157) in the special view starting opening switch common process described above will be described. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 29, first, a low probability determination flag is prepared (step A161), and it is determined whether or not a big hit is determined by whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit decision value (big hit low probability decision value). A big hit determination process (step A162) is performed, and it is determined whether a big hit is set as a determination result (step A163).
If it is determined in step A163 that a big hit has been set as the determination result (step A163; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step A164) and prepared in step A152 The stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A167.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A163 that a big hit is not set as the determination result (step A163; N), that is, when outliers are set as the determination results, stop symbol information of the outliers is set (step A166). And the process of step A167.

At step A167, the stop symbol information acquired at step A165 or the stop symbol information set at step A166 is saved in the symbol information area (step A167).
Next, a prefetch stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing (step A169) is performed.
Next, a high probability judgment flag is prepared (step A170), and it is judged whether or not a big hit is a big hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit judgment value (big hit high judgment value) (step A171) To determine whether a big hit has been set as the determination result (step A172).
If it is determined in step A172 that a big hit has been set as the determination result (step A172; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step A173), and prepared in step A152. The stop symbol information corresponding to the determined big hit symbol random number is acquired (step A174), and the process proceeds to step A176.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A172 that a big hit is not set as the determination result (step A172; N), that is, if outliers are set as the determination results, stop symbol information of the outliers is set (step A175), shift to the process of step A176.

In step A176, it is determined whether the high probability of the special view is in progress (step A176).
If it is determined in step A176 that the high probability of the special view is not in progress (step A176; N), the process proceeds to step A178.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A176 that the special drawing is in high probability (step A176; Y), the stop symbol acquired in step A174 is stored in the symbol information area in which the symbol information is saved in step A167. The information or the stop symbol information set in step A175 is overwritten and saved (step A177), and the process proceeds to step A178. The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for prefetching of variation patterns and the like.

In step A178, a prefetch stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A178), and effect command setting processing (step A179) is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 transmits the result of determination by the big hit low probability determination value and the result of determination by the big hit high probability determination value each time the special view pending information determination process is executed. Be done.
Next, special figure information setting processing (step A180) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A181).

  Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number indicating the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special drawing fluctuation display game is prepared (step A182), rendering command setting processing is performed (step A183) End the process. The special figure information setting process in step A180 and the variation pattern setting process in step A181 are similar to the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

With the above process, the prefetch stop pattern command including the result of the special view change display game based on the start storage of the preread target and the read change pattern command including the information of the change pattern in the special view change display game based on the start storage It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.
That is, the game control apparatus 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start winning storage means (game control apparatus 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether a special result is obtained Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the pre-read big hit determination process (steps A162 and A171) in the above-mentioned special view suspension information determination process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 30, in the pre-read big hit determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A191), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A192).

If it is determined in step A192 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A192; Y), the determination result is set as the determination result (step A197), and the prefetch big hit determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A192 that the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A192; N), it is determined whether the determination flag prepared immediately before the pre-reading big hit determination processing is the high probability determination flag Step A193).

If it is determined in step A193 that the flag is the high probability determination flag (step A193; Y), that is, if the prefetching big hit determination process is the process of step A171, the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set ( Step A194) It is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A196).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A193 that the flag is not the high probability determination flag (step A193; N), that is, if the prefetch big hit determination process is the process of step A162, the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set. (Step A195) It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A196).

When it is determined in step A196 that the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A196; Y), a release is set as the determination result (step A197), and the prefetch big hit determination process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A196 that the value of the target big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A196; N), that is, a big hit, a big hit is set as the determination result (step A198) The read ahead jackpot determination process ends.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the special winning opening is being processed (step A201). . If the special winning opening is being processed (step A201; Y), it is determined whether the special winning opening switch 38a has an input (step A203). If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A202).
If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A202; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 38a (step A203). If the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (step A202; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended.
Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

When it is determined in step A203 that there is no input to the special winning opening switch 38a (step A203; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A203 that there is an input on the special winning opening switch 38a (step A203; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A204), and a rendering command setting process (step A205) I do.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is "4", that is, it is in the process of being open during the special winning opening open (step A206).

If it is determined in step A206 that the special winning opening is not being processed (step A206; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A206 that the special winning opening is being processed (step A206; Y), the special winning opening count is updated by +1 (step A207), and the special winning opening count is the upper limit. It is determined whether the value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, nine) is reached or more (step A208).

When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A208; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step A208; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A209), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, details of the special view routine processing (step A8) in the special view game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 32, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether both the special view 1 reservation number and the special view 2 reservation number are “0” (step A301).
If it is determined in step A301 that both the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number are not “0” (step A301; N), the flags are loaded from the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total holding number 1) Then (step A302), it is determined whether the current variation is the variation of the special figure 1 (step A303).
If it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is the variation in special figure 1 (step A303; Y), a decoration special figure reserve number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserve number is prepared (step A304), The effect command setting process (step A305) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. At this point in time, the special figure 1 pending number is not updated by -1, but at step A304, a command (decorative special figure pending number command) corresponding to the value updated by -1 is prepared.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A303 that the present fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if the present fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2, A decoration special figure reservation number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), a rendering command setting process (step A308) is performed, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. At this point, although the special figure 2 pending number is not updated by -1, in step A307, a command (decorative special figure pending number command) corresponding to the value updated by -1 is prepared.

If it is determined in step A301 that both the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether a customer waiting demo has been started ( Step A310) If the customer waiting demo has not been started (Step A310; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (Step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.
Next, "0" is set as the processing number for the special drawing routine processing (step A314), the processing number is saved in the special drawing game processing number area (step A315), and the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared ( Step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special view normal processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 33 (a), first, save the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321), (1) A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 323) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (Step A327) is performed.
Next, “1” according to the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the in-fluctuation flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51a blink cycle timer) in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step A332) For example, 100 msec is saved (step A333), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 2 change start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure change display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 change start process shown in FIG. It is intended for memory.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). 2) A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A347) is performed.
Next, “1” according to the special figure variation process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 51 b blink cycle timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area For example, 100 msec is saved (step A353), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
FIG. 34 (a) shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A 361). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A362), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 To do (step A363). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A364) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value is a big hit according to whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

  Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is a big hit (step A365; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information was saved in step A361 (step A366) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
FIG. 34 (b) shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). It should be noted that the one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A 374) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value is a big hit according to whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

  If the determination result in the big hit determination process (step A 374) is a big hit (step A 375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the out information was saved in step A 371 (step A 376) ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 35 shows the big hit determination process (steps A364 and A374) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process. In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A381), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A382). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.
If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A 383).
Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386) .
If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A 388), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A391), and if it is a big hit (step A391; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A392). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A393), the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A394). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A395), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A396). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51a) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information (information showing 16R or 6R in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A397), and the stop symbol number The probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the probability fluctuation determination data area (step A 398), and the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 401). Here, the probability fluctuation determination data is information indicating which mode to shift to after a big hit, and in the present embodiment, “low probability data (normal (without public support))”, “high probability” in step A 398 Data 1 (probability variation (with general power support)) or “high probability data 2 (latency probability variation (without general power support))” is acquired and saved in the probability fluctuation determination data area.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A391; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A399), and the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A400). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A402), and effect command setting processing (step A403) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A404), clear 0 of the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (step A405) 1 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 change start process described above. In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A 411), and if it is a big hit (step A 411; Y) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A412). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A413), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A414). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A 415), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A 416). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 51b) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information (information showing 16R or 6R in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A417), and the stop symbol number The probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the probability fluctuation determination data area (step A418), and the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A421).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A411; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A419), the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then (step A420), a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A421). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A422), and effect command setting processing (step A423) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A424), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared 0 (step A425) 2 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as a variation display game based on the detection of the gaming ball at the first start winning opening 36, and the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variation winning device 37 The variable display game execution means performs the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. In addition, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special view information setting process (steps A180, A324, A344) in the special view 2 change start process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 38, in the special drawing information setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A431), and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the current probability state and the stop pattern pattern number is acquired (step A432). Here, in the present embodiment, as stop symbol pattern numbers, “0: Out of place symbol”, “1:16 R probability variation symbol”, “2: 6 R probability variation symbol A”, “3: 6 R probability variation symbol B”, “4: 6R probability variation symbol C "or" 5: 6R normal symbol "is set. In addition, “1: Normal (without PvP support)”, “2: Probability (with PvP support)”, or “3: Latency probability (without PvP support)” is set as the current probability state. .

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern number is “0”, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern is an out symbol pattern (step A433).
If it is determined in step A 433 that the stop symbol pattern is not dislocated symbol pattern (step A 433; N), the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A 432 is saved in the variation group selection pointer area (step A 435) The special drawing information setting process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A 433 that the stop symbol pattern is dislocated symbol pattern (step A 433; Y), the group corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 reserve number and the special figure 2 reserve number is selected The pointer is updated (step A434), the updated fluctuation group selection pointer is saved in the fluctuation group selection pointer area (step A435), and the special map information setting process is ended.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the distribution of the variation pattern does not affect the number of reservations, but when the stop symbol pattern is an out symbol pattern, the variation pattern is Allocation affects the number of reservations.
Specifically, for example, when the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern and the current gaming state is normal (without power support) or latent probability change (without power support), the number of special figure 1 reservations and Special figure 2 The total value of the number of reservations is “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “ When it is 8 ", distribution of fluctuation patterns differs.
In addition, the stop symbol pattern is a disappointing symbol pattern, and when the current gaming state is a definite change (with general support), the total of the special figure 1 reserve number and the special figure 2 reserve number is "1". The distribution of variation patterns differs between the occasions of “2”, “3” and “4”, “5”, “6”, “7” and “8”.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special pattern 2 change start process (steps A181, A326, A346) at the start of change will be described.
As shown in FIG. 39, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step A441), and the address of the fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation group selection pointer is acquired and prepared (step A442), The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) and prepared (step A 443).

Next, 2-byte distribution processing (step A 444) is performed to acquire the address of the variation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the distribution, prepare (step A 445), and target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step A446).
Next, distribution processing (step A 447) is performed, and the fluctuation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the fluctuation pattern number area (step A448), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A327 and A347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 2 is cleared (step A451). Next, a fluctuation time value table is set (step A452), fluctuation time values corresponding to fluctuation pattern numbers are acquired, and saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A453).

  Then, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step A454), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step A455). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step A456), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A457). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A458), and the free space after the shift is cleared (step A459). Next, the variation order flag storage area is shifted (step A460), the free space after the shift is cleared (step A461), and the variation start information setting process is ended.

Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.
Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 41, in the special figure variation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is prepared (step A501), and effect command setting processing (step A502) is performed.
Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A503), and the set display time is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A504). In the case of the present embodiment, 800 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, and 2000 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern.
Next, "2" according to the processing during special map display is set as the processing number (step A505), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A506).

  Then, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A507), the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2 Save the fluctuation signal (OFF)) in the test signal output data area (Step A508) and set the number of times the symbol is determined to the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. (For example, 256 ms) is saved (step A 509). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51a, the stop flag relating to the change stop on the special view 1 display 51a is saved in the special view 1 change control flag area Save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 51b as the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 51b (step A511), the special figure during fluctuation processing is ended.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special view display process (step A10) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the special figure display processing, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process The big hit flag 2 which is set in the above is loaded (step A601), and a process (step A602) of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is performed. Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A603), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A603; Y), the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game Save the test signal (for example, signal ON during condition device operation, signal ON during item continuous operation device ON, signal per special symbol 2) in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A 606), A round number upper limit table is set (step A 607).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A603 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step A 603; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A 604) and a big hit (step A604; Y) When it is determined, the test signal (for example, the condition device activation signal is ON, the bonus continuous operation device activation signal is ON) for the start of the big hit (special feature 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A605), and the round number upper limit table is set (step A607).

  After performing the process of setting the number-of-rounds upper limit table (step A 607), the number-of-rounds upper limit (16R or 6R in this embodiment) corresponding to the number-of-rounds upper limit information is acquired, and the number of rounds upper limit of RWM. Save to the value area (step A 608). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A 609).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A610), and effect command setting processing (step A613) is performed. After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information that makes the probability of being hit in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A612). (Step A613) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A614), and the effect command setting process (step A614) Do A615).

  Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 10000 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 616), and the big winning opening fraudulent winning of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) corresponding to the special winning opening The number area is cleared (step A617), and the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region of the special winning opening corresponding to the special winning opening information (step A618). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 (step A619) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A 604 (step A 604; N), “0” is set as the processing number for the special view ordinary processing (step A 620) and the processing number The file is saved in the process number area (step A621).
Next, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A 622), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step A 623), and the special view display processing is ended.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A619) in the above-described process of displaying the special view will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, “3” for the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A631), and the processing number is set to the special figure game processing number Save to the area (step A 632).

  Next, save the signal regarding the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal, 2 big hit signals, 3 big hit signals, 4 big hit signals) in the external information output data area ( Step A 633), signals regarding termination of high probability state and short time state (eg, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2) The fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A634). Note that, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the ordinary drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal motorized combination 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A635), and a number with no time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A636). The general drawing low probability flag is saved in the area (step A637).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A638), and the high probability notification flag is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 58) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The area is cleared (step A639), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A640). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery time transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A641). Save the designated signal 1 in the test signal output data area (step A 642), and turn on the right-turning display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 56). The number in the state of striking is saved (step A643), and the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 is ended. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared as the special gaming state occurs.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / in-interval process (step A11) in the above-described special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A 701), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A 702). , Effect command setting processing (step A703) is performed.

Next, save the special winning opening open time (for example, 29 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A704), and set it as "4" for the special winning opening opening processing as the processing number (step A705) The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A706).
Next, save a signal relating to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric combination 1 operating signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step A 707), and store the number of winnings to the special winning opening. The information on the winning opening count number area is cleared (step A 708). Then, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A709), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process (step A12) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the special winning opening open process, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state under execution and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A801).
Then, if it is not the final round (step A801; N), an interval command relating to an interval between rounds is prepared (step A802), effect command setting processing (step A804) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A805.
On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A801; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step A803), and effect command setting processing (step A804). ), And proceeds to the processing of step A805.

In step A805, the processing number is set to "5" for the big winning opening remaining ball processing (step A805). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A806).
Then, save the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 807), and in order to close the opening / closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, the special winning opening solenoid 38b The off data for turning off is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A 808), and the special winning opening open processing is ended.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state under execution and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A 901).

Then, if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A 901; N), "3" is set for the fanfare / interval processing as the processing number (step A 902), and the processing number The file is saved in the processing number area (step A903).
Then, an interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 904), and a signal (for example, the special electric motorized prize 1) regarding the opening end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) The in-operation signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A905), and the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A 901; Y), set "6" for the big hit end process as the process number (step A 906), and process the process number to the special figure game process Save in the number area (step A 907).
Next, an ending time (for example, 5.1 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 908), and a signal (for example, a special motorized prize) related to the opening end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) 1) The operation signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A909).
Then, clear the information of the large winning a prize opening count number field which remembers the winning a prize number to the special winning opening (step A 910), clear the information of the round number field which memorizes the number of rounds of special gaming state (step A911), The information on the number-of-rounds upper limit area storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A912), and the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (step A14) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in this big hit end processing, first, a subroutine call is performed using probability fluctuation determination data (step A1001).
If the probability fluctuation determination data is "low probability data (normal (without general support))" at step A1001, a big hit end setting process 1 (step A1002) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1005.
In addition, when the probability fluctuation determination data is "high probability data 1 (probable variation (with general public support))" in step A1001, the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1003) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A1005. Do.
If the probability fluctuation determination data is "high probability data 2 (latency probability change (without general support))" in step A1001, big hit end setting processing 3 (step A1004) is performed, and the processing in step A1005 is performed. Transition.

In step A1005, a probability information command is loaded from the power failure recovery transmission command area and prepared (step A1005). Then, an effect command setting process (step A1006) is performed.
Next, "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A1007), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1008).
Next, save the signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF, big hit 3 signal OFF, big hit 4 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1009), and the signal about big hit end (eg The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1010).
Next, clear the information of the probability determination flag area (step A1011), clear the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit (step A1012), and during the fraud monitoring period in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region. The flag is saved (step A1013), and the big hit end process is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 48A shows the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1002) in the above-mentioned big hit end process. In this big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to no time saving state (for example, big hit 2 signal OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A 1021), and a signal regarding the start of low probability state and no time saving state (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1022).

Next, save the number with no time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1023), save the general drawing low probability flag in the regular drawing game mode flag area (step A1024), and save the special drawing game mode flag area. The low probability & time saving none flag is saved (step A1025).
Next, a signal relating to a left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1026), and the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 56) is turned off In order to cause the game state display number 2 area to save the number in the left hitting state (step A1027).
Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1028), and the big hit end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 48 (b) shows the big hit end setting process 2 (step A 1003) in the above-mentioned big hit end process. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the short time state (for example, 2 big hit signals ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1031). A signal relating to the start of the short time state is saved from inside the big hit and is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.
Then, the signal regarding the start with the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 The fluctuation time reduction state signal is ON, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1032).

Next, save the number with time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1033), save the common drawing high probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1034), and in the special drawing game mode flag area. The special drawing high probability & time saving flag are saved (step A1035).
Next, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1036), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hitting mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hitting mode is set from the big hit, the setting regarding the right hitting is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.

[Big hit end setting processing 3]
FIG. 49 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (step A1004) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In this big hit end setting processing 3, first, a signal regarding no time saving state (for example, 2 big hit signals OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1041), a signal regarding the start of the high probability state and the no time saving state (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1042).

Next, save the number with no time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1043), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1044), and save the special drawing game mode flag area. The figure height probability & time saving none flag are saved (step A1045).
Next, a signal relating to a left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1046), and the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 56) is turned off. In order to cause the game, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the left hitting state (step A1047).
Next, the probability information command (latency) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1048), and the big hit end setting process 3 is ended.

[Processing command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process for reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is ended.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 51 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A16 and A18) in the special figure game process described above, and the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the standard game game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the ordinary symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the common figure) is changing (step A2101) . In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the address of the display table 2 (for stopping), and the display table 1 (for fluctuation) on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A15, step A17 and step B14. An address is defined.

If the variation control flag for the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A15, step A17 and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by −1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is “0” (step A2105).

If the updated blinking control timer is not "0" (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.
If the updated blink control timer is "0" (step A2105; Y), the blink control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the target blink timer area (step A2106), and the control target is controlled. The variation symbol number of is updated by +1 (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled is not fluctuating (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A15, step A17 and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 52 (a) shows the distribution process (step A447) in the fluctuation pattern setting process described above.
In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether the data at the top of the selection table (the variation pattern selection table prepared in step A445) is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A2201).
If the first data in the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process Finish.
On the other hand, when the first data in the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A2202; N), one distribution value defined first in the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is acquired (Step A2203).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2203 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 2) prepared in step A446 (step A2204), and the calculated new randomness It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.
That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and thereafter, the distribution value is newly subtracted by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A2205. The random number value is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). Thereby, any one variation pattern number is selected from at least one variation pattern number defined in the selection table (variation pattern selection table).
Then, if it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2207), and the distribution processing is ended. Do.

[2-byte distribution process]
FIG. 52 (b) shows 2-byte distribution processing (step A444) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the selection table (the variation group table prepared in step A 442) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A 2301).
Then, if the first data in the selection table (the variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A2307), and 2-byte distribution is performed. End the process.
On the other hand, when the first data in the selection table (variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), one distribution value defined first in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired ( Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A443 (step A2304), and the calculated new randomness It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2305). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.
That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and thereafter, the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305, and a new disturbance is generated. A numerical value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than “0” (step A2305).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). Thereby, any one variation pattern selection table is selected from at least one variation pattern selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table).
When it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2307), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish.

  The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 52 (a) and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 52 (b) are basically the same, but is the size of the random number used for distribution 1 byte? Because they differ in whether they are two bytes, the program instructions for calculation are different.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the common-play game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the common drawing game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general prize winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the common-play game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing game processing timer is "0" (step B4).

  If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has already occurred, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number The routine drawing game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B5), and the table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular drawing game process number (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the common drawing game process number (step B7).

In step B7, when the popular drawing game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, the common drawing fluctuation The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process.
If the drawing game processing number is “1” in step B7, a drawing change processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the drawing display processing.

In addition, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit when the common drawing game processing number is "2" in step B7, the setting of the common charge open time according to whether or not the time saving state is being performed. In addition, the general drawing display processing (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing.
In addition, if the common drawing game processing number is "3" in step B7, then the common drawing is continued during the common drawing, or the common drawing is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common electric residual ball processing, etc. A process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the common drawing game process number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required for performing the common drawing end processing.
If the drawing game processing number is "5" in step B7, the drawing drawing end processing (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the drawing common processing.

Thereafter, after preparing a common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 52 (step B14), symbol fluctuation control processing related to control of fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 52 ( Step B15) is performed to end the common-play game processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the common-play game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described common game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state (for example, during a big hit, during a special view time (under normal charge support)) is hit (step B102) .
When it is a game state to hit the right (step B102; Y), it is determined whether the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) by acquiring the common drawing reservation number (step B105).
If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed command is prepared (step B103), and the rendering command setting process (step B104) is performed, and then the common drawing reserve number is acquired It is determined whether the number of general drawing reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (step B105).

If the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the common drawing reservation number is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated common drawing reservation number is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109). Finish.
If it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or if it is determined in step B105 that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the common prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described common drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the common electric winning switch switch monitoring process, first, whether it is in the common drawing, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. It is determined whether there is any (step B201). Then, if it is in the normal state (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202), and it is determined that the input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202) B202; Y) updates the count number of the common charge counter by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the post-update common charge counter is equal to or more than the upper limit (for example, 6) (step B204). ) Loads the hit end pointer value (“4” or “7” in the case of this embodiment) from the end pointer area per common drawing, and saves it in the middle control pointer area per common drawing (step B205). The process of step B205 is a process for closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37 based on the occurrence of the general electric winning of the upper limit value or more in the hit state of the general drawing.
Then, the common drawing game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the general electric winning switch monitor processing ends. That is, when there is a routine power prize higher than the upper limit value in the hit state of the common drawing, the hit state of the common drawing is ended halfway at that point.

  If it is determined in step B201 that a per figure drawing is not in progress (step B201; N), if it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the common charge count number is not the upper limit value or more (step B204; N), the common match winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the ordinary drawing routine, it is first determined whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301), and the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301; Y ) Sets “0” for ordinary processing as a processing number (step B 322), saves the processing number in the general drawing game processing number area (step B 323), and illegally displays the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area The flag is saved during the monitoring period (step B324), and the ordinary drawing routine processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) Clear the loaded area (that is, the per random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the per symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) to 0 (step B302), and it will be a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game It is determined whether the probability is in the common high probability that is higher than the normal probability (that is, the low probability in the common drawing), that is, in the short time state (step B303).

If the common drawing high probability is not (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the common drawing low probability is set (step B304), and the common drawing high probability is in progress (step B303) ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the drawing high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306), and if the value of the random number is not greater than or equal to the upper judgment value (step B306; N), the value of the random number is determined to be B304 or B305. It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set (step B307).

If the value of the per-random number is greater than or equal to the upper determination value (step B306; Y) or if the value of the per-random number is less than the lower determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the per-flag In the area, save the misplacement information (step B308), set the disappointing stop symbol number (step B309), save the disappointing symbol information in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B310), stop the common symbol number stop Save to the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, if the value of the random number per hit is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the load loaded in step B302 The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is common drawing stop symbol Save to the area (step B314). In the present embodiment, two kinds of symbols ("I hit symbol 1" and "I hit symbol 2") are prepared as the hit symbols of the common drawing.

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at high probability is 250/251, the upper judgment value is “251”, and the low probability judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”.
Therefore, at the time of the general drawing low probability, the value of the hit random number deviates in all cases of “0” to “250”.
Further, at the time of the drawing normal probability, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of “1” to “250” is present, and the case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is not.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the common drawing reserve number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation pattern random number 3 is saved in the popular game processing timer area (step B320). In the case of the present embodiment, “500 ms” is set with a probability of 200/256, “1500 ms” is set with a probability of 40/256, and a probability of 16/256 as the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3. "3000 ms" is set.
Then, the general drawing variation processing transition setting process (step B 321) is performed, and the general drawing routine processing is ended.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
FIG. 57 shows the processing shift setting processing (step B 321) during the common drawing fluctuation in the above-described common drawing normal processing. In this common drawing fluctuating process transition setting process, first, "1" associated with the common drawing fluctuating processing is set as the processing number (step B331), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B332) ).
After that, save the signal relating to the start of the common drawing fluctuation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step B333), and indicate that the common drawing fluctuation display game is changing. The flag indicating that it is changing is saved in the common drawing change control flag area (step B334).
Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing display 52, is saved in the common drawing blinking control timer area (step B335). The initial value (for example, 0) is saved (step B 336), and the processing transition setting processing during common drawing is ended.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the general drawing variation processing, first, the processing number is set to "2" related to the general drawing display processing (step B401), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area. (Step B402). Thereafter, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms) which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game in the common drawing display 52 is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B403), and the fluctuation of common drawing is ended. A signal relating to (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404) and a stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped is a common drawing fluctuation control flag area (Step B405), and the routine is finished.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, details of the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the processing for displaying the generic drawing, first, the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the normal processing is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503)
If the hit flag is not hit information (step B 503; N), “0” is set as the processing number for the ordinary processing of the drawing (step B 515), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B516) The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine monitoring flag period field (step B517), and the general drawing display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B 503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B 504), and the hit start pointer value (eg, “0 "" And "5" are saved and saved in the control pointer area during the common drawing (step B505), and the value of the hit end pointer (for example, "4", "" corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information 7) is saved and saved in the end pointer area per common drawing (step B506). Next, a general power release time (for example, 1700 ms or 2600 ms) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B507).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for the processing during the common drawing per processing (step B508), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B509).
Then, a test signal output (for example, a signal relating to the start of power operation) (for example, a signal relating to the operation of the ordinary electric symbol 1) is output. In order to save the data in the data area (step B510) and output a signal for driving (turning on) the common voltage solenoid, the on data is saved in the common power solenoid output data area (step B511).

Then, clear the information of the common charge count number area storing the number of winning to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (step B 512), and store the number of winning to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the regular monitoring period. The information on the incorrect winning number area is cleared (step B513).
Next, a flag defining the fraud monitoring period out of the normal change winning a prize device 37 (traffic monitoring period out flag) is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the general drawing display processing is ended.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in the common drawing game process (step B11) will be described. As shown in FIG. 60, in the middle processing per normal drawing, first, the middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the common control pointer per loaded common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit It is determined (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer in the common drawing is updated by +1 (step B603), and Go and finish the process during the popular map.
Further, when the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), the processing for setting the common power operation transition is performed without performing the processing of updating the control pointer in the common drawing in step B603. (Step B604) is performed to end the processing during the common drawing.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
FIG. 61 shows the general-purpose power operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-mentioned per-normal-period process. The routine operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the routine power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (general control pointer). It is like that. In this routine operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611). When the processing of step B 603 (processing of updating the control pointer by +1 during a common drawing) is performed, branch processing is performed according to the value before the update by +1.

  If the value of the control pointer is "0", "2", or "5", the process proceeds to step B612, and the normal fluctuation winning corresponding to the control pointer is performed to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. To save the wait time (for example, 300 ms) after blockade of the device 37 in the common game processing timer area (step B612) and turn off the common solenoid 37c, save the off data in the common solenoid output data area. Then (step B613), the routine operation shift setting process is ended.

  If the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B 614 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer In order to save the normal charge open time (for example, 1700 ms) which is the open time in the normal game processing timer area (step B 614) and turn on the common electric solenoid 37c, save the on data in the common electric solenoid output data area. Then (step B615), the routine operation shift setting process is ended.

  If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B616 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, so that it is the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer. In order to save the general charge open time (for example, 2600 msec) in the general game processing timer area (step B616) and turn on the general electric solenoid 37c, save the on data in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B617) ), End the routine operation transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B618, and the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is ended to perform the general charge residual ball processing, so the processing number Is set as "4" (step B618). Then, the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B619), and the generalization residual ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B620). Thereafter, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B621), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the common figure stop symbol is “hit symbol 1” in the common figure high probability, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the common figure display. Then, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer in step B506 of the common drawing display processing, and "1700 msec" is acquired as the common power release time in step B507 of the common drawing display processing. Therefore, after the general drawing display time of 600 ms has elapsed, since the general power release time is "1700 ms", the general power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is opened for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer Because it is 0, a 300 ms wait time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to “1” for each general drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer for each general drawing is “2 The 300 ms wait time is set to be updated to “1”, and then the control pointer is updated to “3” for each normal drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer In order to be updated to “4”, the 600 ms common pressure residual ball processing time is set.

  In addition, when the common drawing stop symbol is “hit pattern 2” during the common drawing high probability, “5” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the common drawing display, and the common drawing is displayed In step B506 of the process, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the process of displaying the general drawing, "2600 milliseconds" is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the general drawing display time of 600 ms has elapsed, since the general power release time is "2600 ms", the general power is released for 2600 ms, and thereafter, 300 m seconds since the control pointer is "5". Then, the control pointer is updated to "6" during the normal drawing, and the general power is released for 2600 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "7", and the control pointer is updated to "7". The normal charge residual bulb processing time of second is set.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the routine charge remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-described regular game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the generalization residual ball processing, first, “5” for end processing per general drawing is set as the processing number (step B 701), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (Step B702).

  Thereafter, the common drawing ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B703), and a signal related to the operation termination of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (for example, the normal electric character 1 operation signal OFF) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step B704), and the common charge count number area for counting the number of winning to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is cleared (step B705). Then, the control pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (step B706), and the end pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (step B707), and the general electric ball remaining ball processing is ended.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the details of the end-of-round-figure end process (step B13) in the above-mentioned ordinary-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the end processing per common drawing, first, "0" relating to the normal processing is set as the processing number (step B801), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (Step B802).

  After that, save the signal (for example, the signal is turned off during the normal symbol 1) to the test signal output data area (step B 803), and define the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The flag (during fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the power transmission fraud monitoring period flag area (step B804), and the end processing for the common drawing is ended.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special view 1 suspension display 53, the special view 2 suspension display 54, the general drawing suspension indicator 55, the first gaming status display unit 56, and the second gaming status display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 57, the third gaming state display unit 58, and the round display unit 59 are performed.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether the output on timing is based on whether the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, thereby creating a blinking cycle of 128 ms.
If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), the common drawing reserve number display table 1 of the common drawing reserve number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode in the common drawing reserve display 55 is defined is set. If it is not the output on timing (step S502; N), the common drawing reserve number display table 2 is set (step S504).
Then, display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired from the set common drawing reservation number display table, and saved in the segment area for the common drawing reservation display 55 provided in the RAM 111C (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the common drawing reserve number is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data becomes the same regardless of which common drawing reserve number display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506). If it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special view 1 reserved with the display mode on the special view 1 reserve display 53 is determined. Of the number display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 reservation number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 reservation number display table 2 is set. (Step S508).
Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 holding number display table, and saved in the segment area for the special drawing 1 holding display 53 provided in the RAM 111C (step S509) .

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510). When the output on timing is (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reserve number in which the display mode on the special figure 2 reserve display 54 is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 pending number display table 2 is set ( Step S512).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 2 holding number display table, and saved in the segment area for the special drawing 2 holding display 54 provided in the RAM 111C (step S513) .
Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit 59 is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired from the set round display table, and provided in the RAM 111C. The data is saved in the segment area for the round display unit 59 (step S515).

Next, when the time saving state occurs, the game state display table 1 is set in which the display mode in the second game state display unit 57 is lit to notify the occurrence of the time saving state (step S516). Display data corresponding to the game state display number is obtained from the display table 1 and saved in the segment area for the second game state display unit 57 provided in the RAM 111C (step S517). In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display unit 57 formed of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and to be turned on during the special view time (during common power support).
After that, the gaming state display table 2 is set in which the display mode in the first gaming state display unit 56 for notifying that the gaming state is more advantageous to the right hitting than the left hitting is set (step S518) Display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired from the set game state display table 2 and saved in the segment area for the first game state display unit 56 provided in the RAM 111C (step S519). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit 57 consisting of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting), and at the time of right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, during a big hit, during general support). It is configured to light up.

Next, it is determined whether the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S520).
If it is determined in step S520 that the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S520; Y), the segment LED editing process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S520 that the on information is not saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S520; N), the high probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 58) is turned off, The off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area for the third gaming state display unit 58 (step S 521), and the segment LED editing process is ended.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and the end of fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal. It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (step S601). If the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step S602). It is determined whether the time is up (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more, it is determined that time is up.

  If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step S605). Then, a command for magnet informing notification is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality occurs.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud specifying the notification time of the magnet fraud If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). In addition, the minimum value of the magnet fraud alerting | reporting timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is "0" (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is not time-up (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  Then, if the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Also, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, and the fraud alert period ends, or from the beginning it is fraudulent If the notification has not been made, a command for magnet notification end is prepared (step S611). Furthermore, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and rendering command setting processing is performed. Then (step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, “step S601; N” → “step S608” → “step S609” → “step S610; Y” → “step S611” → “step S612” → “step S613; Y” are normal routes.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121 It is determined whether the board radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step S702).

  Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step S703), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the present embodiment, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times, while in the case of board radio fraud, the board radio sensor 62 is turned on. When it is detected once, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S 701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is not “0” −1 It updates (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is "0" (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing notification ends, or from the beginning it is incorrect. If the notification has not been made, prepare a command to terminate the board radio wave illegal notification (step S 707), prepare a board radio wave illegality cancellation flag as the board radio wave illegality flag (step S 708), and the prepared board radio wave illegality flag It is determined whether the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area matches (step S709).

Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the prepared board radio wave illegal flag does not match the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area (step S 709; N), the prepared board radio wave illegal flag is saved in the board radio wave illegal flag area (step S 710) The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, “step S701; N” → “step S705” → “step S706; Y” → “step S707” → “step S708” → “step S709; Y” are normal routes.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S105), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal management device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device, processing is performed to set in the output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a switch abnormality is occurring (step S801).
If it is determined in step S801 that a switch abnormality is not occurring (step S801; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S802), and the process of step S804 is performed. Migrate to
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that a switch abnormality is occurring (step S801; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S803). It transfers to the process of S804.

Next, if the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step S804; N) or the main frame opening error is not occurring (step S805; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is set to the external information output data area. Save (step S806), save the off data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step S807), and shift to the process of step S810.
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S804; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S805; Y), the on data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S808), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S809), and the process proceeds to step S810.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like, is updated by -1 unless it is "0". (Step S810). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the initial value of the RAM when activated by clearing the RAM in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S811).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S811; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S812), step S813 Transfer to processing of If the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S811; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S813 is not performed and the process of step S813 is performed. Transition.

  Then, if the magnet fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), if the board radio wave fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), if the big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S815; Y), If the occurrence of a common electric power fraud is occurring (step S 816; Y) or if the starting opening error is occurring (step S 817; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is made the test signal output data area Then, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S820), and the process proceeds to step S821. If frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S818; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area without performing the process of step S819 (step S820), and step S821 is performed. Transfer to processing of

  On the other hand, there is no magnet irregularity (step S 813; N), no board radio irregularity (step S 814; N), no big winning prize fraud (step S 815; N), even an occurrence of general electricity fraud If not (step S816; N), if there is no start opening error (step S817; N) or not even if frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step S818; N), the process of steps S819 and S820 is not performed. It transfers to the process of step S821.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S821) is performed to set information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, and starting opening signal editing processing (step S822) is performed to edit the winning opening signal of the starting opening.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S 823). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S824).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is “0” (step S824; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area Then (step S825), the external information editing process is ended.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S824; N), that is, if the time is not up, save the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step S826), end the external information editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S821) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process externally generates the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment). It is processing to output to the device.

  As shown in FIG. 69, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times the main prize ball signal output is "0" (step S833).

Then, if the main prize ball signal output number is not "0" (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal control timer area is displayed. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S 835). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms). Of the time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.
If the main prize ball signal output count is "0" (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838) The main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period is that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S 836; Y), save the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal for the external device in the external information output data area of RWM (Step S837), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S 836; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

In the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out becomes 10, and the payout control device 200 comes to have 10 game balls paid out. A main prize ball signal is output each time.
Specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball signal output count by +1 (subroutine in payout command transmission processing) every 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted), and updates (setting The main prize ball signal is output for the number of times the output is being output.
Since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 pieces of payout are actually performed for the main prize ball signal outputted for each schedule, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to respond to fraudulent withdrawals. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to a lack of balls, etc., and even if it is paid out after the big hit, the hall computer (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (step S822) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, and the start opening 3 switch 97a are input.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of starting opening signal output is "0" (step S843).

Then, if the starting opening signal output number is not "0" (step S843; N), the starting opening signal output number is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting opening signal output control timer in the starting opening signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The start opening signal output control timer initial value is the time between the on state (for example, high level) of the start opening signal (for example, 128 ms) and the time for the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms) The on-state time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the starting port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starting port signal editing process is ended.
In addition, when the number of start opening signal outputs is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S 848), the start opening signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846). In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output on area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is not "0". If the start opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S 846; Y), save the on data for turning on the start opening signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), the start opening signal editing process is ended. If the start-up signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start-up signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM ( Step S848), the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described.
The special view controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special view for effect displayed on the display device 41, and the special view in the following description of the control process of the effect control device 300 is the special view for this effect It means (decorative design which is not this special figure).

Also, in general, the term "character" means characters or characters having a property or character, or a property or character, and may also mean characters as computer terms. However, in the following description of the effect control device 300, particularly in the description of image display control using the VDP 312, a series of movies, background images, images of special patterns (special symbol or fourth symbol), characters A group of still images or moving images such as images may be referred to as characters, and such image data (still images or moving image data) may be referred to as character data (or character data).
Further, in the following description of the effect control device 300, in the case of display control, an object means a target of display control with grouping, and a display element (a background image, an image of a decorative pattern of a special view, an image of a notice character , An image of a pending display, etc.) For example, in the case of this example, the decorative symbols of the special drawing are distinguished by the difference display area (reel) such as left symbol, right symbol and middle symbol, and further, in each of these distinctions, present symbol, next symbol, There is a distinction that the display position of the scroll direction of the front symbol is different. That is, for example, with regard to the left symbol, there are the present symbol of the left symbol, the next symbol of the left symbol, and the front symbol of the left symbol, each of which is one object when viewed in detail. However, in the control process, for example, the entire left symbol including the present symbol, the next symbol, and the previous symbol may be classified as one display element.

[Power on reset processing]
First, power on reset processing of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The power on reset process starts when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is started.
When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is started, first, interrupt is prohibited (step D1), the CPU 311 is initialized (step D2), VDP 312 is initialized (step D3), and the interrupt is permitted. Then (step D4), the main process (step D5) is started. When the main process is started, the main process is executed until the power is cut off (including a power failure).

[Main processing]
Next, the main process (step D5) in the power on reset process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the main process is started, first, a wireless module initialization process (step D11) is performed to initialize a wireless module (not shown) provided in the effect control device 300. Note that this example is an example in which communication between sub-boards in different pachinko gaming machines (that is, between effect control devices, hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "between subs") is performed by wireless communication, but limited to wireless communication Wired communication may be used instead.

Next, the base address of the register of VDP 312 is set (step D12). This is because the address space differs depending on the type of the CPU 311 and its setting, so the base address is set, and various designations are made based on the difference from that.
Then, display data generation is permitted (step D13). This is processing for permitting the display circuit of the VDP 312 to access the VRAM 326 and generate display data.
Next, the size of the image development area of the VDP 312 is set (step D14).
Next, a random number seed is set (step D15). This is processing for setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a srand function. Here, as an argument given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like is used so as to be different for each gaming machine. It is also good.

Next, the storage area for motion management in the RAM in the CPU 311 (including the motion management area and the address area of the motion management area) is initialized (step D16), and the storage area for scenario management in the RAM in the CPU 311 (scenario management Area (including the address area of the scenario management area) is initialized (step D17).
Here, "motion" means a rendering operation blocked (partized) (specifically, in the case of this example, the display rendering on the display device 41 is blocked), and the "scenario" is It means the flow of the presentation (which decides which motion to execute and when, etc.). Also, “address area of motion management area” means a storage area for storing the top address of the motion management area, and “address area of the scenario management area” stores the top address of the scenario management area. Means a storage area for

  Next, the terminal ID is set (step D18). This is, for example, processing for setting an ID for each stand (that is, for each gaming machine) based on the setting of a setting switch (not shown) provided in the effect control device 300. As the terminal ID to be set, the individual ID of the wireless module or the like may be used, but it is easier to specify the position information of the gaming machine on the island if the setting is made manually by the setting switch etc. It is easy to assign to the machine number. That is, it is difficult to specify the position information from the magnitude of the numerical value if the ID of the wireless module is not arranged in ascending order at the time of installation of the gaming machine, but the setting is manually performed by a setting switch or the like For example, if the value of this terminal ID is set in order of the installed position, for example, it is easy to specify the installed position information from the value of this terminal ID. However, the method of setting the terminal ID from the ID of the wireless module or the like has an advantage of being able to be set automatically without bothering the human hand. On the other hand, setting of the terminal ID by the setting switch needs to set a different number for each machine by the operation of a person, so there is a possibility that it becomes impossible when busy such as when introducing a gaming machine. In addition, since the setting switch is unnecessary when using the ID of the wireless module, there is an advantage that the cost does not increase. Since there are advantages and disadvantages as described above, it is necessary to select the setting method of the terminal ID according to the effect desired to be performed by the inter-sub-substrate communication. In this example, effects such as making a notice character appear sequentially on the display device 41 of each gaming machine from the gaming machine at the left end of the island (namely, the arrangement of gaming machines in the island (from left: ID1, ID2, ID3, ... ID10) In order to be able to realize the effect that needs to be specified), the setting method by the setting switch, which is easy to specify the position information of the stand, is taken as an example. The terminal ID is provided to, for example, identify a transmission destination or a transmission source in sub-substrate communication.

Next, save the initial value at power on in the area to be initialized (for example, the flag area for effect (storage area used as various flags described later)) (step D19), and clear the WDT (watchdog timer) (Step D20).
Next, an effect button input process (step D21) is performed. This is processing for performing editing when the effect operation unit 550 (push button (effect button 25) or select button (touch panel 29)) is operated when it is activated. In addition, since the rendering operation unit 550 does not turn on and off at high speed, the processing of sensing the input of the rendering operation unit 550 may be performed within this processing, or may be performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown).

Next, random number update processing (step D22) is performed. This is, for example, processing of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main processing using the rand function. Since the rand function generates random numbers based on the specified generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the function. In addition, you may use the random number which updates +1 each like a main board | substrate (game control apparatus 100).
Next, a reception command check process (step D23) is performed.

Then, the inter-sub transmission start process (step D24) is executed. This is processing for permitting the inter-sub transmission interrupt when there is a request for inter-sub command transmission. In addition, depending on the effect, there is also a case where you do not want to send a command immediately, so time adjustment is also performed.
Then, the inter-sub reception task process (step D25) is executed. This is a process that mainly analyzes the received inter-sub command.
Next, an inter-sub ack response task process (step D26) is executed. This is processing for monitoring when an ack (reply) is requested to another machine.
Then, the sub-interval effect setting process (step D27) is executed. This is processing for controlling the effect corresponding to the received inter-sub command.

Next, a scenario setting process (step D28) is performed. This is processing for analyzing a scenario based on the received command from the game control device 100.
Next, the drawing area is filled with black (step D29). This is processing for completely erasing the past display of the frame buffer, and for example, processing for arranging an image of a black square as a whole in the frame buffer so that dust or the like is not displayed.
Next, motion control processing (step D30) is performed. This is processing for executing the scenario analyzed and the like in step D28.

Here, character data is stored in the image ROM 325, but motion data representing information on the movement of the character and scenario data defining the connection of the motion data are stored in the PROM 321.
Moreover, in this example, in drawing control of the display screen 41a displayed on the display apparatus 41, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used. The scenario is, for example, a scenario for background, a scenario for left symbol, a scenario for right symbol, ..., etc., the variation effect of symbols is divided into a plurality of scenario layers and set as a table in advance, and they are individually set as scenarios It is a method of generating a picture of one screen by controlling as and combining all the scenarios.
Specifically, in the variation production of the symbols on the display device 41, for example, movement of the variable launch, movement until slowing down and temporary stop (number of feed frames, slip, etc.), type of advance production, etc. Since various combinations are made by effect distribution performed, if scenario data is created for each screen for every combination, a huge amount of data will result.
Therefore, in the present example, in drawing control for display effects such as variation effects in the effect control device 300, the display elements for the background, left symbol, right symbol,... A plurality of pieces of motion information are set as a table of operation scenarios for simultaneously or continuously switching and displaying effects, and stored in advance in, for example, a PROM (control ROM) 321. Next, the rendering control device 300 selects a scenario table in accordance with the rendering command from the game control device 100, combines and combines them, to create the drawing content (for each frame) of one screen. By doing so, only a minimum operation pattern can be defined (partization of operation), and data capacity can be saved and development can be made more efficient.

Next, the effect display editing process (step D31) is executed. This is processing for setting various commands and parameters for instructing the VDP 312 on the drawing contents (the ones set in steps D28 to D30) on the display device 41. In the effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands thus set are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instruction for screen drawing) described later.
Then, the drawing command preparation end is set (step D32), and the process proceeds to step D33. This is processing for setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in step D31 is completed.

  If it progresses to step D33, it will be determined whether it is frame switching timing, and if it is frame switching timing (step D33; Y), it will progress to step D34, and if it is not frame switching timing (step D33; N), this step D33 repeat. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to the processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds3333.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). It is the timing which arrives at a regular interval. By the process of step D33, subsequent processes (steps D34 to D37 and subsequent steps D20 to D32) are performed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. In addition, the time management which needs to synchronize with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). In the case where the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, three frames result in 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

  At step D34, VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen (step D34), sound control processing (step D35), decoration control processing for controlling various LEDs (step D36), various motors and SOL (solenoid) Motor / SOL control processing (step D37) for controlling After this step D37 is performed, the process returns to step D20, and the same processing as in the case of proceeding to step D20 is repeated.

  In addition, although the control process of steps D35 to D37 is performed in these steps in which switching of the operation is performed in units of processing cycles in order to match the effect of the screen, the signals generated or set in these control processes or The process of actually outputting data (particularly various LEDs and signals for driving and controlling the motor, etc.) to the port is performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when using an IC specialized for control of various devices, there is also a case where the output of a signal or the like is not performed by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 (main substrate) by the effect control device 300 (sub substrate), and the data constituting the command falls within the normal range. It also includes the content to check if it is.
Communication between the main substrate and the sub substrate may be performed by parallel communication using a strobe signal (STB signal), but in the case of this example, serial communication is performed. That is, for both substrates, for example, communication is performed using the function of the serial communication circuit mounted on the CPUs 111A and 311.

  In the serial communication in this case, since transmission and reception are automatically performed in hardware, unlike in parallel communication, there is an advantage that processing time is not exclusively used for communication on both substrates. In the case of parallel communication, the effect control device must perform reception processing with top priority according to the timing at which the game control device transmits, making it difficult to create a program. Furthermore, it is necessary for both substrates to execute communication processing during communication. However, in the case of serial communication, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified when the command is completed, so it is sufficient to just take it out from the serial reception buffer. Further, in serial communication, it is not necessary to perform interrupt processing with the highest priority, and it is possible to prohibit the interrupt if it is not convenient to interrupt. Also, in serial communication, the processing on the transmission side can be as simple as putting commands in the serial transmission buffer. Also, in serial communication, both boards can perform other processing while hardware is transmitting and receiving, which is efficient. Also, physically, in the case of parallel communication, eight or more wires were required, but in serial communication, at least one wire can be realized. In addition, even when serial communication is used, communication between the game control device 100 (main substrate) and the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) is not bidirectional communication but only unidirectional communication (main substrate → sub substrate Only) can be configured. This prevents fraudulent use of communication from the sub substrate to the main substrate.

The command reception interrupt process is started when the above-mentioned command reception interrupt occurs in the effect control device 300 (sub board). That is, when the CPU 311 of the main board completes the reception of a command transmitted by serial communication and the CPU 311 of the sub board completes reception, a command reception interrupt occurs, and this command reception interrupt process is started. Here, this command reception interrupt has higher priority than the V blank interrupt described above. Also, although the command reception interrupt occurs irregularly as described above, when the main board transmits commands continuously, the command reception interrupt of the sub board corresponding to the transmission interval (for example, 4 ms) is generated. The occurrence intervals are also the same (for example, 4 ms).
The command from the main board is configured to include MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), which are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

When the command reception interrupt process is started, first, the reception monitoring timer is stopped (step D41), a command is loaded from the serial reception buffer (step D42), and the process proceeds to step D44.
At step D44, whether the command data loaded at step D42 is in the MODE range or not is determined based on the value of the data. If it is in the MODE range (step D44; Y), the process proceeds to step D45. If it is not in the MODE range (Step D44; N), the process proceeds to Step D48 because it is the ACTION range. The MODE range is a range of values in one byte that can be set as data of MODE, and the ACTION range is a range of values in one byte that can be set as data of ACTION. There is.
In step D45, the command data loaded in step D42 is stored as a reception MODE (step D45), and "OK" is set in the MODE reception flag (step D46).
Then, the value of the reception monitoring timer is reset to 0 (zero), the clock operation of the reception monitoring timer is started (step D47), and then the command reception interrupt processing is ended. As used in the above step D45, simply "store" means to readably store in a predetermined storage area for later control processing (the same applies hereinafter) .

In step D48, it is determined whether the value of the MODE reception flag is "OK". If "OK" (step D48; Y), the process proceeds to step D49 to determine whether the reception monitoring timer has timed out and time out If not (step D49; N), the process proceeds to step D50. On the other hand, if the value of the MODE reception flag is not "OK" (step D48; N) or if the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step D49; Y), the command could not be received normally. The reception flag is set to “NG” (step D59), and the command reception interrupt processing is ended.
If the value of the MODE reception flag is not "OK" (step D48; N), for example, although command data of the ACTION range is received, it is abnormal because command data of the MODE range is not received prior to that. If the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step D49; Y), the command data of the ACTION range is within the specified reception monitoring time counted by the reception monitoring timer from the time when the command data of the MODE range is received. Is abnormal because it is not received.

At step D50, the command data loaded at step D42 is stored as a reception ACTION (step D50), the value of the MODE reception flag is set to "NG" (step D51), and the process proceeds to step D52.
In step D52, it is determined whether the value of the command reception counter is greater than 31. If it is larger (step D52; Y), the command reception interrupt process is ended because the capacity of the command buffer to be described later is exceeded. (Step D52; N), that is, when the command reception counter ≦ 31, the process proceeds to Step D53. Although the value of the command reception counter is 0 to 31 and the process proceeds to step D53, the value of 0 to 31 is a value corresponding to the capacity of the command buffer described later, and the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; The number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in 1/30 seconds) is sufficient.

In step D53, a rendering operation corresponding to the reception MODE and reception ACTION is prepared (step D53), reception command range check processing (step D54) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D55.
In step D55, it is determined whether the range check is OK or not. If not OK (N in step D55), the command reception interrupt process is ended to discard the command (reception MODE and reception ACTION). Step D55; Y) Go to step D56. Here, the determination result of the range check in step D55 is range check OK if the command range normal flag is set in the received command range check process (step D54) (step D55 is Yes), and the received command range is If the command range abnormality flag is set in the check process (step D54), the range check is not OK (step D55 is No).

At step D56, the reception MODE and the reception ACTION are stored in the command buffer (step D56). The command buffer is a so-called ring buffer in this example, and has a prescribed capacity (the number of commands that can be stored and held). The command buffer is configured of, for example, a storage area in the RAM of the CPU 311.
Next, the value of the command reception counter is updated by +1 (step D57), and data is stored (that is, written) in the command buffer, so the value of the command write index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 Step D58), end the command reception interrupt process. The command write index is a pointer for writing the command buffer, and the value of this command write index is in the range of 0 to 31 in this example, but this range is the capacity of the command buffer (in this case, 32), and as described above, the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board during one cycle of the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; It should just be.

[Received command range check process]
Next, the details of the reception command range check process (step D54) in the above-described command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the reception command range check process is started, it is first determined in step D61 whether the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45 is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range (step D61; N), the command range abnormal flag After setting (step D67), the reception command range check process ends, and if it is a normal range (step D61; Y), the process proceeds to step D62. As for the value of MODE, if not all of the values in the MODE range are defined in the command contents, and some values are not used and not defined, and if such values are not used, step It is determined in the determination of D61 that the range is not within the normal range.
In this step D61 or step D92 described later (or both of steps D61 and D92), the data loss of the MODE data is also checked, and even if it is an invalid command in this check, it is assumed that it is out of the normal range. Good. The missing data check of the data of MODE means that it is determined whether the data of MODE to be checked corresponds to an invalid value in a portion where the possible values of MODE are not continuous. If there is no discontinuity in the value of MODE, this missing tooth check is unnecessary.

In step D62, the minimum value (ACTION_min) of the possible values of ACTION corresponding to the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45 is acquired (step D62). In the present application, “acquiring” data in the control processing as described above means that the data is taken out from the ROM (the PROM 321 in the effect control device 300 of this example).
Next, the maximum value (ACTION_max) among the possible values of the ACTION corresponding to the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45 is obtained (step D63), and the process proceeds to step D64.

  Note that the ACTION check table is registered in the PROM 321, and in the above steps D62 and D63, corresponding values are acquired from the ACTION check table. The ACTION check table includes data of the ACTION lower limit corresponding to the above minimum value (ACTION_min), data of the ACTION upper limit corresponding to the above maximum value (ACTION_max), and a match check table (described later). The data (for example, the head address of a matching check table) which specifies) is each defined. The data of the ACTION check table and the like, that is, various information (for example, data of various tables) used in the control process of the effect control device 300 are stored in advance in the PROM 321 together with the operation program.

At step D64, it is determined whether the value of the received ACTION stored at step D50 is smaller than the minimum value obtained at step D62. If smaller (step D64; Y), it is anomalous, so step D67. If not (step D64; N), the process proceeds to step D65.
In step D65, it is determined whether the value of the received ACTION stored in step D50 is larger than the maximum value acquired in step D63. If it is larger (step D65; Y), it is anomalous, so step D67. If not (step D65; N), the process proceeds to step D66.
When proceeding to step D66, since it is normal, the command range normal flag is set (step D66), and the reception command range check process is ended. In the case of proceeding to step D67, since it is abnormal, the command range abnormal flag is set (step D67), and the reception command range check process is ended.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the details of the received command check process (step D23) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the reception command check process is started, first, the value of the command reception counter is loaded as the number of command reception (step D71), and the process proceeds to step D72.
In step D72, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (zero). If it is not zero (step D72; Y), the process proceeds to step D73. If it is zero (step D72; N), the reception command check process is performed. finish. In the present application, as in the above-described step D71, "loading data" in the control processing means extracting data from the RAM (the RAM in the CPU 311 in the effect control device 300 of this example).

  At step D73, the content of the command reception counter area (ie, the value of the command reception counter) is subtracted by the number of command receptions (step D73). Here, assuming that A: a value of the command reception counter and B: the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after the execution of step D71. Then, it is a normal movement that “A = A−B = 0” immediately after the execution of step D73, but in the aspect of this example, the effect control device interrupts the command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) Since the highest priority is given without prohibition, there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D71 and the processing of step D73. Therefore, if the process in step D73 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process to set the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is shifted, so in step D73, the subtraction process “A−B” is performed. Is going. However, when serial communication is used to transmit / receive a command from the main board as in this example, the interrupt is inhibited so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D71 and the processing of step D73. As a result, the processing content of step D73 may be “A ← 0”.

Next, the contents of the reception command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer in step D56, hereinafter simply referred to as "command buffer") (that is, command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer) Copy to the command storage area (step D74). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM of the CPU 311 that configures a so-called FIFO (first-in first-out) buffer.
Next, since the data in the command buffer has been read, the value of the command reading index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step D75), and the process proceeds to step D76. The range of 0 to 31 here may be the same range as the command write index updated in step D58.

  In step D76, it is determined whether copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether steps D74 and D75 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands) or not. D76; N) Return to step D74 and repeat the process from step D74. If completed (step D76; Y), proceed to step D77.

In step D77, the contents of the command area (the first stored data among the unread data in the command area, ie, the data to be read next) are loaded (step D77). The received command analysis process (step D78) is executed on the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as "the current command").
Then, the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read out next) is updated (step D79), and the process goes to step D80.
In step D80, it is determined whether or not analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether steps D77 to D79 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands) or not. D80; N) Return to step D77 and repeat the process from step D77. If completed (step D80; Y), the reception command check process is ended.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step D78) in the received command check process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the received command analysis process is started, first, the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D77 is stored separately in MODE and the lower byte is stored separately in ACT (step D91), and then step Go to D92. In the case of a variable system command instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands a first half variation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands a second variation pattern It is a thing.

In the present application, “first half change” means pre-reach change, that is, a special-figure change display game (change display before start of reach action) executed before reaching the reach state.
Also, “second-half fluctuation” is fluctuation during reach, that is, a special figure fluctuation display game (so-called reach action (for example, a plurality of special figures) executed after reaching the reach state (during reach state) In the special result aspect (combination of special symbols) where the display area excluding the specific area is the big hit among the display areas of the column, the variable display is stopped in the state of displaying the variable display only in the specific area) Means

In step D92, it is determined whether the value of MODE separated in step D91 is within the normal range. If it is not within the normal range (step D92; N), the received command analysis process is ended. If it is within the normal range (step D92) Y: Proceed to step D93. As described above, the value of MODE is not defined and is not used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined that the normal range is not determined by the determination of step D92 (described above). Same as step D61).
In step D93, it is determined whether the value of ACT separated in step D91 is within the normal range. If it is not within the normal range (step D93; N), the received command analysis process is ended, and if within the normal range (step D93). Y: Proceed to step D94. The determination in step D93 is performed in the same manner as in steps D62 to D65 described above. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of this ACT are defined in the above-described ACTION check table, and in step D93, the ACT separated in the upper limit to the lower limit. Check whether the value is within the range, and if it is within the range, determine that it is within the normal range (no missing teeth check at this point).

At step D94, the head address of the match check table corresponding to the value of the separated MODE is acquired from the above-described ACTION check table (step D94), and then the process goes to step D95.
Here, the match check table is one in which all valid ACT values (action values) for the corresponding MODE value are registered in order from the top address, and are provided for each MODE value. .
In the case of MODE in which valid ACTION values are fixed in a continuous range, since the match check table is unnecessary, data of the head address of the match check table in the ACTION check table is NULL. Also, for the row of MODE in which the match check table is defined, the effective ACTION is missing, so after checking the upper and lower limits, further comparison and judgment are performed using the corresponding match check table. Is performed (steps D96 to D99 described later).

  In step D95, it is determined whether the start address of the match check table acquired in step D94 is NULL, and if it is NULL (step D95; Y), the process proceeds to step D100, and it is not NULL (step D95; N) Proceed to step D96. The fact that the start address of the match check table is NULL means that the valid ACT values for the MODE are continuous, and since the range check at the step D93 is OK, steps D96 to Jump to step D100 without executing D99.

  In step D96, loop processing (repeated processing) is performed with steps D96 and D99 as loop ends. That is, in step D96, by branching in step D99, an operation of sequentially executing step D97 and step D98 described below is repeated until an end condition described later is satisfied. In the loop process, data (data of the corresponding row in the match check table) corresponding to the address of the match check table (hereinafter referred to as “match check table address”) acquired in step D94 and updated in step D98 described later The end condition corresponds to the value of ACT separated in step D91, and the process is repeatedly executed until the end condition is satisfied. However, when the determination result in step D97 described later is Yes, the loop processing is exited (the loop processing is terminated even if the termination condition is not satisfied).

That is, in step D96, first, in step D97, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the match check table address is a check end code. If the check command is not received (step D97; N), the match check table address is updated to the next record (step D98), and the process proceeds to step D99. When the match check table address is updated to the next record, the row in the match check table corresponding to the match check table address is switched to the next row.
In step D99, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the updated match check table address matches the value of ACT separated in step D91. If the data match, the end condition is satisfied, and the loop processing is ended. The process then proceeds to step D100, and if they do not match, the process returns to step D96 to repeat the loop process.

  In the loop processing of steps D96 to D99 described above, a check (including a missing tooth check) is performed to determine whether or not the combination of the MODE is a normal ACT. Since there are a plurality of valid ACTs for one MODE, but their values are not necessarily continuous, it is checked whether the command has a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, one of them is compared and checked one by one. For example, when the value of MODE separated in step D91 is 89h and the value of ACT is 31h, and the data in the fifth line of the match check table is 31h, the above loop process is repeated four times. At the same time, the end condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds from step D99 to step D100. In addition, the value of MODE separated in step D91 is 89h and the value of ACT is 13h or the like, and 13h and the like do not exist in the match check table (13h and the like do not have discontinuous portions in the match check table) In the case of missing data which is data), the above-mentioned end condition is not satisfied even if the above-mentioned loop processing is repeated until the last line, and the data becomes the check end code when the last line is reached The determination result of step D97 is "Yes", the loop process is exited, and the process returns. Since the value of ACT is abnormal when the determination result in step D97 is Yes in this manner, the step is determined as the command abnormality as in the case where the determination result in steps D92 and D93 is No. The received command analysis process ends without executing D100 and subsequent steps.

As described above, when it is not determined that the value of the command (data of MODE and ACT separated in step D91) is abnormal in the process up to step D99, step D100 is executed after step D95 or D99. .
In step D100, it is determined whether or not the data of MODE is within the variation system command range, and if it is within this range (step D100; Y), variation system command processing (step D101) is executed and the reception command analysis process is ended. If it is out of this range (step D100; N), the process proceeds to step D102. Here, the data of MODE is data of MODE stored separately in step D91 (the same applies to step D102 described later). The variation system command (also referred to as "variation command" or "variation pattern command") is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, and the range that data of this variation command can take is a variation system command range. In this step D100, the checkout of MODE may not be performed or may be performed.

At step D102, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the big hit system command range, and if it is within this range (step D102; Y), the big hit system command process (step D103) is executed to analyze the received command. If the process is completed and out of this range (step D102; N), the process proceeds to step D104. The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) relating to a big hit medium effect, and the range which can be taken by data of the big hit system command is a big hit system command range.
At step D104, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. If it is within this range (step D104; Y), symbol system command processing (step D105) is executed to analyze the received command. When the process is completed and out of this range (step D104; N), the process proceeds to step D106. A symbol system command (sometimes referred to as a "design command" or a "special decoration command") is a command for instructing information related to a special design symbol (for example, what to make the special symbol stop symbol, etc.) The range that can be taken by this symbol command data is the symbol system command range.

At step D106, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the one-shot command range, and if it is within this range (step D106; Y), one-shot command processing (step D107) is executed to analyze the received command. If the process is completed and out of this range (step D106; N), the process proceeds to step D108. It should be noted that unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that stand alone are called single-shot commands. The one-shot commands (sometimes referred to as "one-shot commands") include a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. The range that can be taken by the data of this one-shot system command is the one-shot system command range.
In step D108, it is determined whether the data in MODE is a prefetch command, and if it is a prefetch command (step D108; Y), prefetch command processing (step D109) is executed to analyze received commands. If the command is not a prefetch command (step D108; N), the reception command analysis process is ended without executing step D109. Here, the pre-reading system command is a command for instructing the presence or absence of occurrence of pre-reading effect (for example, a big hit advance notice of a special drawing) and determination of the contents of the effect at the time of occurrence.

In this example, the command reception order at the start of the change is different from that in the conventional configuration. Conventionally, the variation pattern command → stop symbol command → hold number command has been in this order, but in this example, the hold number command → stop symbol command → variation pattern command is in order. Here, the change of the transmission order is not so important because the number-of-holds command is independent content that is not directly related to the fluctuation effect, but the order of the symbol command (stop symbol command) and the fluctuation command (variation pattern command) has been switched There are the following backgrounds and effects.
That is, it is the fluctuation pattern command that determines the content of the fluctuation effect, and it can be said that the stop symbol is only one parameter in the effect content, and nothing can be performed only by receiving the symbol command. Previously, the variation pattern command was treated as a "screen display change system command" and the symbol command was treated as an "internal parameter change system command", but in the conventional configuration, even if a screen display change system command is received, Because of the stage where the symbol parameters have not been received, it was not possible to immediately prepare for rendering. Furthermore, it has to be monitored whether a symbol command is sent within a specified time, which increases the load on the effect control device.
However, in this example, since the order is reversed, there is obtained an effect that it is possible to immediately prepare for rendering if the received pattern information matches when the variation pattern command is received. . Even if the symbol command is received first, it is not a command to change the screen display, so only the symbol will not be changed first. This is because only the symbol information is stored in the RAM. In addition, even if the symbol command is dropped, there is also an advantage that the variation is possible if the symbol information stored in the previous time matches. On the other hand, in the conventional configuration, if it is dropped, the symbol information is lost, and the variation can not be performed. That is, in the case of this example, it can be said that the possibility of the player realizing that the command is missed is extremely low (much lower than in the prior art). In addition, although the symbol command and the variation command are a pair of commands, the relationship between them is thinned and can be handled as an independent command, so that the program development efficiency is improved.

[Variable system command processing]
Next, the details of the variable system command processing (step D101) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When variable system command processing is started, first, in step D111, it is determined whether the special drawing type is unconfirmed, and when it is unconfirmed (step D111; Y), the variable system command processing is ended and not unconfirmed In the case (step D111; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step D112) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D113. The special view type is information indicating whether the special view type is special view 1 or special view 2, and is information set in step D171 described later of the symbol system command processing.

In step D113, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, based on the information (valid command information or invalid command information) returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step D112). If it is consistent (step D113; Y), that is, if invalid command information is returned, the variation system command processing is ended, and if it is not inconsistent (step D113; N), that is, valid command information is returned. In the case, the process proceeds to step D114.
The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, an off symbol, a 16R probability variation big hit symbol and the like. In addition, the inconsistency in the step D113 contradicts in rendering, for example, when the symbol command of the 16R probability variation big hit symbol has been received although the variation command (variation pattern command) of out of phase has been received. It means that it is a combination (combination of variation command and symbol type).

  In step D114, in order to produce effects according to the fluctuation command, the fluctuation effect setting process (step D114) is executed, and the fluctuation state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko gaming machine) (step D115). ), End the variable system command processing. Here, “during movement” means during movement of a special map (during customer waiting demonstration or during a big hit, or not being fanfare middle grade, etc.).

[Variation pattern corresponding symbol judgment processing]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern-corresponding symbol determination processing (step D112) of the above-described fluctuation system command processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process is started, first, the symbol type information saved in step D173 described later of the symbol system command processing is loaded (step D121), and the process proceeds to step D122.
The symbol type information in this case is information indicating the symbol type of the stop symbol of the variable display game of the special figure (decorative symbol). In the case of this example, the symbol types may be classified into five types: "discarded symbol", "2R positive variation big hit symbol", "16R positive variation big hit symbol", "11R positive variation big hit symbol", and "11R normal big hit symbol" In detail, for example, “16R positive variation big hit symbol” is further divided into 5 types of A to E, and “11R positive variation big hit symbol” is further divided into 3 types of A to C, and in total 11 types. There is a stop symbol pattern of. However, the present invention is not limited to this aspect. For example, other round numbers such as big hit symbols and small hit symbols may be set, and the setting of this symbol type changes depending on the specifications of the model. Here, 2R and 16R indicate the number of rounds of big hit, and the big hit big hit design is a big hit design that becomes a positive variation state (a state where the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than the normal state) after a big hit. It is a big hit symbol that will be in the normal state (not positive change state) after a big hit. In addition, the off symbol is a symbol (a symbol that does not become a big hit) in which the result of the variable display game is distracted.

  In step D122, it is determined whether the MODE data (upper byte data separated in step D91 described above) is within the variation command range, and if it is within this range (step D122; Y), the procedure proceeds to step D123. The process advances, if it is out of this range (step D122; N), the process proceeds to step D133 because the command is abnormal. In this step D122, for example, the same determination as step D100 described above is executed again. In this step D122, the MODE missing check may or may not be performed. Further, the determination contents of step D122 and the above-described step D100 may be different. For example, the mode omission check may be performed in only one of the step D100 and the step D122 described above.

  In step D123, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is an out symbol, and if it is an out symbol (step D123; Y), an out ACT matching check table corresponding to the data of MODE is set (step D124) The process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not a lost design (step D123; N), the process proceeds to step D125. Here, the out-of-time ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be present as ACT (lower byte data of a command) in the case of out-of-pattern.

The ACT match check address table is registered in the PROM 321, and the address of the corresponding ACT match check table is acquired and set from the ACT match check address table in step D124. In the out-of-time ACT consistency check address table, an address for identifying the out-of-time ACT consistency check table (in this case, the start address of the out-of-time ACT validation check table) is defined It is Then, in the case of the out-of-time ACT consistency check table, in the case of the out-of-pattern, all valid ACT values (action values) for the corresponding MODE value are registered in order from the top address, MODE Provided for each value of
In addition, such ACT matching check address table and ACT matching check table, symbol type other than off symbol ("2R positive variation big hit symbol", "16R positive variation big hit symbol", "11R positive variation big hit symbol", and "11R normal big hit The symbol “) is similarly provided, and is used in the same manner as step D124 in steps D126, D128, D130 and D132 described later.

  In step D125, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is 2R probability variation big hit symbol, and if it is 2R probability variation big hit symbol (step D125; Y), 2R probability variation big hit time ACT matching check table corresponding to MODE data Is set (step D126), and the process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not the 2R probability variation big hit symbol (step D125; N), the process proceeds to step D127. Here, the 2R probability variation big hit time ACT matching check table is a table including all data which can be as ACT (lower byte data of command) in the case of 2R probability variation big hit symbol.

  In step D127, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is 16R positive variation big hit symbol or not, and if it is 16R positive variation big hit symbol (step D127; Y), 16R positive variation big hit time ACT matching check table corresponding to MODE data Is set (step D128), and the process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not the 16R positive variation big hit symbol (step D127; N), the process proceeds to step D129. Here, the 16R probability variation big hit time ACT matching check table is a table including all data which can be as ACT (lower byte data of a command) in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit symbol.

  In step D129, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is 11R probability variation big hit symbol, and if it is 11R probability variation big hit symbol (step D129; Y), 11R probability variation big hit time ACT matching check table corresponding to MODE data Is set (step D130), and the process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not the 11R probability variation big hit symbol (step D129; N), the process proceeds to step D131. Here, the 11R probability variation big hit time ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be present as ACT (lower byte data of command) in the case of the 11R probability variation big hit symbol.

In step D131, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is 11R normal big hit symbol, and if 11R normal big hit symbol (step D131; Y), 11R normal big hit time ACT matching check table corresponding to MODE data Is set (step D132), and the process proceeds to step D141. If it is not the 11R normal jackpot symbol (step D131; N), the process proceeds to step D133 because the command is abnormal. Here, the 11R normal big hit ACT consistency check table is a table including all data that can be as ACT (lower byte data of a command) in the case of the 11R normal big hit symbol.
In step D133, invalid command information is returned (step D133), and the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process is ended.

  In step D141, loop processing (repeated processing) is performed with steps D141 and D144 as loop ends. That is, when the process proceeds to step D141, the ACT matching check table (one of the immediately preceding steps D124, D126, D128, D130, and D132) sequentially executes step D142 and step D143 by branching in step D144. Repeat until the end of

That is, at step D141, first, at step D142, an address of an ACT matching check table (hereinafter referred to as “ACT matching check table obtained at any of steps D124, D126, D128, D130, D132 and updated at step D143 described later) It is determined whether the data (data of the corresponding row in the ACT consistency check table) corresponding to “address” matches the value of ACT separated in step D91, and if it matches (step D142; Y), the loop After exiting the process, the process proceeds to step D146, and if not coincident (step D142; N), the ACT matching check table address is updated to the next record (step D143), and the process proceeds to step D144.
In step D144, it is determined whether step D142 has been repeatedly executed until the last data of the ACT consistency check table. If step D142 is repeated until the last data, the process proceeds to step D145. If not, the step Return to D141 and repeat the process. Specifically, in step D144, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the ACT consistency check table address updated in step D143 is the check end code (−1). If the data is the check end code, it is assumed that the process is repeated to the end. At step D145, if it is not the check end code, the process returns to step D141 to repeat the processing.

If any data in the ACT consistency check table matches the data of ACT separated in the above-described step D91 by the process of the repetitive loop of steps D141 to D144, the process proceeds to step D146, otherwise If there is no matching data in the ACT matching check table, the process proceeds to step D145.
And if it progresses to step D145, invalid command information is returned as it is abnormal (step D145), and a fluctuation pattern corresponding | compatible symbol determination processing is complete | finished. In step D146, the value of valid command information is returned as being normal (step D146), and the variation pattern correspondence symbol determination process is ended.

In the above-described step D113, the consistency of the variation command and the symbol type is determined by the information returned in any of the steps D133, D145, and D146.
For example, the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is a disconnected symbol, and the value of MODE of the variation command separated in step D91 is CBh and the value of ACT is in advance. If the data in the fifth row of the ACT consistency check table is 06h, the determination result in step D142 becomes Yes when step D142 is repeated five times, and the process proceeds to step D146 and is valid. The command information is returned, and the determination result in step D113 is No (match). Further, in the same case, when the value of MODE separated in step D91 is CBh and the value of ACT is, for example, 01h, and 01h does not exist in the ACT consistency check table, the above loop process is repeated many times. Even if it is repeated, the judgment result of the above-mentioned step D142 is No, and the data becomes the check end code when reaching the final line, so the above loop processing is finished and the process proceeds to step D145, invalid command information is returned The determination result of step D113 is Yes (mismatch). In addition, when the value of MODE separated in step D91 is not the variation system command range (when step D122 is No), or the value of MODE separated in step D91 is the variation system command range (Yes in step D122) Nevertheless, if the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is not any symbol type (if all of steps D123, D125, D127, D129, D131 are No), invalid command information is returned in step D133. The determination result of step D113 is Yes (mismatch).
As described above, according to the variation pattern-corresponding symbol determination process, the consistency check is performed as to whether the variation pattern command matches the stop symbol. Since the variation performed depends on the type of stop symbol (the above-mentioned off symbol, symbol type such as 16R positive variation big hit symbol etc), it is necessary to check in advance whether it is a variation pattern command that matches the symbol and consistency has been taken For example, the above-described steps D114 and D115 are not performed to prevent the abnormal variable display effect. In addition, the variation pattern is not necessarily divided completely by symbol, and for example, there is also a variation pattern shared by 16R positive variation big hit symbols and 2R positive variation big hit symbols.

[Big hit system command processing]
Next, details of the jackpot-based command processing (step D103) in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the big hit system command processing is started, first, at step D151, the data of MODE (the upper byte data separated at the above step D91, the same applies to the later steps D154, D157 and D160) becomes fanfare effect (big hit) If it is determined that the fanfare effect is to be instructed (step D151; Y), the process proceeds to step D152, and if the fanfare effect is not instructed (step D151; N), go to step D154.
At step D152, the fanfare effect setting process (step D152) for performing fanfare effect according to the command is executed, and the fanfare medium is set as the P machine state (step D153), and the big hit system command processing ends. Do.

When the process proceeds to step D154, it is determined whether the data of MODE is to instruct round effect (effect in a big hit round), and if it is to command round effect (step D154; Y), step D155. If it is not intended to command a round effect (step D154; N), the process proceeds to step D157.
At step D155, a round effect setting process (step D155) for performing round effects according to the command is executed, and a round is set as the P machine state (step D156), and the big hit system command processing is ended. Do.

When the process proceeds to step D157, it is determined whether or not the data of MODE instructs an interval effect (an effect between rounds during a big hit) and an interval effect is instructed (step D157; Y). The process proceeds to step D158, and in the case where the interval effect is not instructed (step D157; N), the process proceeds to step D160.
At step D158, an interval effect setting process (step D158) for performing interval effect according to the command is executed, and during the interval is set as the P machine state (step D159), and the big hit system command processing is ended. Do.

When the process proceeds to step D160, it is determined whether the data of MODE instructs an ending effect (effect at the end of a big hit), and when an ending effect is instructed (step D160; Y), the process proceeds to step D161. In the case where the process proceeds and the ending effect is not commanded (step D160; N), the big hit system command processing ends.
In step D161, an ending effect setting process (step D161) for performing ending effect according to the command is executed to set ending in P machine state (step D162), and the big hit system command is ended. .
The above is an example of the big hit system command processing, and processing other than the above (for example, processing for effects other than fanfare, round, interval, and ending) may be possible.

[Design system command processing]
Next, the details of the symbol system command processing (step D105) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the symbol system command processing is started, first, a special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to data of MODE (data of upper byte separated in the above-mentioned step D91 and the same with step D172 described later) Information) is set (step D171). For example, when the data of MODE is 85h, the special figure 1 is set as the special figure type, and when the data of MODE is 86h, the special figure 2 is set as the special figure type. As described above, since it is possible to determine whether the special view 1 or the special view 2 is the data of MODE, in this step D171, the special view type is determined and set from the data of MODE.

  Next, a symbol type setting table corresponding to the data of MODE is set (step D172). The symbol type setting table is a table for determining the symbol type (the category of symbols such as the above-mentioned missing symbol, 16R positive variation big hit symbol etc.) corresponding to the symbol command, and data of ACTION of symbol command (for example, 11h-1Bh It is a table in which the correspondence between the symbol type and the symbol type is defined. Since the symbol ratio changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the probability change ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and in step D172, the data of MODE from plural symbol type setting tables Select and set the corresponding one.

Next, based on the symbol type setting table set in step D172, the symbol type corresponding to ACT data (data of lower byte separated in step D91 described above) is acquired and saved as symbol type information ( Step D173), complete the symbol system command processing.
Incidentally, information of the special drawing type and the symbol type set in step D171 and D173 in response to the symbol command is used in the process of the above-mentioned steps D111 and D112 for the fluctuation command received following the symbol command. Then, even if the information of the special view type is used for the determination in step D111, the data set in step D171 before the step D171 is newly executed is stored and held. In addition, even after the information of the symbol type is used in step D112, the data set in step D173 is stored and held until step D173 is newly executed.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, details of the one-shot system command processing (step D107) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG.
When single-shot command processing is started, first in step D181, the data of MODE (the upper byte data separated in step D91 described above, the same applies to steps D191, D193, D195, D197, D197, D199, D204, D207 described later) If it is determined to order a customer waiting demo (step D181; Y), the procedure proceeds to step D182, and if it is not one to order a customer waiting demo (step D182) For D181; N), the process proceeds to step D191. The customer waiting demonstration is a customer waiting demonstration effect (or also referred to as “customer waiting effect”), and is an effect including a customer waiting demonstration display performed on the display device 41. In the guest waiting demonstration effect, the display is not limited to the display on the display device 41, and the display may be performed on another display device, lighting (including blinking) of lamps, or output by sound may be performed.

At step D182, it is determined whether the P machine state (state of the pachinko gaming machine) is waiting for a customer demonstration. If a customer waiting demonstration is in progress (step D182; Y), single-shot command processing is ended and a customer waiting demonstration is in progress If not (step D182; N), a scenario for setting scenario data for waiting for a customer (step D183) is performed to perform customer waiting effect. The scenario control data in the description of the control process of the effect control device 300 means data set in a scenario management area or an address area of the scenario management area, which will be described later, in order to control the flow of a specific effect. In this step D183, setting of scenario control data for effecting customer waiting effects is performed.
Next, customer waiting A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state (step D184), and the process proceeds to step D185. In the case of this example, the customer waiting effects include a customer waiting state A, a customer waiting state B, a customer waiting movie (without sound), and a customer waiting movie (with sound).

In step D185, it is determined whether inter-sub data transmission is in progress (that is, it is determined whether data transmission is in progress to a different pachinko gaming machine production control device), and if it is in transmission (step D185; Y ), The one-shot command processing is finished, and if it is not in transmission (step D185; N), the process proceeds to step D186.
At step D186, an inter-sub command (broadcast transmission setting) of the customer waiting demo synchronization (sub-sub synchronization in the customer waiting demo display) is prepared (step D186), and the inter-sub command is edited to edit the prepared inter-sub command. The transmission data editing process (step D187) is executed.

Next, an initial value is set to an ack waiting timer (a timer used in step D521 described later) (step D188). Whether the sub board (play control device) of the pachinko gaming machine that has received the inter-sub command returns an ack to the sub board of the pachinko gaming machine that has transmitted the inter-sub command varies depending on the type of command (described later) Step D480a)). In this example, the sub-interval command of the customer waiting demo synchronization includes content for requesting an ack reply. That is, in this example, the sub-interval command of the customer waiting demo synchronization is a command that requires an ack response.
Next, an inter-sub presentation effect start waiting timer (a timer used in step D532 described later) is set (step D189), an inter-sub transmission request flag is set (step D190), and the one-shot command processing ends. The inter-sub transmission request flag is used for the determination of step D461 described later.

When the process proceeds to step D191, it is determined whether the data of MODE instructs the value of the special figure 1 hold number, and when the special figure 1 hold number value is instructed (step D191; Y), After the special figure 1 holding information setting process (step D192) is executed, the one-shot system command process is ended, and when the special figure 1 holding number value is not instructed (step D191; N), the process proceeds to step D193.
In step D193, it is determined whether the data of MODE is to instruct the value of the special figure 2 reserve number, and when the special figure 2 is to specify the value of the reserve number (step D193; Y), After the special figure 2 reserve information setting process (step D194) is executed, the one-shot system command process is ended, and when the value of the special figure 2 reserve number is not instructed (step D193; N), the process proceeds to step D195. Although the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (step D192) will be described in detail later, the special figure 2 reservation information setting process (step D194) is the same process as the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (special figure 1 or The description will be omitted because the difference is the special figure 2 only).

If the process proceeds to step D195, it is determined whether the data of MODE is for instructing preparation mode switching preparation (data of the rendering mode switching preparation command) and instructing for preparation mode switching preparation (step D195; Y) After the effect mode switching setting process (step D196) is executed, the one-shot system command process is ended, and if the effect mode switching preparation is not instructed (step D195; N), the process proceeds to step D197. The effect mode switching setting process (step D196) is a control process for performing an operation according to the effect mode switching preparation command, and includes scenario data setting process therefor.
At step D197, it is determined whether the data of MODE indicates power failure recovery (data of command at power failure recovery), and if power failure recovery is notified (step D197; Y), power failure recovery setting After the processing (step D198) is executed, the one-shot system command processing is ended, and when not notifying power failure recovery (step D197; N), the process proceeds to step D199. In the power failure recovery setting process (step D198), for example, a message such as "game resumed" is displayed on the display device 41, or lamps are blinked in a predetermined manner to notify the player of power failure recovery, etc. And scenario data setting processing for that.

In step D199, it is determined whether the data in MODE indicates power on (power on with the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) turned on) (data of command at power on), and the power If it is to notify the power on (step D199; Y), the process proceeds to step D200, and if it is not to notify the power on (step D199; N), the process proceeds to step D204. The command at the time of power on is a power on command for notifying the effect control device 300 that the game control device 100 has cleared RWM. The power-on command is sent to cause the effect control device 300 to clear the effect state and to perform RWM clear notification (for example, an operation of displaying on the display device 41 that the RWM has been cleared).
In step D200, various initial screen information is set (step D200). Setting contents of various initial screen information, clear special drawing classification · design classification, set 0 to special drawing 1 reservation number and special drawing 2 reservation number, for example left = 7 for the current symbol and stop design, medium = 5 , Right = 3 is to set the off design.

Next, the index of the motion control table for suspension corresponding to the number of reservations (= 0) at this time is calculated and saved (step D201). Here, the index of the holding motion control table is an index specifying a row (record) of the holding motion control table. Moreover, the motion control table for suspension is a motion control table for performing suspension display of the start storage of the special view. Further, the process of step D201 is executed for each of the special drawing 1 pending count and the special view 2 pending count.
Here, the motion control table is a control table for executing each of the blocked effects (mainly effect display), and is also simply referred to as a motion table. The data of the motion table can be easily produced by a graphical input operation using a mouse or the like by commercially available application software that can be executed by a PC (personal computer). It is stored in advance in the PROM 321.
Next, power on scenario data setting processing (step D202) is executed. The power-on scenario data setting process may include an initialization process for setting the operation position of the motor of the rendering device to an initial position, and a control process for executing the RWM clear notification. .
Next, customer waiting A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state (step D203), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

If it progresses to step D204, it will be determined whether the data of MODE instruct | command the symbol stop of a special figure, and if it is a command to instruct symbol stop of a special figure (step D204; Y), it will advance to step D205 If it is not intended to instruct the symbol stop of the special figure (step D204; N), the process proceeds to step D207.
In step D205, the symbol stopping scenario data setting process (step D205) is executed to set normal as the machine state P (step D206), and the one-shot system command is ended. Here, "normal" indicates that the player is not a big hit of the special view, a change of the special view, or a waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer). In addition, after being set as normal here, for example, during special feature fluctuation or waiting for a customer, depending on the next command from the main substrate.

When the process proceeds to step D207, it is determined whether the data of MODE indicates the probability information (data of the probability change information command), and in the case of notifying the probability information (step D207; Y), the probability information setting process ( If the single-shot command processing is terminated after execution of step D208) and the probability information is not notified (step D207; N), the other processing steps (not shown) (for example, the data of MODE are determined) Go to step
Here, the probability information setting process (step D208) is a setting process for screen switching at the time of definite variation end (when transitioning from a high probability state to a low probability normal state) in the case of a definite change after a big hit. There are also cases where scenario data setting processing for that purpose is included.
Note that there is a step in which illustration and description are omitted for the one-shot system command processing. For example, the response processing in the case of receiving another non-variable system command (such as an error system command) is omitted. Also, scenario control data is not set for all commands. For example, when an error-related command indicating opening of a frame is received, the screen of the display device 41 is not changed, and setting of scenario control data is not performed.

Customer waiting scenario data setting process
Next, details of customer waiting scenario data setting processing (step D183) in the above-described one-shot system command processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the customer waiting scenario data setting process is started, first, a scenario layer number 0 is prepared (step D211). Here, "prepare" means to temporarily store and hold data in a predetermined storage area for later processing (the same applies to other steps described later). The scenario layer is a layer of conceptual scenarios (layers) for hierarchically controlling the flow of presentation. The scenario layer number is a number assigned to each scenario layer, and in the case of this example, it is from 0 to 7. Also, in this example, the scenario layer No. 0 scenario layer (hereinafter referred to as "scenario layer 0") is mainly used for display control of the background image, scenario layer 1 is used for display control of the left pattern, and scenario layer 2 is right It is used for display control of design, scenario layer 3 is used for display control of middle design, scenario layer 4 is used for display control of notice 1 character, scenario layer 5 is used for display control of notice 2 character, scenario layer 6 is hold A control target is basically assigned to each scenario layer, such as being used for display control of display (that is, decoration special view starting memory display) and scenario layer 7 being used for display control of the fourth symbol. However, only the scenario layer 0 is used for the customer waiting effect, and motion information such as a symbol for the customer waiting effect is also managed in the scenario layer 0.

Next, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table is prepared (step D212). The scenario data table (also simply referred to as the “scenario table”) is a table in which data for controlling the flow of a specific effect (data specifying which motion table is to be executed at what timing, etc.) is set. Yes, and are stored in advance in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 for each effect. The customer waiting scenario data table is a background scenario table for customer waiting effect, and has, for example, a configuration shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 135, in the scenario table of this example, data of operation code and operand (scenario data) is set in each row (each record).
Next, a scenario data setting process (step D213) is executed based on the data (data of address and scenario layer number) prepared in the immediately preceding steps D211 and D212.

Next, scenario layer No. 1 is prepared (step D214), the address (NULL) of the left symbol scenario data table is prepared (step D215), and scenario data is prepared based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D214 and D215. The setting process (step D216) is performed.
Next, scenario layer No. 2 is prepared (step D217), the address (NULL) of the right symbol scenario data table is prepared (step D218), and scenario data is prepared based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D217 and D218. The setting process (step D219) is performed.

Next, scenario layer No. 3 is prepared (step D220), and the address (NULL) of the middle symbol scenario data table is prepared (step D221), and scenario data is prepared based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D220 and D221. The setting process (step D222) is performed.
Next, scenario layer number 4 is prepared (step D223), the address (NULL) of the notice 1 scenario data table is prepared (step D224), and scenario data is prepared based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D223 and D224. The setting process (step D225) is performed.

Next, scenario layer number 5 is prepared (step D226), the address (NULL) of the notice 2 scenario data table is prepared (step D227), and scenario data is prepared based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D226 and D227. The setting process (step D228) is performed.
Next, scenario layer No. 6 is prepared (step D229), the address (NULL) of the pending scenario data table is prepared (step D230), and scenario data setting is made based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D229 and D230 The process (step D231) is performed.

Next, scenario layer No. 7 is prepared (step D232), and the address (NULL) of the fourth symbol scenario data table is prepared (step D233), and the scenario is based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D232 and D233. The data setting process (step D234) is executed to complete the customer waiting scenario data setting process.
Scenario layers 1 to 7 for preparing addresses (NULL) in steps D215, D218, D221, D224, D227, D230, and D233 are scenario layers in which no scenario data table is set, that is, scenario layers not controlled.

[Scenario data setting process]
Next, the details of the scenario data setting process (steps D213, D216, D219, D222, D225, D228, D231, D234) in the above-described customer waiting scenario data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The scenario data setting process is common to various effects, and the step in which the scenario data setting process is executed is another process (for example, step D318 of the reach-less fluctuation setting process described later). There are also many. The steps described as "scenario data setting processing" are all shown in FIG.
When the scenario data setting process is started, it is first determined in step D241 whether the prepared address of the scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in steps D212 and D215) is NULL, and if it is NULL (step D241; Y) Go to step D247, and if not NULL (step D241; N), go to step D242.

  In the customer waiting scenario data setting process described above, when this process is executed in step D213, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table that is not NULL is prepared in step D212 immediately before, so step D241. If the result of this determination is No and the process proceeds to step D242, and this process is executed in step D216 etc. other than that, NULL is prepared in step D215 etc. immediately before, so the determination in step D241 is made. The result is Yes and the process proceeds to step D247.

In step D242, the top address of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (for example, the one prepared in step D211, and so on) is set (step D242). In the case of this example, the RAM in the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 is configured to be provided with storage areas for scenario management called “address area of scenario management area” and “scenario management area”.
Among these, as shown on the right side of FIG. 133, the scenario management area is an area for storing the value of the scenario timer (scenario timer area) and an area for storing the PB timer (push button timer) (PB timer area), an area (PB detection flag area) storing the value of the PB detection flag (push button detection flag), and an area (scenario data table area) storing the address of the scenario data table It is a structure.
Also, there are scenario management areas of the same structure corresponding to each scenario layer, and there are eight scenario layers in this example, so there are also eight scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). . In the above step D 242, the top address of the scenario management area (hereinafter referred to as “corresponding scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number is specified in order to specify one of the plurality of scenario management areas. It is set.
Here, in the present application, “PB (push button)” does not mean only the push button (effect button 25), but the entire effect operation unit 550 (that is, the push button (effect button 25) and the select button ( It means the touch panel 29). Therefore, for example, “PB detection” means “detection of operation of effect button 25 and / or detection of operation of touch panel 29”.

The scenario management area address area is an area for storing the start address of the scenario management area for each scenario layer. In this example, there are eight scenario layers, so as shown on the left side of FIG. 133, It consists of eight areas for storing eight corresponding start addresses (address for scenario layer 0 to address for scenario layer 7).
Then, the top address of the scenario management area set in the immediately preceding step D 242 is stored (that is, written) in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (step D 243).

Then, 0 is written (that is, the value is cleared) as the value of the scenario timer in the corresponding scenario management area (step D244), and 0 is written as the value of the PB timer in the corresponding scenario management area (that is, the value Clear) (step D245). Although the value may be cleared for the PB detection flag of the corresponding scenario management area, it may be cleared when necessary (when PB detection is started), so setting of the PB detection flag is performed here. Absent.
Next, the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in step D212) is written in the scenario data table area of the corresponding scenario management area (step D246), and the scenario data setting process is ended.
On the other hand, in step D247, NULL is written in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (step D247), and the scenario data setting process is ended.

According to the above-described scenario data setting process, the effect storage area for scenario management corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (“address area for scenario management area” and “scenario management area”) for the effect to be executed from now on Scenario control data is set.
For example, in the scenario data setting process for waiting for customers described above, the scenario data setting process is executed in steps D213, D216, D219, D222, D225, D228, D231, and D234, whereby the scenario in the address area of the scenario management area is performed. The top address of the scenario management area 0 is set as the layer 0 address, and NULL is set from the remaining scenario layer 1 addresses to the scenario layer 7 address. In the scenario data area of scenario management area 0, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table prepared in step D212 is set. As a result, control of the customer waiting effect is executed only in the scenario layer 0.

[Special figure 1 reservation information setting process]
Next, the details of the special view 1 suspension information setting process (step D192) in the above-described one-shot system command process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the special view 1 hold information setting process is started, first, the data of the special view 1 hold number at that time is loaded, and the loaded data is stored as the previous hold number (step D251).
Next, the value of the number of reservations instructed by the command (data of MODE and ACT separated in step D91) is stored as the special drawing 1 suspension number (step D252), and the process proceeds to step D253.

In step D253, it is determined whether the number of new reservations (number of special drawing 1 reservations stored in step D252) matches the number of previous reservations (value stored in step D251). If they match (step D253) In case of Y), the special figure 1 suspension information setting process is ended, and when it does not match (step D253; N), the process proceeds to step D254.
In step D254, the index of the pending motion control table corresponding to the new pending number is calculated and saved (step D254). Here, the index is data for specifying which one of a plurality of storage areas forming a group, and in particular, an index for specifying a motion table is called a motion index. In this step D254, a motion index specifying the pending motion control table corresponding to the new pending number is calculated and saved in a storage area (the pending index area) for storing the motion index.
Next, scenario layer number 6 is prepared (step D255), and the address of the special view 1 suspension scenario data table (X pieces of suspension) is prepared (step D256). Here, the special figure 1 suspension scenario data table (X suspension) means a scenario table which is different for each suspension number for producing effects corresponding to the new suspension number, and the new suspension number is, for example, one. For example, it is a special figure 1 suspension scenario data table (one pending), and if the number of new pendings is two, for example, it is a special figure 1 suspension scenario data table (two pending).
Next, based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D255 and D256, the aforementioned scenario data setting process (step D257) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D258.

At step D258, it is determined whether the number of reservations has increased (ie, whether the number of new reservations> previous number of reservations). If it has increased (step D258; Y), the procedure proceeds to step D259, if not (Step D258; N), the process proceeds to Step D262.
In step D259, the display pattern of the normally on hold is set in the color information area corresponding to the new number of holdings (step D259), and the process proceeds to step D260.
At step D260, it is determined whether the state of the aircraft is a big hit or not, and if the big hit is in progress (step D260; Y), the special view 1 suspension information setting process is ended, and if not big hit (step D260; N) Then, the output request of the starting opening winning character is requested (step D261), and the special view 1 hold information setting process is ended. The big hit includes the above-mentioned fanfare, round, interval, and ending.

At step D262, the special view 1 prefetch information area is shifted (step D262), the color information area is shifted (step D263), and the special view 1 hold information setting process is ended.
In addition, since it is when there is a start winning of special figure 1 that it progresses to step D259, in order to perform the display of suspension by this start winning (display of the start memory reserved) and the winning sound output for effects Steps D259 and D261 are performed. However, during the big hit, it branches at step D260 and does not perform a prize sound output. In addition, since the process proceeds to step D262 when the number of start memory storages in special view 1 decreases, the display of the number of storages for which prefetching display (for example, big hit advance notice and change pattern advance notice) is performed is shifted and displayed. Steps D262 and D263 are executed to shift pre-read information (various information such as pre-read variation pattern and stop symbol information and various information such as presence or absence of pre-reading effect) to the area corresponding to the number of reservations.
In the above-mentioned step D109 (prefetching system command processing), the effect control device 300 sets the above-mentioned prefetching information as the analysis result of the prefetching system command for each hold. Then, it is necessary to shift the storage area of this pre-read information in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings in the same manner as shifting the random number storage area at the start of fluctuation on the main substrate. The above step is the step D262. Step D263 is also for similarly shifting the storage area of the information on the hold display color (that is, the color of the hold display different depending on the presence or absence of the pre-reading effect for the pre-reading effect) in accordance with the pre-reading information. It is a process.

[Change production setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation effect setting process (step D114) in the above-described fluctuation system command process will be described with reference to FIG. 86 and FIG.
When the fluctuation effect setting process is started, first, a fluctuation pattern classification for selecting a large classification pattern (a rough classification of fluctuation display production of a special figure and determined by large classification pattern data described later) according to the received command The process (step D271) is executed to prepare the notice distribution table 1 corresponding to the major pattern and the various effect information returned by the variation pattern classification process of the step D271 (step D272). The effect information here is information on stop symbols (in particular, the details of the big hit symbols, because it is understood by the pattern according to the broad pattern), information on probability states such as high probability / short time status, the number of pending numbers, and the effect control device 300 There may be a game mode managed by (in this example, a game mode command is also sent from the game control apparatus). Since the notice distribution table is set in consideration of various pieces of effect information in step D272 (or steps D274 and D277 described later), the notice distribution rate (for example, even in the same variation pattern command) It is possible to change the incidence rate).
Subsequently, the random number lottery process A (step D273) is executed.
Then, the notice distribution table 2 corresponding to the broad pattern and the various effect information returned in the step D271 is prepared (step D274), the random number lottery process B (step D275) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D276. .

At step D276, it is determined whether the main classification pattern returned at step D271 is "normal deviation", and if "normal deviation" (step D276; Y), the process proceeds to step D279 and must be "normal deviation". (Step D276; N), the process proceeds to Step D277.
At step D277, the advance notice distribution table 3 corresponding to the broad pattern and various effect information returned at step D271 is prepared (step D277), and random number lottery processing C (step D278) is executed. Go to step D279.
In step D279, a basic BGM number (music number of basic BGM) is set (step D279), and notice effect setting process 1 (step D280) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D281.

In step D281, it is determined whether or not the first-half fluctuation type determined in the processing up to this point is normal fluctuation, and if it is normal fluctuation (step D281; Y), it proceeds to step D282, and it is not normal fluctuation (step D281: N) The process proceeds to the step of another process (not shown by the broken line in FIG. 86) (process of various kinds of fluctuation when the first half fluctuation type is not the normal fluctuation).
The first-half fluctuation type is the fluctuation advance notice type assigned by the effect control device side in the same MODE (for example, the first 12 seconds normal fluctuation). Also, "normal" in "normal variation" means that it is not a special variation such as so-called slippage or shortening variation. Further, in order to avoid complication, only the situation of prior notice distribution in the case where the first-half fluctuation type is normal (not sliding or shortening) is described in the flowchart (FIG. 86). Then, processing of various kinds of fluctuations when the first half fluctuation type is not the normal fluctuation is executed in the steps after the flow when the determination result in step D 281 becomes No (omitted by the broken line in FIG. 86). After the subsequent processing is performed, the process proceeds to step D290 in FIG. Also, in either case of big hit or lose, the first half fluctuation can be normal, so each forecasting scenario data setting process (steps D 286 to D 289 described later) may be executed in either case of big hit or out. is there. However, since the first half variation dedicated to the jackpot is also conceivable, it is not always the case that the setting process is only for both.

At step D282, it is judged whether the notice type (data of the effect distribution result area to be described later) determined in the processing (step D273 etc.) so far is to designate a roll notice, and if it is not a roll notice (step At D282; N, the process proceeds to step D283, and if it is a scroll advance notice (step D282; Y), the scroll advance scenario data setting process (step D286) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D290.
In step D283, it is determined whether the notice type determined in the process up to this point designates scroll character advance notice. If it is not scroll character advance notice (step D283; N), the process proceeds to step D284 and the scroll If it is the character advance notice (step D283; Y), the scroll character advance notice scenario data setting process (step D287) is executed, and then the process goes to step D290.

In step D284, it is determined whether the notice type determined in the process up to this point designates PB notice, and if it is not PB notice (step D284; N), the process proceeds to step D285 and PB notice is made. If there is any (step D284; Y), the process proceeds to step D290 after executing the PB preliminary announcement scenario data setting process (step D288).
In step D285, it is determined whether the notice type determined in the process up to this point designates flashback notice. If flashback notice is not given (step D285; N), the process proceeds to step D290. When it is the back notice (step D285; Y), the process for setting the scenario data for flashback notice (step D289) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D290.

At step D290, it is determined whether the special drawing type is special drawing 2 or not. If it is special drawing 2 (step D290; Y), it proceeds to step D291, and if it is not special drawing 2 (step D290; N) ), That is, in the case of Special Figure 1, the process proceeds to step D293.
At step D291, a motion index for specifying the suspension motion control table corresponding to the special view 2 is calculated and saved in a storage area (indexing region for suspension) storing this (step D291), the fourth symbol A motion index for specifying a motion control table is calculated and saved in a storage area (fourth pattern index area) for storing the motion control table (step D292), and the process proceeds to step D295.
At step D293, a motion index for specifying the holding motion control table corresponding to the special view 1 is calculated and saved in a storage area (indexing area for holding) to store the motion index (step D293). A motion index for specifying a motion control table is calculated and saved in a storage area (fourth pattern index area) for storing the motion control table (step D294), and the process proceeds to step D295.

The motion list table is a data list of a motion table in which data related to a large number of motion tables are arranged in each row (each record). The data in each row of the motion list table is data regarding one motion table. In each row of the motion list table, there are a frame number, a motion command number, a motion table name, a behavior number, and a behavior table name as data items (data categories). However, this category setting is an example, and other parameters may be set. The contents of each data item are as follows.
The number of frames (the number of display frames) indicates how many frames of motion data (data constituting the motion table) have been defined for the motion table.
The number of motion commands indicates the number of commands defined in the motion table.
The motion table name indicates the name (= address) of the motion table.
The number of behaviors indicates the number (type) of behaviors used in the motion table.
The behavior table name indicates the name (= address) of the behavior table in which the behavior (address of the process) at the time of the motion control is defined.
If the number of behaviors is 0, naturally the behavior table is unnecessary.
Here, the behavior is a function to set the operation of an object (display element). In this example, image data (character data) defined on the motion table is mainly used to change according to the situation.

  At step D295, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is saved in the current symbol area (step D295), and the process proceeds to step D296. Here, the value of the special view stop symbol area is data set in step D354 described later. Further, the current symbol area is a storage area for storing symbol numbers of the current symbol to be displayed (a storage area containing symbol numbers of the current symbol to be displayed on the display screen 41a at that time), and the value of this storage area (The symbol number of the current symbol) is updated one after another with the change during the change display. In addition, although the fluctuation display of the special figure starts the next fluctuation display (including the symbol display while waiting for customers) from the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation display, in order to securely perform this operation, the previous processing is performed in this step D295. The stop symbol of the variable display is saved and used for the next variable display. This is particularly significant when a new change command is received during a change display. That is, when a new change command is received during the change display, since there is the processing of step D295, it is supposed to stop at the previous change instead of starting the next change from the symbol displayed at the time of reception. It is replaced by a symbol and starts to change. In this case, if there is no step D295, there arises a problem that the player starts from the symbol displayed at that time (when the variation command is received), and the player does not know which symbol is supposed to stop. However, in the case of this example, the presence of step D295 causes the symbol to be replaced by the symbol that was supposed to stop at the previous change and starts the change, and the player knows the previous stop symbol. The problem is solved.

At step D296, it is determined whether the MODE data separated in step D91 (data of first-half fluctuation pattern) commands normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, and if normal fluctuation is commanded in the first half of 12 seconds (Step D 296; Y) Go to step D 297, and if it is not one to command normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds (step D 296; N), go to step D 299. Here, "normal" in "the first half of the 12 seconds normal fluctuation" means that it is not a special fluctuation such as a shortening fluctuation.
In the present example, in the case of the normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, there can be only a fluctuation pattern without reach action. In this case, since the reach action is not performed, the time value of the second half fluctuation is set as 0, and the total fluctuation pattern is 12 seconds (that is, 12 seconds normal fluctuation; “normal” here means the fluctuation which is not reach) It is defined as). That is, the second-half fluctuation time value indicated by the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) separated in step D91 is 0 second fluctuation.

In step D297, it is determined whether the data of ACT is to command no reach action (0 second fluctuation). If no reach action (step D297; Y), no reach fluctuation setting process (step D298) is performed. After execution, the variation effect setting process is terminated, and if the reach action is not present (step D 297; N), since it is abnormal, step D 298 is not executed and the variation effect setting process is terminated.
In step D299, it is determined whether or not the data in MODE indicates a normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds (meaning that "normal" here is not a shortening fluctuation or the like) in the first half of 10.4 seconds, If it is intended to command normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds (step D299; Y), the process proceeds to step D300, and if not commanded normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds (step D299; N), the processing proceeds to step D308. move on. In this example, in the case of the normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, there can be only a fluctuation pattern with reach action. In this case, since the time value of the latter half fluctuation changes according to the contents of the reach action, the fluctuation pattern is defined as a fluctuation pattern of “10.4 + α” seconds in total. There are multiple types of ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) for the same MODE, and this number varies depending on the specifications of each gaming machine.

In step D300, it is determined whether the data of ACT (second-half fluctuation pattern) commands change of normal -1 deviation, and if normal -1 instructs deviation (step D300; Y), After performing the normal-1 deviation setting process (step D304), the variation effect setting process is ended, and if the normal -1 does not command a deviation (step D300; N), the process proceeds to step D301. Note that the normal-1 deviation is a fluctuation pattern that is deviated with the normal reach action.
In step D301, it is determined whether the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) commands a change of normal +1 deviation, and if normal +1 instructs deviation (step D301; Y), normal +1 After the release setting process (step D305) is performed, the variation effect setting process is ended, and if it is not a command to command a normal +1 release (step D301; N), the process proceeds to step D302. It should be noted that the normal +1 deviation is also a fluctuation pattern that deviates with the normal reach action.

  In step D302, it is determined whether the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) instructs command change of warlord-1 or not, and if war commander-1 instructs a shift (step D302; Y), After executing the warlord- 1 -displacement setting process (step D306), the variation effect setting process is ended, and if the commander-general does not command a deviation (step D302; N), the process proceeds to step D303. In addition, military commander-1 deviation is a fluctuation pattern which comes off with military commander reach action.

  At step D303, it is determined whether the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) instructs command change of military commander development -1, and if command of military commander development -1 is commanded to move (step D303; Y After the execution of the warlord development -1 cancellation setting process (step D307), the variation effect setting process is ended, and if warlord development -1 is not a command to cancel the cancellation (step D303; N), the dashed lines in FIG. Go to the other steps In addition, military commander development-1 is a fluctuation pattern which is detached with military commander development reach action. In addition, after the flow where the determination result in step D303 is No (a dotted line omitted in the drawing), other reach effects (for example, fluctuation display effects in the case of a big hit) are also included in the case of normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds The same processing as in steps D303, D307, etc. is executed, and if the data of the ACT does not correspond to any of them, it is an abnormality, so the fluctuation effect setting processing is ended.

  In step D308, it is determined whether the data of MODE indicates a command of 12.8 seconds pseudo reciprocation 1 fluctuation, and if 12.8 seconds pseudo reciprocation 1 fluctuation is commanded. (Step D308; Y) Proceed to Step D309, and if it is not a command to issue a 12.8 second simulated reciprocation 1 change (Step D308; N), go to another step omitted by broken lines in FIG. Note that after the flow when the determination result in step D308 is No (a dotted line is omitted), the same processing as in steps D303 and D307 is executed for the variable display effect when the data of the MODE is other than the above. If the data of MODE does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal, so the variation effect setting process is ended.

  At step D309, it is determined whether the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) instructs command change of warlord-1 or not, and if war commander-1 is commanded of shift (step D309; Y), After executing the normal-1 deviation setting process (step D310), the variation effect setting process is terminated, and if the commander does not command a deviation (step D309; N), the other lines omitted in FIG. Go to step. In addition, after the flow where the determination result in step D309 becomes No (where the illustration is omitted by a broken line), other reach effects (for example, a fluctuation display effect in the case of a big hit) in the case of 12.8 seconds pseudo ream 1 fluctuation The same processing as in steps D309, D310, etc. is executed for (including) and, if the data of the ACT does not correspond to any, it is abnormal, and thus the fluctuation effect setting processing is ended.

[No reach variation setting process]
Next, the details of the no-reach fluctuation setting process (step D298) in the above-described fluctuation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, in this example, the normal fluctuation of MODE = 12 second half is only in the case of a loss. For this reason, the below-mentioned pattern generation flag set in the no reach variation setting process has only an instruction of the off pattern.
When the reach no change setting process is started, first, in step D311, it is determined whether the first half change type set in the previous process (steps D271 to D278) is a super shortening change, and if it is a super shortening change (step D311; Y), reach +1 prepare the symbol generation flag of the gap (step D312), proceed to step D314, if it is not super shortening fluctuation (step D311; N), prepare the symbol generation flag of the loose-open pattern (Step D313) The process proceeds to Step D314.
In addition, even if the command from the main board is a normal change in the first half of 12 seconds, there is a case in which the movement of the reach may be selected by the sub board, and the super shortening change is an example of the change in such a case. .
In addition, the loose eye means a state (a combination such as “776” is not included if it is not a combination of reach types) in which a plurality of symbols constituting a special figure are not a reach or a jackpot.

  In step D314, stop symbol setting processing (step D314) is performed based on the symbol generation flag prepared in step D312 or D313, and the address of the scenario table corresponding to the ACT and the first half variation type (the scenario table) Name) in the symbol variation scenario table area (step D315). The symbol variation scenario table area is a storage area of the RAM in the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 for temporarily storing the address of the scenario table of symbol variation to be used from now on, and the left symbol area and the right symbol area , Divided into areas for middle symbol, and further divided into areas for 1st (early stage), 2nd (first half), 3rd (second half), and a total of nine areas for storing addresses of one scenario table There are (= 3 × 3). On the other hand, in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300, a table for selecting a scenario table for symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "symbol variation list table") according to the command received from the game control device and the first half variation type It is registered every (every data of ACT). In step D315, a symbol variation list table corresponding to the ACT is first selected, and then a setting pattern corresponding to the first half variation type is selected from a plurality of setting patterns in the symbol variation list table selected and selected. The address of the scenario table of the setting pattern is saved in the symbol variation scenario table area.

  In the present application, the period of movement of the symbol within the first half fluctuation time is referred to as "the first stage" (1st), and the remaining period within the first half fluctuation time is referred to as the "first half" (2nd). The movement of the symbol starts with the same first half fluctuation time, but there is also a case where it scrolls down as it is or when it hops up once (a kind of advance notice), so that the movement is not one way. It has the composition. Then, the second half fluctuation time is set as "second half" (3rd). In addition, in this example, as described above, the contents of presentation are set for each period in which the presentation at the time of special figure fluctuation is divided into plural times, and the entire effect at the time of special figure fluctuation is set as a combination of effect contents of each period. It is a combination type to constitute. This has the advantage of reducing the total amount of data that must be stored in the non-volatile memory for storing control data (in this example, the PROM 321). That is, for example, if all the tables are prepared for each of the presentation contents having different movements even by a little, the amount of data becomes enormous. However, such a combination formula improves such a problem.

Next, scenario layer number 0 is prepared (step D316), and the address of the background scenario table corresponding to the current game mode etc. is prepared (step D317), and based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D316 and D317. Then, the scenario data setting process (step D318) described above is performed.
Next, scenario layer No. 1 is prepared (step D319), and the left symbol scenario 1st table address (the first symbol area in the left symbol area described above) is stored in the area for the left symbol scenario (Step D320), and the above-described scenario data setting process (step D321) is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D319 and D320.

Next, scenario layer No. 2 is prepared (step D322) and the scenario table stored in the right symbol scenario 1st table address (the first symbol area in the above right symbol area) from the above-mentioned symbol variation scenario table area Address) is loaded and prepared (step D323), and the above-described scenario data setting process (step D324) is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D322 and D323.
Next, scenario layer number 3 is prepared (step D325), and from the above-mentioned symbol variation scenario table area, the scenario table stored in the middle symbol scenario 1st table address (the 1st (early opening) area in the above middle symbol area). The address of (1) is loaded and prepared (step D326), and the above-described scenario data setting process (step D327) is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D325 and D326.

Next, scenario layer number 7 is prepared (step D328), and the address of the fourth symbol scenario table (the scenario table for the fourth symbol) is prepared (step D329), and prepared in the immediately preceding steps D328 and D329. Based on the data, the above-described scenario data setting process (step D330) is executed, and the no reach fluctuation setting process is ended.
According to the no-reach variation setting process described above, it is performed for the scenario layer (in this case, scenario layer 0, 1, 2, 3, 7) in which scenario control data needs to be set in the case of no-reach variation. Become.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the stop symbol setting process (step D314) in the above-mentioned reach none variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in this example, although special figures for production are arranged in three places (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) arranged side by side, nine types of symbols (symbol numbers 0 to 8) are used as these symbols. ) Is illustrated.
When the stop symbol setting process is started, it is first determined in step D331 whether the above-mentioned special figure type is special figure 2 fluctuation, and when it is special figure 2 (step D331; Y), the process proceeds to step D332 and If it is not FIG. 2 (Step D331; N), that is, in the case of Special Figure 1, it proceeds to Step D333.
In step D332, the shifted symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 fourth pattern of the special figure stop symbol area (step D332), and the process proceeds to step D334.
In step D333, the shifted symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 fourth pattern of the special figure stop symbol area (step D333), and the process proceeds to step D334.

  If it progresses to step D334, it will be determined whether or not a loose-set character is set as a symbol generation flag (step D334; Y), if it is not set if it is not set (step D334; N), Go to step D345. In addition, the off-set loose-eye symbol generation flag is set (prepared) in step D313 described above.

At step D335, one symbol number randomly selected from nine types of symbol numbers 0 to 8 is set as the left symbol lx (step D335), and one symbol type randomly selected from eight types of symbol numbers 0 to 7 is selected. The set symbol number is set as the right symbol rx (step D336), and the process proceeds to step D337.
In step D337, it is determined whether the right symbol rx set in step D336 is a value greater than or equal to the left symbol lx set in step D335. If right symbol rx 左 left symbol lx (step D337; Y) The symbol number of the symbol rx is incremented by 1 (step D338), and the process proceeds to step D339, and if right symbol rx 左 left symbol lx is not (step D337; N), that is, if right symbol rx The process proceeds to step D339 without executing step D338.
By the processing of these steps D335 to D338, the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are randomly set, and the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are always set to different symbol numbers. The reason for selecting from the range of symbol number 7 or less in step D336 is to be able to increase by one in step D338.

In step D339, it is determined whether the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx can be a combination that can not be an appearance prohibition symbol. If the combination can be an appearance prohibition symbol (step D339; Y), the process goes to step D340 and can become an appearance prohibition symbol If it is not a combination (step D339; N), the process proceeds to step D344. Here, the appearance prohibited pattern is a pattern whose appearance is prohibited as a loose-off eye. For example, in the case of a specification with a combination of 3, 5, 7 as a chance eye, such as “357”, “375”, “537”, etc., this chance eye does not appear so that it does not appear at the time of change. When it is necessary to perform control, this chance is an appearance prohibited symbol. Steps D339 to D343 are processing for this prohibition control. In the case of a model which is simply good for loose eyes, this prohibition control is unnecessary, and it is sufficient to process only the right column (step D344).
Specifically, for example, assuming that the combination of 3, 5, and 7 is a prohibited pattern, in step D339, the symbol number of the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx is different among 3, 5, and 7 If it is two, it will become an appearance prohibited symbol, and it proceeds to step D340.

At step D340, the cx value for which the combination of "left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx" is a prohibited pattern is set (stored) in the storage area of nocx (step D340). For example, when the left symbol lx is 3 and the right symbol rx is 5, if the middle symbol cx is temporarily 7, the combination of symbols in the special figure becomes "3, 7, 5" and the appearance prohibited symbol Therefore, 7 which is the value of the middle pattern cx is set to nocx.
Next, a symbol number randomly selected from eight symbol numbers 0 to 7 is set as a middle symbol cx (step D341), and the process proceeds to step D342.

In step D342, it is determined whether or not middle symbol cx n nocx, and if middle symbol cx n nocx (step D342; Y), the value of middle symbol cx is increased by one (step D343), and step D354 is performed. If it is not middle pattern cx し な い nocx (step D342; N), the process proceeds to step D354 without executing step D343.
According to the processing of these steps D341 to D343, the value of the middle symbol cx always becomes a value different from nocx, and eventually the combination of "left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx" is not necessarily a prohibited symbol It becomes.
In step D344, a symbol number randomly selected from eight symbol numbers 0 to 7 is set as a middle symbol cx (step D344), and the procedure proceeds to step D354.

When it proceeds to step D345, it determines whether or not reach-1 has been set as a symbol generation flag, and if it is set (step D345; Y), it proceeds to step D346 and if it is not set (step D345; N) ), Go to step D353. Note that the reach-1 symbol deviation generation flag is set at the above-described steps D304 and D306.
In step D346, a value randomly selected from ten values 0 to 9 is stored as tmprnd (step D346), and the process proceeds to step D347.
In step D347, it is determined whether the value of tmprnd is 0. If 0 (step D347; Y), the process proceeds to step D348. If not 0 (step D347; N), the process proceeds to step D350.

At step D348, a value randomly selected from four odd values of 1, 3, 5, and 7 is stored as the number of the left symbol lx (step D348), and the process proceeds to step D349. Note that the description in the diagram of step D348 is described using a programming language, "rand" indicates a function that generates a random number, "mod" indicates an operation for obtaining the remainder of division, rand () mod 4 "is a value randomly selected from 0, 1, 2, 3. At Step D348, since the value of “rand () mod 4” is doubled and one is added, one value is randomly selected from among 1, 3, 5, and 7 in the end.
At step D350, a value randomly selected from the five even numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 is stored as the number of the left symbol lx (step D350), and the process proceeds to step D351.
In step D 349 or step D 351, the value of the right symbol rx is made the same as the value of the left symbol lx (that is, the right symbol is made the same as the left symbol) in order to obtain reach. (Step D349 or Step D351) The process proceeds to Step D352.

  Here, according to the processing of steps D346 to D348 and step D350, it is possible to change the odd and even appearance ratio of the reach symbol. In this case, since it is only when tmprnd = 0 that the process proceeds from step D347 to step D348, the appearance ratio of odd symbols is 1/10, whereas the ratio of proceeding from step D347 to step D350 (that is, even symbols) The appearance ratio of) is 9/10. The reason for doing this is as follows. That is, since there is a re-lottery effect, the reach symbol at the time of the big hit is likely to be even. Therefore, in order not to reduce the big hit reliability of the odd reach, the occurrence rate of the odd reach is lowered. Of course, the ratio of the odd and even appearance rates may not be 1: 9. Moreover, although the aspect which calculates | requires a symbol by calculation like step D348 or D350 was illustrated in this example, you may select a symbol with a random number and a data table.

At step D352, the result of subtracting 1 from the value of the left symbol lx is set as the value of the middle symbol cx so that -1 is deviated (step D352), and then the procedure goes to step D354.
If it progresses to step D353, the symbol (a big hit symbol is also included) of the combination corresponding to the other symbol production flag will be produced | generated (step D353), and it will progress to step D354.
At step D354, the values of left symbol lx, middle symbol cx and right symbol rx set in the steps so far are respectively stored in the left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol of the stop symbol area (step D354) , To finish the stop symbol setting process.
Note that, as described above, steps D334 to D352 described above are processing in the case of the loose-eye component and in the case of reach-1 in the case of displacement. Actually, there are many other types of stop symbols, but in order to avoid complication here, the other types of processing are illustrated in step D353 collectively, and the details thereof are as follows. Illustration and explanation are omitted.
Also, in the case of jackpot design generation, for example, it is conceivable to determine only the left design and copy it to the middle / right design. In addition, in the case of being limited to "777", or a method of defining combinations of stop symbols on a plurality of tables regardless of calculation and selecting any one by random numbers.

  Also, in the above steps D332 and D333, only the off symbol of the fourth symbol is set, but in the case of a hit, it is the content to set the hit symbol of the fourth symbol corresponding to the symbol generation flag in step D353. There is. The symbol generation flag also has various setting contents such as "2R positive variation big hit symbol", "16R positive variation big hit symbol", ... For example, in the case of the "2R positive variation big hit symbol" flag, the left There are multiple combinations in the fourth pattern so that multiple patterns such as "357", "573", ... are made with the middle right design (left design, middle design, and right design as a decorative design), Which combination is to appear is determined by a random number. The combination of the colors of the 4th pattern corresponds one to one with the division of the hit. For example, the combination of "upper blue, lower blue" is not a definite change jackpot, "upper blue, lower yellow" is a definite change jackpot, etc. It corresponds. Although different for each model, in the specification of the gaming machine in advance, meaning is defined for the combination of colors of the fourth symbol. In this example, there is only one pattern of "upper white, lower white" in the case of the off, and the white itself is used only when it is out. Since only symbol numbers are set in steps D332, D333, etc. in FIG. 89, for example, symbol numbers 0 and 6 are set for both special figures 1 and 2, respectively. It is defined as a combination of "upper white, lower white". For example, the fourth symbol number is from 1 to 36 (for example, 1 to 18 when random variation hits, and 19 to 36 when non specific variation hits from 4 to 16), and even the same number has a special color combination. It may be different in FIGS. 1 and 2. For example, even though “upper blue, lower blue” in the special figure 1 is not a definite change, it may be a combination of the definite changes in the special view 2. Therefore, the tables of symbol numbers and color combinations are separate for Special Figures 1 and 2. Thus, there are a lot of color combinations of the 4th design, and the special symbol 1/2 of the 4th pattern is changing the meaning (definition) of the color combination in the form of the left middle right pattern or not It is for making discrimination difficult even with the combination of the colors of the fourth pattern, as in the case of making it unclear.

[Variation pattern classification process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern classification process (step D271) in the above-mentioned fluctuation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the fluctuation pattern classification process is started, first, in step D361, it is determined whether or not the data of MODE is a fluctuation system command. If it is a fluctuation system command (step D361; Y), the process proceeds to step D362, and the fluctuation system command is performed. If not (step D361; N), the process proceeds to step D368.
At step D362, it is determined whether ACT data is within the valid range. If the data is within the valid range (step D362; Y), the process proceeds to step D363. If not valid (step D362; N), the process proceeds to step D368.

In step D363, fluctuation pattern check data corresponding to data of MODE is obtained (step D363), and the process proceeds to step D364. The fluctuation pattern check data is set for each data of MODE of the fluctuation system command, and 0 is set as fluctuation pattern check data for data of MODE which is not used in the model.
In step D364, it is determined whether the variation pattern check data acquired in step D363 is 0. If it is 0 (step D364; Y), the process proceeds to step D368, and if it is not 0 (step D364; N), the process proceeds to step D365 move on.

At step D365, the major pattern pattern table corresponding to the data of MODE is set (set) (step D365), and the major pattern pattern corresponding to the data of ACT is based on the major pattern pattern table set at step D365. Data is acquired (step D366).
Next, the broad pattern data acquired in step D366 is returned (step D367), and the variation pattern classification process is ended.
In step D368, 0 is returned (step D368), and the variation pattern classification process is ended.

  Here, the broad classification pattern table is provided for each data of MODE. The large classification pattern table is a large classification pattern data arranged in a matrix corresponding to upper data and lower data of ACT, and a row is determined corresponding to upper data 0 to 4 of ACT. As the columns are determined corresponding to the lower data 0 to F of FIG. 5, the roughly classified pattern data is determined, and the size of the table is 5 rows × 16 columns. The breakdown example of the big pattern data is as follows. That is, 0: invalid data, 1: no reach fluctuation, 2: normal reach out, 3: female reach out 4: military general reach out, 5: plane complete military development out of reach, 6: group male reach out, 7: Chance eye system reach big hit (2R definite variation), 8: Normal reach big hit (2R definite variation), ... 16: Normal reach big hit (16R positive variation, 11R positive variation, 11R normal), 17: Female reach big hit (16R positive variation, 11R Positive variation, 11R normal), 18: General martial arts reach big hit (16R positive variation, 11R positive variation, 11R normal), 19: Face completed military general reach big hit (16R positive variation, 11R positive variation, 11R normal), 20: Group male reach big hit (16R Positive variation, 11R positive variation, 11R normal), and so on.

In this example, since the number of second-half fluctuation patterns (data of ACT) is in the range of 01h to 4Bh, the table of the above size (5 rows × 16 columns) is used, but this is an example. The configuration may be divided into more finely divided parts, or conversely, for example, the part where the pattern data has the same value may be divided roughly.
In addition, in order to prepare the advance notice distribution table etc. corresponding to the MODE and ACT data in the above-mentioned step D 272 etc., the major pattern data is to which classification the fluctuation pattern instructed by the MODE and ACT data belongs. It is data to show. That is, there is this major pattern data in order to check the system of the fluctuation pattern from the value of the command and set the table etc. of the corresponding notice distribution. This is because the rate of occurrence of prior notice changes depending on the type of reach and the like.
In addition, the large classification pattern table is a table for determining large classification pattern data as described above. Then, in the large classification pattern table, the large classification pattern data is 0 when there is no combination of data of MODE and ACT. Therefore, if there is no combination of MODE and ACT data, step D367 returns 0 similarly to step D368. In addition, when 0 is returned in this way, for example, it is treated the same as the normal removal. If treated in the same way as normal, even if there is an abnormality in the confirmed command, the special figure can be temporarily fluctuated, and there is an advantage that the player can be prevented from being anxious. . However, when 0 is returned, the variation start setting is performed as a configuration in which the variation effect setting process is terminated without executing step D272 and subsequent steps after executing step D271 in the variation effect setting process, for example, without performing deviation. There is also an aspect which is not performed. In this way, the special figure can be prevented from changing in the case of a command abnormality.

[Random number lottery process A]
Next, the details of the random number lottery process A (step D273) in the aforementioned variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The random number lottery process A is a process of selecting the distribution result in the advance notice distribution table 1 prepared for the group A of the distribution in the above-mentioned step D 272 by random number for each type.
When random number lottery processing A is started, step D371 to step D380 are repeatedly executed until final value na (for example, na = 9) is reached while incrementing notice type number A from initial value 1 by increment 1 and thereafter random number The lottery process A ends. That is, in step D371, immediately after the random number lottery process A is started, the notice type number A is set to 1, and the process proceeds to step D372. In step D380, if the notice type number A is less than na, the process returns to step D371, and if the notice type number A is na, the random number lottery process A is ended. Then, returning to step D371, the value of the notice type number A is increased by one, and the process proceeds to step D372. The value of the final price na differs depending on the model.

  The notice distribution table prepared in steps D272, D274, and D277 is, for example, a matrix-like data table (matrix), and the distribution values of the various distribution results are arranged horizontally in the same row (stage) for each type of distribution. It is arranged. The value of notice type number A corresponds to one of a plurality of rows in this table, for example, A = 1 is the first row from the top, A = 2 is the second row from the top,.・ ・ ・ And so on. That is, the notice type number is a parameter indicating the vertical arrangement position (the line number) of the specific distribution value in the notice distribution table. In addition, a distribution table address is provided as a parameter indicating the arrangement position (in which column) of the specific distribution value in one row of the preliminary distribution table. Moreover, since there are 1000 kinds of random number values 0 to 999 in this example, the distribution value is a number within the range of 0 to 999 which is set to be 1000 when all the distribution values in the same row are added. . The same is true for the other distribution tables and other notice type numbers B and C.

At step D372, a value randomly selected from 0 to 999 is stored as rdm (step D372), and the sorting number is set to 0 (initial value) (step D373).
Next, the value of the distribution table address corresponding to the notice type number A (the value indicating the first column of the row corresponding to the value of the notice type number A) is set (step D 374), and the process proceeds to step D 375. Here, as described above, the distribution table address designates the horizontal position (hereinafter referred to as “current address”) in the same row in the preliminary distribution table prepared in step D272 described above.

At step D375, the current allocation value at the current point is compared with the value of rdm. If the value of rdm is greater than the distribution value (step D375; Y), the process proceeds to step D376. If the value of rdm is less than the distribution value (step D 375; N), the process proceeds to step D 379.
At step D376, the value obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the value of rdm is set as a new value of rdm (step D376), and the current address of the distribution table is updated to the address of the next distribution value (distribution In the same row of the table, update is performed to shift the current address away from the top by one column (step D377).
Then, the distribution number is updated by 1 (step D378), and the process returns to step D375 to repeat the process.

  According to the process of steps D375 to D378, the process of updating the current address by subtracting the distribution value of the current address from the value of rdm is repeated until the value of rdm is less than the distribution value of the current address. . Then, when the value of rdm becomes less than the distribution value of the current address (that is, when the determination result in step D 375 becomes No), the number of updates of the current address (that is, the value of distribution number) The value of the notice type number A indicates one specific position (that is, one distribution result) in the notice distribution table, whereby the distribution result is selected based on the random number.

In step D379, a distribution number corresponding to the number of times the current address is updated (that is, the number of times step D376, D377, etc. is repeatedly executed) is used as a notice data value, and this notice data value is used as the corresponding result area. Save in the area (step D379), and then proceed to step D380.
In step D380, as described above, if the notice type number A is less than na, the process returns to step D371, and if the notice type number A is na, the random number lottery process A is ended.
The effect distribution result area is an area in the RAM in the CPU 311 that saves the effect distribution result such as the above-mentioned notice data value.

[Random number lottery process B]
Next, the random number lottery process B (step D <b> 275) in the variation effect setting process described above will be described. The random number lottery process B is a process of selecting the distribution result in the advance notice distribution table 2 prepared for the group B of the distribution in the above-described step D 274 using a random number for each type.
The details of the random number lottery process B are the same as the above-described random number lottery process A, and therefore the illustration and the detailed description will be omitted.

[Random number lottery process C]
Next, the random number lottery process C (step D278) in the above-described fluctuation effect setting process will be described. The random number lottery process C is a process of selecting the distribution result in the advance notice distribution table 3 prepared for the group C of the distribution in the above-mentioned step D 277 using a random number for each type.
The details of the random number lottery process C are the same as the above-described random number lottery process A, and thus the illustration and the detailed description will be omitted.

In the step D379 in the random number lottery process A and in the steps of the same processing contents in the random number lottery processes B and C, the effect content (the value of the distribution number determined from the number of updates of the current address) A variety of information (such as the number of SU notices) corresponding to the effect pattern is stored in a predetermined storage area (for example, an SU notice number area, an SU1 cut-in area, an SU2 cut-in area, an SU3 cut-in area) The replacement determination area, replacement target SU determination area, serif SU area, serif SU2 pattern area, serif SU3 pattern area, reach character area) are stored.
According to the random number lottery process A, B, C described above, the sorting result is selected in advance for all the notice type number values in each of all the groups A, B, C, and the effect contents according to the sorting result Various pieces of information for designating are stored in advance in predetermined storage areas.

  Further, among the three random number lottery processes, the random number lottery process A (the advance notice distribution table 1) is mainly for the advance notice in the early stage of the fluctuation (a notice appearing immediately after the start of fluctuation, a pattern of movement of a symbol at the start of fluctuation, etc.) It is to distribute. Also, random number lottery processing B (notice distribution table 2) mainly distributes notices to be performed until reach start, and operation patterns from slow down to temporary stop (number of slips and number of symbol feeds) of symbols. is there. Further, the random number lottery process C (the advance notice distribution table 3) is mainly to select a notice that appears during the reach.

[Notice effect setting process 1]
Next, the details of the notice effect setting process 1 (step D280) in the variation effect setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. Although the case of performing the setting of the step-up notice according to the random number lottery result (the result of the random number lottery process A, B and C described above) is illustrated as the advance notice effect setting process 1, naturally the notice effect for each model is The content of is different. The step-up notice is to give a big hit notice in stages while changing the notice content and the reliability of the notice. In the drawings and the specification of the present application, "SU" means step-up of this step-up notice.
When the preview effect setting process 1 is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the SU notification number area of the effect distribution result area (step D381).
Next, scenario layer number 4 is prepared (step D382), and the address of the SU notice scenario table corresponding to the SU notice number loaded in step D381 is prepared (step D383), and prepared in the immediately preceding steps D382 and D383. The above-described scenario data setting process (step D384) is executed based on the obtained data.

Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU1 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step D385), military command data corresponding to the SU1 cut-in number loaded in step D385 is obtained, and a motion index area (motion index is stored Storage area) in the SU1 cut-in area (step D386).
Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU2 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step D 387), military command data corresponding to the SU 2 cut-in number loaded in step D 387 is acquired, and the SU2 cut-in area of the motion index area is Save (step D388).

Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU3 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step D389), and military command data corresponding to the SU3 cut-in number loaded in step D389 is acquired, and the SU3 cut-in area of the motion index area is Save (step D390), and proceed to step D391.
In the above steps D385 to D390, data of a motion table for performing appearance of the assigned military commander character is temporarily stored. In addition, the data stored here is not limited to use, and thereafter, depending on the result of determination in cut-in character replacement determination processing 1 to 3 (steps D395 to D397) described later, for example, it is replaced by data of female characters Is done. Also, in this case, if the result is that the number of SUs is not satisfied (for example, SU1 is selected), the data of the character with the lowest reliability is saved in the upper SU area It is uncontrollable.

In step D391, it is determined whether the SU notice count loaded in step D381 is 0. If it is not 0 (step D391; N), the process proceeds to step D392. If it is 0 (step D391; Y) The preview effect setting process 1 ends.
At step D392, it is determined at step D381 whether the number of SU announcements loaded is 1 or not. If it is not 1 (step D392; N), the process proceeds to step D393, and if it is 1 (step D392; Y) Go to step D395.
At step D393, it is determined at step D381 whether the number of SU notices loaded is 2 or not. If it is not 2 (step D393; N), the process proceeds to step D394, and if it is 2 (step D393; Y) Go to step D396.
In step D394, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is 3 and if it is not 3 (step D394; N), the notice effect setting process 1 is ended, and if 3 (step D394; Y). Go to step D397).
In step D395, cut-in character replacement determination processing 1 (step D395) is executed, and the notice effect setting processing 1 is then ended.
In step D396, a cut-in character replacement determination process 2 (step D396) is executed, and the notice effect setting process 1 is ended thereafter.
In step D397, cut-in character replacement determination processing 3 (step D397) is executed, and then the notification effect setting processing 1 is ended.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment processing 1]
Next, the details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 (step D395) in the above-described preliminary announcement effect setting process 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this process is executed when the number of SU notices is 1, but when the number of SU notices is 1, only the first character appears in the step-up notice, so in this process, only replacement is all replacement. Absent.
When the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area (step D401), and the process proceeds to step D402.
At step D402, it is determined whether all replacements are replacements based on the distribution result loaded at step D401. If all replacements are made (step D402; Y), the procedure proceeds to step D403, and if not all replacements (step D402) N), and the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 ends.
In step D403, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 is replaced based on the distribution result loaded in step D401 (step D403), and the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 is ended.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment processing 2]
Next, the details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 (step D396) in the above-described preliminary announcement effect setting process 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this process is executed when the number of SU notices is 2, but when the number of SU notices is 2, there are up to two characters appearing in the step-up notice. There are only three patterns: replacement (replacement by the first person), partial replacement (replacement by the second person), and all replacement (replacement by both the first person and the second person).
When the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area (step D405), and the process proceeds to step D406.
In step D406, it is determined based on the distribution result loaded in step D405 whether replacement is not performed or not. If replacement is not performed (step D406; Y), cut-in character replacement determination processing 2 is ended and replacement is not performed. If not (step D406; N), the process proceeds to step D407.

At step D407, it is determined whether the replacement is partial replacement based on the distribution result loaded at step D405, and if partial replacement (step D407; Y), from the replacement target SU determination region of the effect distribution result region The distribution result is loaded (step D408), and the process proceeds to step D409. If partial replacement is not performed (step D407; N), the process proceeds to step D413.
In step D409, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU1 (the first character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D408. If it is SU1 (step D409; Y), the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 Based on the sorting result, replacement is performed (step D411), and the cut-in character replacement determination processing 2 ends. If it is not SU1 (step D409; N), the process proceeds to step D410.

In step D410, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU2 (the second character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D408. If it is SU2 (step D410; Y), the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU2 Based on the distribution result (Step D412), the cut-in character replacement determination processing 2 is ended. If it is not SU2 (Step D410; N), the step D412 is not executed and the cut-in character replacement determination processing 2 is ended. Do.
At step D413, it is determined whether all replacements are replacements based on the distribution result loaded at step D405. If all replacements are made (step D413; Y), the procedure proceeds to step D414, and if not all replacements (step D413) N), and the cut-in character replacement determination processing 2 ends.
At step D414, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 is replaced based on the distribution result loaded at step D405 (step D414), and the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU2 is replaced similarly (step D415) And cut-in character replacement determination processing 2 ends.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment processing 3]
Next, the details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 (step D397) in the above-described preliminary announcement effect setting process 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 95 and FIG. This process is executed when the number of SU notices is 3, but when the number of SU notices is 3, since the characters appearing in the step-up notice are only three people, various processing results will be described later. There is a substitution pattern, and in this example, there are both regular substitution and special substitution (for the story to be described later and for the premium).
When the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area (step D421), and the process proceeds to step D422.
In step D422, it is determined based on the distribution result loaded in step D421 whether replacement is not performed or not, and if replacement is not performed (step D422; Y), cut-in character replacement determination processing 3 is ended and replacement is not performed. If not (step D422; N), the process proceeds to step D423.

At step D423, it is determined whether the replacement is partial replacement based on the distribution result loaded at step D421, and if partial replacement (step D423; Y), from the replacement target SU determination region of the effect distribution result region The distribution result is loaded (step D424), and the process proceeds to step D425. If partial replacement is not performed (step D423; N), the process proceeds to step D430.
In step D425, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU1 (first character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424. If it is SU1 (step D425; Y), the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 Based on the sorting result, replacement is performed (step D433), and the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is ended. If it is not SU1 (step D425; N), the process proceeds to step D426.

At step D426, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU2 (the second character) based on the distribution result loaded at step D424. If it is SU2 (step D426; Y), the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU2 Based on the sorting result, replacement is performed (step D434), and the cut-in character replacement determination processing 3 is ended. If it is not SU2 (step D426; N), the process proceeds to step D427.
At step D427, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU3 (third character) based on the distribution result loaded at step D424. If it is SU3 (step D427; Y), the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU3 Based on the sorting result, replacement is performed (step D435), and the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is ended. If it is not SU3 (step D427; N), the process proceeds to step D428.

In step D428, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU1 and SU2 (first and second characters) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424, and if it is SU1 and SU2 (step D428; Y), cut-in SU1 The index of the motion control table for and for the cut-in SU2 is replaced based on the distribution result (steps D436 and D437), the cut-in character replacement determination processing 3 is ended, and it is not SU1 and SU2 (step D428; N ), Go to step D429.
In step D429, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU2 and SU3 (second and third characters) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424, and if it is SU2 and SU3 (step D429; Y), cut-in SU2 The index of the motion control table for and for the cut-in SU3 is replaced based on the distribution result (steps D438 and D439), the cut-in character replacement determination processing 3 is ended, and it is not SU2 and SU3 (step D429; N) ), And the cut-in character replacement determination processing 3 ends.

At step D430, it is determined based on the distribution result loaded at step D421 whether the replacement object is a normal all replacement, and if it is a normal all replacement (step D430; Y), for cut in SU1 and for cut in SU2. The index of the motion control table for the cut-in SU3 is replaced based on the distribution result (steps D440 to D442), and the cut-in character replacement determination processing 3 is ended and it is not normal replacement (step D430; N) Proceed to step D431.
At step D431, it is determined based on the distribution result loaded at step D421 whether the replacement object is for a story, and if it is for a story (step D431; Y), for cut-in SU1, for cut-in SU2, and for cut-in SU3. The index of the motion control table is replaced based on the distribution result (steps D443 to D445), and the cut-in character replacement determination processing 3 is ended. If it is not for a story (step D431; N), the process proceeds to step D432.

  In step D432, it is determined based on the distribution result loaded in step D421 whether the replacement target is for premium use, and if it is for premium use (step D432; Y), for cut in SU1, for cut in SU2, and for cut in SU3. The index of the motion control table is replaced based on the distribution result (steps D446 to D448), and the cut-in character replacement determination processing 3 is ended, and if it is not for premium (step D432; N), the cut-in character replacement determination End processing 3.

[PB preview scenario data setting process]
Next, the details of the PB preliminary announcement scenario data setting process (step D 288) in the above-described fluctuation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the PB preliminary notification scenario data setting process is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the dialogue SU area of the effect distribution result area (step D451), and the process proceeds to step D452.
At step D452, it is determined whether the dialog SU is a SU2 system (only one appearing character is SU2 system) based on the distribution result loaded at step D451, and if it is a SU2 system (step D452; Y), the process proceeds to step D453. If it is not SU2 system (step D452; N), that is, if the appearing character is two SU3 systems, it proceeds to step D456.

At step D453, the distribution result is loaded from the serif SU2 pattern area of the effect distribution result area (step D453), and a serif SU2 scenario address table (list table of the serif SU2 scenario table) is set (step D454).
Next, based on the distribution result loaded in step D453, the address of the scenario table corresponding to the serif SU2 pattern of the distribution result is obtained from the table set in step D454 and prepared (step D455), and the process proceeds to step D459. .

At step D456, the distribution result is loaded from the serif SU3 pattern area of the effect distribution result area (step D456), and a serif SU3 scenario address table (list table of the serif SU3 scenario table) is set (step D457).
Next, based on the distribution result loaded in step D456, the address of the scenario table corresponding to the serif SU3 pattern of the distribution result is obtained from the table set in step D457 and prepared (step D458), and the process proceeds to step D459. .

In step D459, scenario layer No. 5 is prepared (step D459), and the above-described scenario data setting process (step D460) is performed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding step D459 and the immediately preceding step D455 or D458. Is executed, and then the PB preliminary announcement scenario data setting process is ended.
According to the PB preview scenario data setting process described above, a PB preview effect such as the appearance of a special character by the operation of the PB (push button) or the change of the character or character after the PB is operated Is possible.

[Inter-sub transmission start process]
Next, the details of the inter-sub transmission start process (step D24) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. Inter-sub transmission is transmission in inter-sub communication. The inter-sub communication is communication (in this example, wireless communication) performed between sub-boards (in this example, effect control devices) of pachinko gaming machines different in the game arcade.
When the inter-sub transmission start process is started, first, at step D461, whether there is an inter-sub transmission request (that is, the inter-sub transmission request flag set at step D190 described above or step D480 described later) is set If there is an inter-sub transmission request (step D461; Y), that is, if the inter-sub transmission request flag is set, the process proceeds to step D462, and if there is no inter-sub transmission request (step D461; N) That is, if the inter-sub transmission request flag is not set, the inter-sub transmission start process is ended.
In step D462, it is determined whether the value of the inter-sub-transmission start waiting timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0 (step D462; Y), the process proceeds to step D466. If less than 0 (step D462; N) To proceed to step D463.

In step D463, the inter-sub transmission request flag is cleared (not set) (step D463), the inter-sub transmission permission flag is set (step D464), and the inter-sub transmission interrupt is performed. Then, the inter-sub transmission start process is ended (step D465). The inter-sub transmission interrupt is permitted in step D465 if data to be transmitted in sub-sub communication is generated, and is inhibited in a not-shown routine (inter-sub transmission interrupt processing) if there is no data to be transmitted.
In step D466, the inter-sub-transmission start waiting timer is updated (that is, the value of the timer is decreased by a fixed value) (step D466), and the inter-sub transmission start process is ended. The inter-sub-transmission start waiting timer is a timer which has an initial value set in step D479 described later and is cleared (a value is set to 0) in step D491 described later.

[Inter-sub receive task processing]
Next, the details of the inter-sub reception task process (step D25) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the inter-sub receive task processing is started, first, at step D 471, there is an inter-sub receive task request (that is, there is received data of inter-sub communication (received data of inter-sub command). If the inter-sub receive task request flag set in the receive interrupt processing is set) is judged (step D471; Y), that is, if the inter-sub receive task request flag is set In step D472, if there is no inter-sub reception task request (step D471; N), that is, if the inter-sub reception task request flag is not set, the inter-sub reception task processing ends.

At step D472, the data of SB_MODE of the received inter-sub command (the value copied from the sb_mode area of the inter-sub communication data buffer to the SB_MODE area in the inter-sub receive interrupt processing not shown) is loaded from the SB_MODE area (step D 472), Go to step D 473.
At step D 473, it is determined whether the data of SB_MODE loaded at step D 472 indicates terminal ID notification. If it does not indicate terminal ID notification (step D 473; N), the procedure proceeds to step D 474 to indicate terminal ID notification. If it indicates (step D473; Y), the process proceeds to step D482.

At step D 482, the inter-sub command transmission source ID is the received terminal ID (the value copied from the transmission source ID area of the inter-sub communication data buffer to the inter-sub command transmission source ID area in the inter-sub reception interrupt process not shown). Load from the area (step D482), set the terminal presence / absence information of the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482 to "Yes" (step D483), and correspond to the terminal ID loaded in step D482. An initial value is set in the terminal validity period timer of the terminal information area (step D484). Note that by providing a terminal validity period timer, a time limit is provided for recognizing that the gaming machine of the received terminal ID is "present". That is, it is necessary to periodically check the existence of each other between gaming machines performing inter-sub communication, and a process (not shown, for example, until the terminal validity period timer times up) based on the terminal validity period timer. If the same terminal ID notification is not received again, this confirmation is periodically performed by the process of updating the terminal presence / absence information corresponding to the terminal ID to "none". In this way, there are the following advantages. That is, when a game machine is powered off or the wireless module suddenly breaks down, etc. If there is no communication between the game machines that have established communication with each other once for some reason, the other party exists. It is useless to continue to communicate on the premise that there is a risk that the effect of the inter-sub effects will be reduced. For example, as an inter-sub effect, an instruction is sent from the game machine on the left end of the island to the adjacent game machine sequentially through inter-sub communication, and an image of a specific character or the like (character) sequentially from the game machine on the left end of the island When performing a continuous effect (a kind of cooperation effect) such as displaying on the display device 41 so as to flow to the right, there is a risk that the continuous effect may be interrupted and interrupted at the gaming machine where the communication is no longer established. is there. However, if the configuration is such that the terminal presence information is updated periodically by performing the above confirmation, it is possible to make a request for sub-sub effects for the gaming machine whose presence becomes "none", for example. It is possible to reliably perform the inter-sub-effects efficiently, such as performing the interlocking effect by flying the platform whose power is turned off.
However, since sub-sub effects do not affect the outcome of the game, even if there is a negative effect as described above (eg, even if there is a negative effect that the effect will not be performed as a result of making a request to the other party who is not present) The idea that there is no problem is also established. In the case of the specification according to such a concept, the terminal valid period timer is not necessary.

Next, in the game state of the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482, data of the received game state (Inter-sub command game from the game state area of the inter-sub communication data buffer in the inter-sub receive interrupt process not shown) The copied value is stored in the state area (step D485), and the process proceeds to step D481.
At step D474, it is determined at step D472 whether the loaded data in SB_MODE indicates an ack response. If it does not indicate an ack response (step D474; N), the process proceeds to step D476 to indicate an ack response. If it is (step D474; Y), the ack reception flag is set (step D486), and the process proceeds to step D481.

At step D476, it is determined whether the data of SB_MODE loaded at step D472 is a rendering command, and if it is not a rendering command (step D476; N), the processing proceeds to step D481. If it is a rendering command (step D476) To Y), proceed to step D477.
At step D477, it is determined whether inter-sub data transmission is in progress. If inter-sub data transmission is in progress (step D477; Y), the process proceeds to step D481. If inter-sub data transmission is not in progress (step D477; N), step Go to D478. The inter-sub data transmission is data transmission (for example, transmission of a command) in inter-sub communication. Further, in the present application, a command transmitted and received in inter-sub communication is referred to as an inter-sub command.

The process of steps D 478 to D 480 is a process for performing rendering according to the received inter-sub command (in particular, rendering system command).
When proceeding to step D478, an inter-sub command of various effects corresponding to the content of the received inter-sub command, or a parameter is set (step D478), and the inter-sub command set in step D478 is used as a sub of another gaming machine. In order to transmit to the substrate, an inter-sub-transmission start waiting timer is set (step D479), an inter-sub transmission request flag is set (step D480), and the process proceeds to step D480a.

Depending on the contents of the effect, there may be a case where the inter-sub command does not occur. In such a case, in step D478, the setting of the inter-sub command is not performed, and the processing of steps D479 and D480 for transmitting the inter-sub command is not performed either, and the process proceeds to step D480a.
In step D480a, it is determined whether the data in SB_MODE loaded in step D472 is a command requiring an ack response. If the command does not require an ack response (step D480a; N), the procedure proceeds to step D481, and an ack response is received. If it is a necessary command (step D480a; Y), the process proceeds to step D488.

Steps D488 to D491 are processing for responding to the ack request and returning an ack response.
In step D488, the received transmission source ID is prepared as a transmission destination ID command (step D488), and data of SB_MODE and SB_ACT in an ack response are prepared (step D489). Note that SB_MODE and SB_ACT are data constituting an inter-sub command.
Next, the inter-sub transmission data editing process (step D490) is executed to clear the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer (set the timer value to 0) (step D491), and the process goes to step D481.

In step D481, the inter-sub reception task request flag is cleared (step D481), and then the inter-sub reception task process is ended.
Since the step D477 is provided, when the inter-sub data is being transmitted, the operation requested by the inter-sub command (rendering system command) is not performed. This is because the command between subs does not necessarily correspond to the command from the main board, and the fact that it is in the process of sending means that it is making a request to another machine or is in the process of returning ack. It is from the thought that it is not necessary to meet the demand from the platform of In addition, there is a possibility that contradiction appears in the presentation if all requirements are met, but this configuration has an advantage of eliminating the possibility of such contradiction. However, this idea is a basic idea, and when there is an effect that it is desired to perform in any state, there may be a mode of performing the requested operation even during transmission.

[Inter-sub transmission data editing process]
Next, details of the inter-sub transmission data editing process (step D 490) in the above-described inter-sub reception task process and the inter-sub transmission data editing process (step D 187) of the above-described one-shot command processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the inter-sub transmission data editing process is started, first, data (for example, 02H) of the packet start code (STX) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 (step D501). Here, the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is part of the transmission buffer area (sub-sub transmission buffer area) for inter-sub communication, and the storage area at the address 0 position of this inter-sub transmission buffer area is inter-sub transmission Buffer 0 (hereinafter, the same applies to the other addresses 1, 2, 3,... 11).

Next, data of the inter-sub data transmission number (SIZE) (for example, data indicating 12 bytes) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 1 (step D502), and its own terminal ID (data of transmission source ID (SID)) The inter-sub transmission buffer 2 is set to a terminal ID assigned to the effect control device 300 or the wireless module of the effect control device 300 or a group ID (ID for specifying a group of pachinko machines to which the pachinko machine belongs) Then, the data (terminal ID and group ID) of the transmission destination ID (DID) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 3 (step D504). In the data of the transmission source ID (SID) and the transmission destination ID (DID), the upper bits of one byte are the group ID and the lower bits are the terminal ID.
Subsequently, data of the inter-sub manufacturer code (MAKER) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 4 (step D505), and data of the year code (YEAR) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 5 (step D506).

Next, the data of the inter-sub model code (TYPE) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 6 (step D507), and the data of the inter-sub command MODE (SB_MODE) (for example, the one prepared in step D489 etc. Are set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 7 (step D508).
Next, the data of the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT) (for example, the one prepared in the above-mentioned step D 489 etc.) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 8 (step D 509), and its own game state (STS) Then, data on the game state of the pachinko gaming machine (for example, data indicating the fifth round of the big hit, etc.) is set in the inter-sub-transmission buffer 9 (step D510).

Next, the checksum of the setting data from the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 to the inter-sub transmission buffer 9 (that is, the data from STX to STS) is calculated (step D511). Although the calculation method of the checksum is not particularly limited, for example, simple addition may be performed with a 1-byte size.
Next, the data of the operation result (SUM) of the checksum calculated in step D511 is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 10 (step D512), and the data (for example, 03H) of the packet end code (ETX) is transmitted between the sub It sets to the buffer 11 (step D513).
Next, the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is set as data of the inter-sub transmission pointer (a parameter specifying an address of the inter-sub transmission buffer area) (step D514), and the inter-sub transmission data editing process is ended. This inter-sub transmission pointer is used in inter-sub transmission interrupt processing (not shown) (a routine for sequentially writing data in the inter-sub transmission buffer area to the serial transmission buffer of the CPU for inter-sub transmission) .

[Inter-sub ack response task processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub ack response task process (step D26) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the inter-sub ack response task processing is started, first, in step D521, it is determined whether the value of the ack waiting timer is 0 or not, and when 0 (step D521; Y), the inter-sub ack response task processing is ended. If it is not 0 (step D521; N), the ack waiting timer is updated (value is reduced by a specified value) (step D522), and the process proceeds to step D523. The ack waiting timer is set to the initial value in step D188 described above.

In step D523, it is determined whether an ack response has been received (ie, whether an ack reception flag has been set). If it has been received (step D523; Y), the process proceeds to step D524. If not received (step D523; N), that is, if the ack reception flag is not set, the inter-sub ack response task processing ends. The ack reception flag is set in step D486 described above.
In step D524, the ack reception flag is cleared (step D524), and the ack waiting timer is cleared (step D525).
Next, since the ack response has been received, various parameters for corresponding to the effect waiting for this ack response are set (step D526), and the inter-sub ack response task processing is ended.

[Sub-sub presentation effect setting process]
Next, details of the inter-sub presentation effect setting process (step D27) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the inter-subs effect setting process is started, first, at step D531, it is determined whether or not there is an inter-sub effect request (that is, whether or not the inter-sub effect request flag is set). In the case (step D531; Y), the process proceeds to step D532, and in the case of no sub-sub presentation request (in a state where the sub-sub presentation request flag is cleared) (step D531; N), the sub-sub presentation setting process is ended. Do. The inter-sub presentation effect request flag is set in the above-described Step D478.

At step D532, it is determined whether the value of the sub-intermediate effect start wait timer is 0 or not. If it is 0 (step D532; Y), the process proceeds to step D533. If not 0 (step D532; N), A process of updating the inter-subs effect start waiting timer (reducing the value by a specified value) is performed (step D538), and the inter-subs effect setting process is ended. The inter-sub presentation effect start waiting timer is a timer that is set in step D189 described above.
At step D533, data of SB_MODE and SB_ACT (hereinafter, the inter-sub command includes SB_MODE and SB_ACT) of the received inter-sub command is loaded (step D533), and the process proceeds to step D534.
In step D534, it is determined whether the loaded data is a sub-interlocking notification system command. If it is a sub-interlinking notification system command (step D534; Y), the process proceeds to step D539, and the sub-interlinking notification system command If not (step D534; N), the process proceeds to step D535. Note that the inter-subset interlocking notice system command is a command for cooperative rendering to make the notice presentation interlock in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines performing inter-subs communication. For example, there are effects such that images of the same character are sequentially displayed on each gaming machine so that images of the same character move laterally in the island, and there are synchronous effects in which the same effects are simultaneously performed in synchronization.

  In step D539, a rendering operation table corresponding to the rendering designated by the data of SB_MODE and SB_ACT of the inter-sub command loaded in step D533 is set (step D539), and the flow proceeds to step D537. Setting the rendering operation table in step D539 means setting scenario data for executing the rendering specified by the data of the inter-sub command.

  At step D535, it is determined whether the data of the inter-sub command loaded at step D533 is a customer wait timing adjustment command, and if it is a customer wait timing adjustment command (step D535; Y), the procedure goes to step D540 to wait for a customer If it is not a timing adjustment command (step D535; N), the process proceeds to step D536. Note that the customer wait timing adjustment command is a command for causing a plurality of pachinko gaming machines performing inter-sub communication to match the timing of the customer wait demonstration display. In this case, the customer wait demonstration is synchronized from the beginning Command to execute.

At step D536, if the data of the inter-sub command loaded at step D533 is a normal value, parameters of various effects corresponding to the data are set (step D536), and then the process proceeds to step D537.
At step D540, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed (ie, whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed), and if the customer waiting demonstration effect is not being performed (step D540; N), Since the customer waiting timing adjustment should not be performed, the process proceeds to step D537, and if the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed (step D540; Y), the process proceeds to step D541 to perform the customer waiting timing adjustment.
In step D 541, the scenario table for the customer waiting demonstration of the pachinko gaming machine (that is, the own machine) that has received the inter-sub command is reset so that the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed from the beginning. Then, the machine status is set as customer waiting A (step D542), and the process proceeds to step D537.

  According to the step D541, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started from the beginning of the symbol display (the customer waiting A). Thus, a customer waiting demonstration effect is produced by the transmission source pachinko gaming machine that has transmitted the customer waiting timing adjustment command determined in step D535 and the own machine and other pachinko gaming machines that have received this customer waiting timing adjustment command. It starts synchronously from the beginning of the symbol display (waiting for customer A). Note that the customer waiting demonstration effect started in this way is controlled by the reset customer waiting demonstration scenario table.

In step D537, the sub-interval effect request flag is cleared (step D537), and the sub-interval effect setting process is ended.
Note that, in this example, the processing of the effect of making the advance notice rendering interlocked and the processing of the effect of matching the timing of the customer waiting demonstration effect are mentioned as specific examples of the processing for the sub-sub effect. However, the content of the inter-sub effect is not limited to such an aspect, and in place of or in addition to the aspect of the present example, the sub-inter-effect of other contents may be performed.
Further, in the present example, in order to avoid complication, the setting process of the sub-sub effects of the other types is illustrated in a collective manner in step D536, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

[Scenario setting process]
Next, the details of the scenario setting process (step D28) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the scenario setting process is started, first, an address area of a scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared (step D551), and a scenario analysis process (step D551) is performed. Step D552) is performed. Here, “prepare the address area” means to prepare the address of the address area itself in order to read data set in the address area in a later process.

Then, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared (step D553), and a scenario analysis process (step D554) is executed based on this preparation.
Then, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared (step D555), and a scenario analysis process (step D556) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared (step D557), and a scenario analysis process (step D558) is executed based on this preparation.
Then, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared (step D559), and a scenario analysis process (step D560) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared (step D561), and a scenario analysis process (step D562) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared (step D563), and a scenario analysis process (step D564) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 7 (scenario layer number 7) is prepared (step D565), and scenario analysis processing (step D566) is executed based on this preparation to perform scenario setting processing. Finish.

  In the case of this example, there are eight scenario layers as described above, and scenario layer numbers are from 0 to 7. And of these eight scenario layers, scenario layer 0 is basically for background, scenario layer 1 is for left pattern, scenario layer 2 is for right pattern, and scenario layer 3 is for middle pattern The scenario layer 4 is for notice 1, the scenario layer 5 is for notice 2, the scenario layer 6 is for holding, and the scenario layer 7 is for the fourth symbol.

  However, it is not limited to this aspect. For example, although the scenario layer has eight flowcharts in this example, the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the scenario layer used for background and advance notices is increased or decreased according to the model specification, and this example is described as few as possible. Moreover, the control object of each scenario layer is not limited to the aspect of this example, and various allocations may be possible. For example, scenario layer 0 is for background, scenario layer 1 is for cut-in notice, scenario layer 2 is for left pattern, scenario layer 3 is for right pattern, and scenario layer 4 is for middle pattern The scenario layer 5 may be for holding, the scenario layer 6 may be for other notices, and the scenario layer 7 may be for the fourth symbol.

  Also, as described above, the address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer, and when there is one to be controlled, the corresponding scenario management area X (one of X = 0 to 7) If the address of the scenario management area is stored in the address area and there is nothing to control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL (see steps D243 and D247 described above). . For example, since the display of the hold is not performed during the movie waiting for the customer, the address (the address of the scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (the address area of the scenario management area 0). In the (address area of scenario management area 6), NULL is set.

[Scenario analysis processing]
Next, the details of the scenario analysis process (step D552 and the like) in the above-described scenario setting process will be described with reference to FIGS.
When the scenario analysis process is started, first, the value of brk (data used for repeating the process to be described later) is set to 0 (step D571), and is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area X The data being processed (address of scenario management area X or NULL) is loaded (step D572), and the process goes to step D573. Here, the "address area of the scenario management area X being prepared" means, for example, the address area prepared in step D551 immediately before step D552 when the process is executed in step D552 described above. If the present process is executed in step D554 described above, the address area prepared in step D553 immediately before that (address area of scenario management area 1), and so on. The case is similarly prepared in the previous step.

In step D573, it is determined whether the data of the address loaded in step D572 is NULL, and if it is NULL (step D573; Y), the control is unnecessary, so the scenario analysis processing is ended and it is not NULL (step D573; N) Proceed to step D574.
In step D574, the value of the scenario timer in the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572 is read, and it is determined whether the value of this scenario timer is smaller than 0. If smaller than 0 (step D574; Y) Since the process is abnormal, the scenario analysis process is ended, and if it is 0 or more (step D574; N), the process proceeds to step D575. Note that although the value of the scenario timer is first set to 0 in the above-described step D244 each time scenario control data is set, 0 is the lower limit, so if it is smaller than 0, it is determined as abnormal.
In step D575, if the value of the scenario timer is not 0, the value of the scenario timer is updated by -1 (step D575), and the process proceeds to step D576.
In step D576, it is determined whether the value of the scenario timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0 (step D576; Y), the scenario analysis process is terminated because the time has not expired yet. If there is (step D576; N), the process proceeds to step D577.

  According to these steps D574 to D576, timer management for the wait is performed. That is, the target scenario table (in the target scenario management area) for the time corresponding to the value of the scenario timer set in the scenario timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572). The operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table (address table set in the scenario data table area) is realized. Here, "the operation of delaying the progress of control of the scenario table" means that the progress of the scenario table is weighted (waiting there without going to the next line of the scenario table. It is continued to perform at that time). . For example, in FIG. 135, on the 18th line (// wait), since the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is “3600”, the time corresponding to 3600 frames (3600 × (1/30 seconds) = 120 seconds) Stay on this line, advance to the next line after this time elapsed, and on line 24 (// wait), set a constant wait code and the wait time value is "900", so on 900 frames Stays on this line for a corresponding time (900 × (1/30 seconds) = 30 seconds) and proceeds to the next line after this time has elapsed, but these operations correspond to “operations to delay the progress of control of the scenario table” . In the scenario table, between the wait time value and the line where the code (constant wait code etc. (including PB wait code) is set) between the wait time value and the wait time value and the line where the constant wait code etc. is next set The opcodes of the lines in) are all executed simultaneously. Then, when the value of the scenario timer becomes 0 or less due to the update of step D575, it is determined that the scenario timer has timed up, so that the control process of the target scenario table is advanced through step D576 and step D577. It is configured to go to However, control processing of the target scenario table (step D584 and subsequent steps) is executed after processing of timer management for PB valid time described later.

That is, in step D577, the value of the target PB timer (the value of the PB timer area in the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572) is read, and it is determined whether the value of this PB timer is greater than 0. If it is larger than 0 (step D577; Y), the process proceeds to step D578 because time is not up, and if time is less than 0 (step D577; N), the process proceeds to step D583 because time is up.
In step D578, it is determined whether the PB operation flag is set. If the PB operation flag is set (step D578; Y), the process proceeds to step D579, and the PB operation flag is not set (step D579). In step D578; N), the value of the target PB timer is updated by -1 (step D582), and the process proceeds to step D583. Here, the PB operation flag is a flag that is set when an operation of the PB (push button) is detected in the effect button input process performed in step D21 in the main process described above.

At step D579, the value at this point in time of the target PB timer (that is, the remaining time of the PB effective time at the time when the PB is operated) is stored as the PB presentation addition time (step D579). The value of the PB timer is set to 0 (step D580).
Next, a flag is set in the PB detection flag area of the target scenario management area (that is, data indicating that the PB detection flag is set is set) (step D581), and the process proceeds to step D583. In these steps D579 to D581, since the PB is operated, the remaining time of the PB timer is stored as the PB rendering addition time (for the step D696 described later), the PB timer is reset to 0, and the PB is operated. The PB detection flag indicating that has been set is set in the scenario management area for scenario control.
In step D583, it is determined whether the value of the target PB timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0 (step D583; Y), no PB operation is detected and no time-up has occurred. When the process is completed and it is 0 or less (step D573; N), since the PB operation is performed or time is up, the process proceeds to step D584.

According to the steps D577 to D583, the timer management for the PB valid time is performed. That is, when the value of PB timer larger than 0 is set in the PB timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572), the value corresponds to the value of this PB timer. The operation of delaying the progress of control of the target scenario table (the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area) and the PB effective time can be provided only for the predetermined time. Here, “the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table to provide the PB valid time” means that the value of the target PB timer becomes 0 (that is, the PB timer times out) or the PB is operated. It means that the progress of the scenario table is weighted (it does not progress to the next line of the scenario table but waits there and continues rendering at that time). For example, if a constant weight code is set and the wait time value is "30" in the m-th line of the scenario table, it stays in this line for a time corresponding to 30 frames, and after this time elapses, the next m + 1-th line However, the operation according to the m-th row is the “operation for delaying the progress of control of the scenario table” by the above-described scenario timer. On the other hand, when the PB waiting code is set in the nth line of the scenario table and the valid time value is "2970", this valid time value "2970" is set in the PB timer in step D702 described later. If there is no PB pressing operation, the valid time corresponding to a maximum of 2970 frames stays on this line, and if there is a PB pressing operation within this valid time, the process immediately proceeds to the next n + 1 line. The operation of waiting for the operation of the PB for the valid time (PB valid time) to be performed corresponds to "the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table to provide the PB valid time". Then, the value of the PB timer becomes 0 or less by updating at step D 582 with no operation of the PB, and the PB timer becomes timed up, or the PB valid time until the PB timer times up. If PB is operated in the meantime, the process proceeds to step D583 through step D582 or steps D579 to D581. In this case, the determination result in step D583 is No (PB timer is 0), and the process proceeds to step D584.
However, if the value of the PB timer set in the PB timer area is 0 from the beginning, the process proceeds from step D577 to step D583, and further proceeds from step D583 to step D584 and control proceeds immediately The PB effective time in this case is 0 (none)). In addition, since the PB effective time is provided in the case of the notice effect or the like, in other cases, the value of the PB timer area is set to 0 and the PB effective time is not provided.

Next, in step D584 and subsequent steps, control processing of the target scenario table is executed. This will be described below.
In step D584, the process from step D584 to step D623, which is the loop end, is repeatedly executed until a value other than 0 is set as the value of brk. That is, in step D623 which is the rear end of the loop, the value of brk at that time is read, and if brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 and repeats the process from the next step D585.

That is, in step D584, the address of the scenario table is loaded from the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area (step D585). For example, in the case of scenario layer number 0 at the time of waiting for customer demonstration, the address of the scenario table shown in FIG. 135 is loaded at this step D585.
Next, the opcode of a specific line (specified line) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is obtained (step D586). As described above, in the scenario table, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, the operation code and the data of the operand (scenario data) are set in each row. For example, in the case of FIG. 135, if the designated line is, for example, the first line, the “motion 1 deletion code (M1DEL)” (specific data, for example, “51h”) which is the data of the operation code of the first line is a step. Acquired at D586. Alternatively, in the case of FIG. 135, for example, if the designated line is the 11th line, “motion 10 registration code (M10SET)” (specific data, for example, “4Ah”) which is data of the opcode of the 11th line is a step Acquired at D586.

Next, the operation code acquired in the immediately preceding step D586 is separated into the upper bits and the lower bits and prepared (step D587). For example, when the data of the operation code is “51h” described above, the upper bit “5” and the lower bit “1” are separately prepared. Note that the upper bits and the lower bits of the op code have their respective meanings (however, the lower bits may have no meaning). For example, among "51h" which is "motion 1 deletion code", the upper bit "5" means motion deletion and the lower bit "1" is the motion of the target (in this case, the target of the motion deletion) It means that the layer of is motion 1.
Next, the operand of the specific line (specified line) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is obtained and prepared (step D588), and the process goes to step D589. For example, in the case of FIG. 135, if the designated line is the 11th line (op code is “motion 10 registration code”), “−1” which is data of the operand of the 11th line is acquired and prepared in step D588.

At step D589, the prepared opcode upper data (data separately prepared at step D587, the same applies hereinafter) is determined, and it is data for instructing motion registration (motion registration code) (step D589; Y) After executing the motion registration process (step D601), the process proceeds to step D621, and if it is not data for instructing motion registration (step D589; N), the process proceeds to step D590.
In step D590, the prepared opcode upper data is determined, and if it is data for instructing motion deletion (motion deletion code) (step D590; Y), the motion deletion process (step D602) is performed, and then the step is executed. Proceeding to D621, if it is not data for instructing motion deletion (Step D590; N), the process proceeds to Step D591.

In step D591, the prepared opcode upper data is determined, and if it is data for instructing motion continuation (motion continuation code) (step D591; Y), motion continuation processing (step D603) is performed, and then the step is executed. At D621, if it is not data for commanding motion continuation (Step D591; N), the process proceeds to Step D592.
At step D592, the prepared opcode upper data is determined, and if it is data for instructing constant weight (constant weight code) (step D592; Y), constant weight processing (step D604) is performed and then step is executed. Proceeding to D621, if it is not data for instructing a constant weight (step D592; N), proceed to step D593.

At step D593, the prepared opcode upper data is determined, and if it is data (variable weight code) instructing variable weight (step D593; Y), variable weight processing (step D605) is performed and then step At D621, if it is not data for instructing variable weight (Step D593; N), the process proceeds to Step D594.
In step D594, the prepared upper-order opcode data is determined, and if it is data for instructing PB waiting (PB waiting code) (step D594; Y), the PB waiting process (step D606) is performed and then the step is performed. At step D621, if it is not data to order PB waiting (step D594; N), the process proceeds to step D595.

At step D595, the prepared opcode upper data is determined, and if it is data instructing a PB determination branch (PB determination branch code) (step D595; Y), PB determination branch processing (step D607) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step D621, and if it is not data for instructing a PB determination branch (step D595; N), the process proceeds to step D596.
In step D596, the prepared opcode upper data is determined, and if it is data for instructing symbol stop (stop symbol set code) (step D596; Y), symbol stop processing (step D608) is performed. The process proceeds to step D621, and if it is not data for instructing symbol stop (step D596; N), the process proceeds to step D597.

When the process proceeds to step D597, the prepared opcode upper data is determined, and if it is data for instructing symbol recalculation replacement (symbol recalculation code) (step D597; Y), symbol recalculation replacement process (step D609) After executing step D), the process proceeds to step D621, and if it is not data for instructing symbol recalculation replacement (step D597; N), the process proceeds to step D598.
At step D598, the prepared opcode upper data is determined, and if it is data (fluctuation scenario switching code) instructing fluctuation scenario switching (step D598; Y), fluctuation scenario switching processing (step D610) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step D621, and if it is not data for instructing change scenario switching (step D598; N), the process proceeds to step D599.

At step D599, the prepared opcode upper data is determined, and if it is data to instruct repetition (repetition code) (step D599; Y), the repetitive processing (step D611) is performed and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not data for instructing repetition (step D599; N), the process proceeds to step D600.
If the process proceeds to step D600, the prepared opcode upper data is determined, and if it is data instructing an end (end code) (step D600; Y), the end process (step D612) is performed and then the process proceeds to step D621. If the data is not data for instructing termination (step D600; N), the process proceeds to another step (not shown). In the other steps (not shown) (the steps shown by the dotted lines in FIG. 105), the content of the prepared operation code upper data is determined in the same manner as in steps D589 to D612 described above. If it is a type of data (code), the processing corresponding to it is executed and the process proceeds to step D621, and if the prepared opcode upper data does not correspond to any type of data (code), scenario analysis processing is performed. It is configured to end.

At step D621, the data set at this time is read in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number, and it is determined whether this data is NULL or not (step D621; Y). The value of brk is set to 1 (step D622), the process proceeds to step D623, and if not NULL (step D621; N), the process proceeds to step D623 without executing step D622.
At step D623, as described above, the value of brk at that time is read, and if the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 to repeat the processing from the next step D585, and the value of brk is not zero. Ends the scenario analysis process and returns.

Therefore, in any processing of the steps D601 to D612 etc., the value of brk is set to a value other than 0 or NULL is set in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number. Then, the loop processing with the steps D584 and D623 as the loop end is ended and the process returns. Then, the address of the scenario data table area in the scenario management area (the scenario table and the address for specifying the row) is appropriately changed and the loop process is repeated until the loop process is completed. Control of the production of is executed.
The above-mentioned subroutine group (steps D601 to D612) is an example, and changes depending on the specification of the model.

[Motion registration process]
Next, details of the motion registration process (step D601) in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the motion registration process is started, first, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address for specifying the next row of the table) (step D631). This is an update process for advancing the specified line to the next line when the above-mentioned step D585 is executed next time, and the specified line of the target scenario table becomes the next line by this update process being performed. And the loop processing (steps D584 to D623) described above is repeated.

Next, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code separated in step D587, and preparation is made (step D632), and the process proceeds to step D633. In the case of this example, the RAM in the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 is configured to be provided with storage areas for motion management called “address area of motion management area” and “motion management area”.
Among these, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the motion management area is the display number (for example, the left number) which is the number (maximum number) of objects to be display-controlled (not necessarily displayed on the display screen 41a). In the case of a symbol, a region (region of the number of displays) storing the next symbol, the actual symbol and the previous symbol, and a region (region of frame number) storing the frame number indicating how many frames the processing has progressed , An area for storing the command position indicating the number of lines in the motion table (command position area), and an address data (motion data indicating which table to use in the list table for motion) This is a structure including an area (corresponding to an index) (a motion list table area) and a display information area for the number of displays.

  Also, a motion management area of the same structure corresponds to a layer of motion (in this example, from motion 0 to 13), and this motion layer is present, and in this example, there are 14 layers of motion. There are also 14 management areas (motion management areas 0 to 13). Furthermore, corresponding to this motion management area, there are also 14 address areas for motion 0 address to motion 13 address, as shown on the left side of FIG. 134, in this example. Then, in the step D632, a motion management area corresponding to the layer number of the motion designated by the data of the operation code lower bit to specify one of the plurality of motion management areas as described above (hereinafter referred to as “corresponding motion management The start address of the area “) is read out from the address area of the corresponding motion management area and prepared. In the present application, a layer number of motion (0 to 13 in this example) is simply expressed as a motion number, or used as a motion management area X (X is a number corresponding to the motion number). May.

  Note that there are a plurality of display information areas in the motion management area for the number of displays (the number of objects), and each display information area has a display type, an effect type, an effect parameter, as shown in FIG. Display upper left point X coordinate, display upper left point Y coordinate, display upper right point X coordinate, display upper right point Y coordinate, display lower left point X coordinate, display lower left point Y coordinate, image index, background color, foreground The area includes a color, a frame count in moving picture only of IPicture (I picture), and a behavior index data.

Here, the display type is the type of the object (in addition to information indicating whether it is a still image or a moving image (movie), it also includes information indicating the type of a movie (such as I picture or not)).
The effect type is information indicating the type of an effect (processing such as transparency) applied to an image.
The effect parameter is a parameter of the effect (transparency in the case of providing transparency, etc.).
The X coordinate and the Y coordinate are data for specifying the display position of the image, and in this example, for the polygon display function (the function of displaying a solid as a polyhedron), 3 of the display upper left point, display upper right point, display lower left point There are coordinates of points.
The image index is a number specifying a still image or a movie.
The frame count at the time of moving picture only with IPicture is data indicating which frame of data is an IPicture (that is, I frame).
The behavior index is an index for behavior (pattern replacement). The behavior (symbol replacement) is to replace only the character (still image or moving image) at the same size and the same display position, and is different from the cut-in character replacement described in the above-mentioned steps D385 to D390. In the above-described cut-in character replacement, the size and the display position at which the character is displayed may also change due to the replacement.

In step D633, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D632 is NULL, and if it is NULL (step D633; Y), the process proceeds to step D635, and if not NULL (step D633; N), motion data After performing the initialization process 1 (step D634), the process proceeds to step D635.
At step D635, the top address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the op code separated at step D587 is set and prepared (step D635). The motion corresponding to the lower bit data of the op code The start address prepared in step D635 is set in the address area of the management area (step D636), and the process proceeds to step D637.

  In these steps D632 to D636, finally, in step D636, the top address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit of the op code separated in step D587 is set in the address area of the corresponding motion management area. However, if data of an address other than NULL is already set in the address area of the corresponding motion management area, motion data initialization processing 1 (for example, open setting of the expansion area used for moving image expansion) This is performed in step D634, as will be described later.

In step D637, it is determined whether the data of the operand prepared in step D588 is 0 or more. If it is 0 or more (step D637; Y), the process proceeds to step D638, and if less than 0 (that is, a negative value). (Step D637; N), the process proceeds to step D641.
At step D638, the data of the operand (data of the operand prepared at step D588, and so on) is prepared as a motion index (step D638), and an area for storing the in-use motion index corresponding to the lower opcode Hereinafter, the data prepared in step D638 is set in the "in-use motion index area" (step D639). The in-use motion index area is an area for storing data of a motion index (in-use motion index) for specifying a row to be controlled in the list table for motion for each motion number, and provided for each motion number There is. In this step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set (that is, saved) in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the motion number specified by the lower bit of the op code separated in step D587.
Next, motion data initialization processing 2 (step D640) is performed to initialize data such as the number of displays, and the motion registration processing is ended.

In step D641, data of a motion index corresponding to the lower part of the op code is loaded from the corresponding motion index area and prepared (step D641). In the motion index area, the storage area (index area for suspension, fourth symbol index area) described in the above steps D291 to D294, and the storage area (SU1 cut in) described in the above steps D386, D388, D390. Region, SU2 cut-in region, SU3 cut-in region). In this step D 641, among the motion index areas in the plurality of RAMs, a motion index specified by the lower bits of the op code separated in step D 587 and the current state of the gaming machine Retrieve the motion index data from the area and prepare it.
Next, the data prepared in step D641 is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower part of the op code (step D642), and motion data initialization processing 2 (step D643) is performed to initialize data such as the number of displays. To complete the motion registration process.

  Among the above-described steps D637 to D643, the determination result in step D637 is Yes (an operand is 0 or more) and the route for executing steps D638 to D640 and the determination result in step D637 is No (an operand is less than 0) The route from which the steps D641 to D643 are executed is different as follows. That is, the former route is a route that uses the value (fixed value) of the motion index set in the scenario table stored in the ROM for control, and the latter route is saved in the motion index area in the RAM. This is a route that uses motion index values (not fixed values) for control. When it is desired to change the motion index to be used according to the state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is in a definite change, etc.), a negative value (for example, "-1") is set as the value of the operand and the latter route is executed. It is configured to be For example, the hold display (decorative special drawing start memory display) is displayed in a mode according to the current number of special drawing reservations (number of special drawing start memories), so the 11th line (// On hold)), the value of the operand is a negative value.

[Motion data initialization process 1]
Next, details of motion data initialization processing 1 (step D634) in the above-described motion registration processing, and motion data initialization processing 1 (step D674 and step D686) in motion deletion processing and motion continuation processing described later will be described with reference to FIG. To explain. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the motion control data is data such as the number of displays and the frame number stored in the motion management area.
When motion data initialization processing 1 is started, step D651 to step D655 are repeatedly executed until the final value (final value = display number-1) while increasing the variable i from the initial value 0 by an increment 1 Thereafter, the process proceeds to step D656. That is, at step D651, immediately after the start of motion data initialization processing 1, the variable i is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step D652. In step D655, if the variable i is less than the final value, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the final value, the process proceeds to step D656. Then, returning to step D651, the value of the variable i is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step D652. Note that the value of the final value is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the data of the display number set in the motion management area (hereinafter referred to as “target motion management area”) corresponding to the lower bit of the operation code separated in step D587. is there. That is, in the motion data initialization process 1, the loop process of steps D651 to D655 is repeatedly performed by the number of displayed images, and the process proceeds to step D656.

In step D652, the address of the display information area corresponding to the variable i in the target motion management area is set (step D652), and the process proceeds to step D653. In this step D652, for example, if the variable i is 0, the address of the first display information area among the display information areas existing for the number of displays is set in the target motion management area.
At step D653, the data of the display type in the display information area to which the address is set at the previous step D652 is read and it is determined whether this display type is a moving image. If the display type is a moving image (step D653; Y ), Release setting of the expansion area (area used for expansion of the compressed moving image data) (step D654), proceed to step D655, and if not moving image (step D653; N), step D654 Proceed to step D655 without executing. At step D655, as described above, if the variable i is less than the final value, the process returns to step D651. If the variable i is the final value, the process proceeds to step D656.

  In step D656, parameters of the target motion management area are initialized in steps D656 to D658, and the motion data initialization process 1 ends. That is, the number of displays is set to 0 in step D656, the frame number is set to -1 in step D657, and the command position is set to 0 in step D658.

[Motion data initialization process 2]
Next, the details of motion data initialization process 2 (step D640 and D643) in the above-described motion registration process, and motion initialization process (motion data initialization process 2 (step D689)) in the motion continuation process described later are illustrated in FIG. b).
When motion data initialization processing 2 is started, first, in steps D661 to D663, processing is performed to initialize parameters of the target motion management area, and then the process proceeds to step D664. That is, the display number is set to 0 in step D661, the frame number is set to -1 in step D662, and the command position is set to 0 in step D663.
At step D664, the address (the motion list table and the address specifying the row) corresponding to the in-use motion index (data set at step D642) is stored in the motion list table area in the target motion management area. After setting (step D664), the motion data initialization process 2 ends.

[Motion deletion processing]
Next, details of the motion deletion process (step D602) in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the motion deletion process is started, first, as in step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address specifying the next row of the table) Then (step D671), as in step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the address area of the target motion management area and prepared (step D672), and the process goes to step D673.

In step D673, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D672 is NULL. If it is NULL (step D673; Y), the process proceeds to step D675. If it is not NULL (step D673; N), the motion After the data initialization process 1 (step D674) is performed, the process proceeds to step D675.
At step D675, NULL is set in the address area of the target motion management area (step D675), and the in-use motion corresponding to the lower bit data of the op code (op code separated at step D587, and so on) The data of the index is cleared (step D676), and the motion deletion process is ended thereafter.
The motion deletion process described above is executed when the control of the character or the like is ended, whereby the motion information (data of the address area of the motion management area and data of the in-use motion index area) is deleted.

[Motion continuation processing]
Next, details of the motion continuation process (step D603) in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.
When motion continuation processing is started, first, as in step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address specifying the next row of the table) Then, the data of the in-use motion index corresponding to the lower bits of the op code is loaded (step D681), and the process proceeds to step D683.

In step D683, it is determined whether the data of the in-use motion index loaded in step D682 matches the operand acquired in step D588. If they match (step D683; Y), the motion continuation process is ended. If they do not match (step D683; N), the process proceeds to step D684. Here, it is determined whether the motion currently controlled and the motion specified in the scenario table are the same, and if it is the same, the motion currently controlled should be continued as it is, so motion continuation processing without any processing. If not identical, step D684 and subsequent steps are performed to perform new motion registration.
Then, in step D684 and subsequent steps, the same processing as the above-described motion registration processing (a route using the values of the scenario table) is performed.
That is, at step D684, as at step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the address area of the target motion management area and prepared (step D684), and the process proceeds to step D685.

In step D685, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D684 is NULL. If it is NULL (step D685; Y), the process proceeds to step D687. If not NULL (step D685; N), the motion After executing the data initialization process 1 (step D686), the process proceeds to step D687.
In step D687, the top address of the target motion management area is set and prepared (step D687), and the top address prepared in step D687 is set in the address area of the target motion management area (step D688).
Next, motion initialization processing, that is, the above-mentioned motion data initialization processing 2 (step D689) is executed to set the data of the operand in the used motion index area corresponding to the lower bit of the op code (step D690), and then the motion continuation processing ends.
In the motion continuation processing described above, processing for continuing as it is if the motion information specified in the scenario table is the same as the content currently being controlled, or newly registering processing if different is executed. Thus, for example, if the background during change is not changed due to reach or the like, the movie is continued across a plurality of changes, but when reach occurs, it is newly reproduced from the head.

[Constant weight processing]
Next, details of constant weight processing (step D604) in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the constant wait process is started, first, the same update process as step D631 is executed (step D691), and data of the operand is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area (step D692). ).
Next, the value of brk is set to 1 (step D693), and the constant weight processing is ended.
According to the constant wait process, a time value or the like when waiting for a designated fixed time is set. For example, in the case of the 18th line (// wait) in the scenario table shown in FIG. 135, this process is executed because the op code is a constant wait code, and the wait time of the operand is “3600”. 3600 (120 seconds = 3600 × 1/30 seconds) is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Then, since the value of brk becomes 1 in step D693, the repetition of the loop processing (steps D584 to D623) in the scenario analysis processing described above ends.

[Variable weight processing]
Next, details of the variable weight process (step D605) in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.
When variable weight processing is started, first, update processing similar to the step D631 is executed (step D695), and a value obtained by adding PB effect addition time (value set at step D579) to data of the operand Is set as the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area (step D696).
Next, the value of brk is set to 1 (step D697), and the variable weight processing is ended.

  In the variable weight processing, a time value or the like for performing variable time weighting is set when the effect time changes due to the player's PB operation. As a result, the effect to be performed later becomes longer as the PB operation instruction is issued earlier, and an operation is realized in which the effect is performed only for a short time when the operation is performed just before the effective time. Here, the PB effect addition time becomes a larger value as the player performs the PB operation earlier after the effect for prompting the player to perform the PB operation is performed (see step D579). Therefore, as the player performs the PB operation earlier, the effect to be performed thereafter becomes longer.

[PB waiting process]
Next, details of the PB waiting process (step D606) in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the PB waiting process is started, first, the same updating process as step D631 is executed (step D701), and the data of the operand is set in the PB timer area of the target scenario management area (step D702). ).
Next, the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is cleared (step D703), the value of brk is set to 1 (step D704), and the PB waiting process is ended.

  In the PB waiting process, settings are made when PB effect (push button effect) is started. In step D703, the value of the PB detection flag indicating that the PB (push button) has been operated is initialized to OFF (state in which the flag is not set) to start PB effect (push button effect). ing.

[PB judgment branch processing]
Next, details of the PB determination branch process (step D 607) in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the PB determination branch process is started, first, in step D711, it is determined whether the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is set (that is, the PB detection flag is set) and set. If there is (step D711; Y), the process proceeds to step D713, and if not set (step D711; N), that is, if the PB detection flag is off, the process proceeds to step D712.
At step D712, the same update processing as at step D631 is executed (step D712), and the PB determination branch processing is ended.
In step D713, the same update process as step D631 is performed (step D713), and the process proceeds to step D714.
In step D714, it is determined whether execution of the address update process in step D713 has been completed by the amount of data of the operand prepared in step D588. If complete (step D714; Y), the PB determination branch process is ended. If it has not been completed (step D 714; N), the process returns to step D 713 to repeat the process.

  In the PB judgment branch process, the PB timer which measures the effective time without operating the PB in the above-mentioned PB effect (push button effect) has timed out, or the PB is operated within the effective time and the timer is forcibly 0 It is a process executed when it becomes. If the time is up while the PB is not operated, the process proceeds to step D712 through step D711, and the designated line of the scenario table advances by one line and returns. If PB is operated within the effective time, the process proceeds to step D 713 through step D 711 and the designated line of the scenario table jumps by the amount designated by the operand.

  For example, when the op code in the m-th line of the scenario table is a PB determination branch code, this process is executed. If the m-th operand (ie, the number of jumps to the table) is “3”, the PB is operated within the effective time, and if the process proceeds to step D713, the determination result of step D714 is performed until step D713 is executed three times. Becomes No, and as a result, the next specified line in the scenario table will fly to the m + 3 line. On the other hand, even if this process is executed as described above, if PB is not pressed within the valid time, step D 712 is executed only once and the process returns (this process ends), so the scenario The designated line in the table is the next m + 1 line.

[Pattern stop processing]
Next, the details of the symbol stopping process (step D608) in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the symbol stopping process is started, first, the same updating process as the step D631 is executed (step D721), and the process proceeds to step D722.
In step D722, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the op code designates the left symbol. If it is the left symbol (step D722; Y), the procedure proceeds to step D727, and it is not the left symbol (step D722; N) Go to step D723.
In step D727, the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (left) (step D727), and the symbol stop process is ended.
At step D723, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the op code designates the right symbol. If the symbol is the right symbol (step D723; Y), the procedure proceeds to step D728, and if not the right symbol (step D723; N) Go to step D724.
In step D728, the value of the special figure stop symbol area (right) (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (right) (step D728), and the symbol stop process is ended.

At step D724, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the op code designates a middle symbol. If the middle symbol is specified (step D724; Y), the process proceeds to step D729, and if not middle symbol (step D724; N) Go to step D725.
In step D729, the value of the special figure stop symbol area (middle) (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (middle) (step D729), and the symbol stop processing is ended.
At step D725, it is determined whether the lower order bit data of the op code designates the special figure 1 fourth symbol (the fourth figure of special figure 1), and if it is the special figure 1 fourth symbol (step D725; Y) Proceed to step D730, and if it is not the special figure 1 fourth pattern (step D725; N), proceed to step D726.
At step D730, the value of the special figure stop symbol area (special figure 1 fourth symbol) is set as the present symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) (step D730), and the symbol stop process is ended.

At step D 726, it is determined whether the data of the lower bit of the op code designates the special figure 2 fourth symbol (the fourth figure of special figure 2), and if it is the special figure 2 fourth symbol figure (step D 726) Y: Proceed to step D731, and if it is not the special figure 2 fourth symbol pattern (step D726; N), finish the symbol stop processing.
In step D731, the value of the special figure stop symbol area (the special figure 2 fourth symbol) is set as the present figure (the special figure 2 fourth symbol) (step D731), and the symbol stop process is ended.
The symbol stop process is a process of setting the stop symbol when stopping the variation display of the symbol such as the decorative special figure. For example, if the 12th line (// stop symbol set) in the scenario table shown in FIG. 135 is a designated row, the operation code is the stop symbol set code (left symbol), so this process is executed and the above-mentioned step D722 is performed. The determination result is Yes, and the step D727 is executed to set the stop symbol of the left symbol of the special view.

[Inverse symbol replacement process]
Next, the details of the symbol backcalculation replacement process (step D609) in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the symbol backcalculation replacement process is started, first, the same update process as step D631 is executed (step D741), and the process proceeds to step D742.
At step D742, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the op code designates the left symbol. If it is the left symbol (step D742; Y), the procedure proceeds to step D743. N) Go to step D748.

At step D743, the remainder (an operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the data of the operand by 9 is set as the frame difference (step D743), and the frame difference is set from the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) (step D743). Is set as a symbol number (step D744), and the process proceeds to step D745.
In step D745, it is determined whether or not the symbol number set in step D744 is less than 0 (minus value). If it is less than 0 (step D745; Y), the process proceeds to step D746, and if not less than 0 (step D745) In D745; N), the process proceeds to step D747.
In step D746, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number (step D746), and the procedure proceeds to step D747.
At step D747, the symbol number value (set at step D744, and in the case of minus, the value adjusted at step D746) is set as the current symbol (left) (step D747), and symbol recalculation replacement processing Finish.

At step D748, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the op code designates the right symbol. If the symbol is the right symbol (step D748; Y), the procedure proceeds to step D749, and if not the right symbol (step D748; N) Go to step D754.
At step D749, the remainder of the operand data divided by 9 (operand mod 9) is set as the frame difference (step D749), and the frame difference is set from the value of the special figure stop symbol area (right) (step D749). Is set as a symbol number (step D750), and the process proceeds to step D751.
In step D751, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D750 is less than 0. If it is less than 0 (step D751; Y), the process proceeds to step D752. If not less than 0 (step D751; N) The process proceeds to step D753.
In step D752, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number (step D752), and the procedure proceeds to step D753.
At step D753, the symbol number value (set at step D750, and if negative, the value adjusted at step D752) is set as the current symbol (right) (step D753), symbol recalculation replacement process Finish.

In step D754, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the op code designates a middle symbol. If the middle symbol is specified (step D754; Y), the process proceeds to step D755, and if not middle symbol (step D754; N), finish the symbol recalculation replacement process.
At step D755, the remainder of the data of the operand divided by 9 (operand mod 9) is set as the frame difference (step D755), and the frame difference is set from the value of the special figure stop symbol area (middle) (step D755) Is set as a symbol number (step D756), and the process proceeds to step D757.
In step D757, it is determined whether or not the symbol number set in step D756 is less than 0. If it is less than 0 (step D757; Y), the process proceeds to step D758. If not less than 0 (step D757; N) The process proceeds to step D759.
In step D758, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number (step D758), and the procedure proceeds to step D759.
At step D759, the symbol number value (set at step D756, and in the case of minus, the value corrected at step D758) is set as the current symbol (middle) (step D759), symbol recalculation replacement process Finish.

The symbol recalculation replacement process described above is a process of replacing the symbol with a symbol several symbols ahead (a symbol previous by the number of symbol feeds) scheduled to be stopped, such as the moment of slowdown after the end of high speed fluctuation.
For example, when the op code in the mth line of the scenario table is the left symbol backcalculation code, the present processing is executed, the determination result of the above step D742 becomes Yes, and the above steps D743 to D747 are executed and the present symbol ( Left) is set. In this case, the operand is data indicating the number of symbol feeds, and the operand of the mth row (ie, the number of frames to be fed) is “2”. A certain 2 is set as the frame difference, and the symbol number is set in the step D744 using the value of the frame difference. For example, if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 1, -1 (= 1-2) is set as the symbol number, and if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 7, 5 (= 7-2) is set as a symbol number. Then, if the symbol number set in this step D744 is a negative value (for example, -1), step D746 is executed and the symbol number is changed to a value of one round (for example, if -1, 8 = -1 + 9 And the symbol number is registered as the present symbol (left) in step D747.

  The above operation is the same for the right symbol (steps D748 to D753) and the middle symbol (steps D754 to D759). Also, “9” in step D 743 and the like represents the number of symbols in each reel (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol). This may not be 9 depending on the model, and may also be different for each reel. "9" in step D335 and the like of the stop symbol setting process described above similarly indicates the number of symbols.

[Change scenario switching process]
Next, details of the change scenario switching process (step 610) in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the variation scenario switching process is started, it is first determined in step D761 whether the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd (that instructs switching to the 2nd (first half) of the variation display of the left symbol), and the left If it is the symbol scenario 2nd (step D761; Y), the process proceeds to step D762, and if it is not the left symbol scenario 2nd (step D761; N), the process proceeds to step D767.

When proceeding to step D762, scenario layer No. 1 is prepared because it is a left symbol (step D762), and the address of the left symbol scenario 2nd table (the scenario table for 2nd (first half) for left symbol) is started from the symbol variation scenario table area. Load and prepare (step D763). In the symbol variation scenario table area, scenario tables for various symbol variation scenario tables (1st (early stage), 2nd (first half), 3rd (second half)) as described in the above-mentioned step D315, The addresses of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol are stored, and the address of the scenario table for 2nd (first half) for the left symbol is prepared in this step D763.
Next, based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D762 and D763, the aforementioned scenario data setting process (step D764) is executed to prepare an address area of the prepared scenario management area (for example, prepared in the step D553 etc. The address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the address area of the scenario management area (step D 765), and the variation scenario switching process is ended. As a result, scenario management area 1 is newly set as a target scenario management area.

In step D767, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 2nd (that instructs switching of the right symbol variation display to 2nd), and it is the right symbol scenario 2nd (step D767; Y) The process proceeds to step D768, and if it is not the right symbol scenario 2nd (step D767; N), the process proceeds to step D772.
When proceeding to step D768, scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is the right symbol (step D767), and the address of the right symbol scenario 2nd table (the scenario table for the second symbol for the right symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area, Prepare (step D769).
Next, based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D768 and D769, the scenario data setting process (step D770) described above is executed to set the address of the scenario management area 2 in the prepared address area of the scenario management area. Then (step D771), the variation scenario switching process ends. As a result, scenario management area 2 is newly set as a target scenario management area.

In step D772, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the middle symbol scenario 2nd (that instructs switching of the middle symbol variation display to 2nd), and it is the middle symbol scenario 2nd (step D772; Y) The process proceeds to step D773, and if the middle symbol scenario 2nd is not (step D772; N), the process proceeds to step D777.
At step D773, scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a middle symbol (step D773), and the address of the middle symbol scenario 2nd table (for the middle symbol and 2nd scenario table) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area, Prepare (step D774).
Next, based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D773 and D774, the scenario data setting process (step D775) described above is executed to set the address of the scenario management area 3 in the prepared address area of the scenario management area. Then (step D776), the variation scenario switching process ends. As a result, scenario management area 3 is newly set as a target scenario management area.

In step D777, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 3rd (command to switch to the 3rd (second half) of the fluctuation display of the left symbol), and it is the left symbol scenario 3rd (step D777) In case of not the left symbol scenario 3rd (step D777; N), the process proceeds to step D782.
When proceeding to step D778, scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is the left symbol (step D778), and the address of the left symbol scenario 3rd table (the scenario table for the third symbol (second half in left symbol) for symbol left) from the symbol variation scenario table area. Load and prepare (step D779).
Next, based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D778 and D779, the scenario data setting process (step D780) described above is executed to set the address of scenario management area 1 in the prepared address area of the scenario management area. Then (step D781), the variation scenario switching process ends. As a result, scenario management area 1 is newly set as a target scenario management area.

In step D782, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 3rd (that instructs to switch to the 3rd of the variation display of the right symbol), and it is the right symbol scenario 3rd (step D782; Y) In step D783, if it is not the right symbol scenario 3rd (step D782; N), the process proceeds to step D787.
At step D783, scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is the right symbol (step D783), and the address of the right symbol scenario 3rd table (the scenario table for the third symbol in the right symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area. Prepare (step D784).
Next, based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D783 and D784, the scenario data setting process (step D785) described above is executed to set the address of the scenario management area 2 in the prepared address area of the scenario management area. Then (step D786), the variation scenario switching process ends. As a result, scenario management area 2 is newly set as a target scenario management area.

In step D787, it is determined whether the data of the operand is middle symbol scenario 3rd (that instructs switching to the third symbol of the middle symbol variation display), and it is middle symbol scenario 3rd (step D787; Y) In step D788, if it is not the middle symbol scenario 3rd (step D787; N), the variation scenario switching process is ended.
In step D788, the scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a middle symbol (step D788), and the address of the middle symbol scenario 3rd table (the third table for the middle symbol for the middle symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area, Prepare (step D 789).
Next, based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D788 and D789, the scenario data setting process (step D790) described above is executed to set the address of the scenario management area 3 in the prepared address area of the scenario management area. Then (step D791), the variation scenario switching process ends. As a result, scenario management area 3 is newly set as a target scenario management area.

According to the change scenario switching process described above, the scenario is switched from the 1st (early stage) to the 2nd (first half) or from the 2nd (first half) to the 3rd (second half) Is done. That is, in the variation display effect of the decorative special drawing, one variation is usually divided into three sections, "the early stage, the first half, the second half", and the scenario of each section is switched and connected by this processing. For example, when the m-line op code of the scenario table is a variation scenario switching code and the operand is a left symbol scenario 2nd, the present process is executed and the determination result of step D761 becomes Yes, and steps D762 to D765 are performed. Is executed, and a new scenario table for 2nd (first half) for the left symbol is set as a scenario table to be controlled, and setting for executing this scenario table is performed.
Note that, depending on the type of change, the time value of the “early stage, first half, second half” division is different. In addition, there is also a variation without 3rd (second half) (such as no reach variation).

[Repeated processing]
Next, details of the repetitive processing (step D611) in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the iterative process is started, first, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is returned to the previous record (address specifying the line immediately before the scenario table) (step D795), Go to step D796.
In step D796, step D795 is executed by the amount of the operand obtained in step D588 to determine whether the table address has been returned to the previous record, and if the operand is returned (step D796; Y) If the process is completed and the operand has not been returned (step D796; N), the process returns to step D795 to repeat the process.

  The repetitive processing described above is used when returning to a predetermined stage of the scenario table to repeat the operation in the same scenario. For example, if the 25th line (// repeat) of the last line in the scenario table shown in FIG. 135 is a designated line, the op code is a repetition code and the operand (ie, the number of returns) is “15”. When the process is executed and the step D795 is executed 15 times, the determination result in the step D796 becomes Yes, and the process ends, whereby the designated line of the scenario table is the tenth line 15 lines before (line Return to /// BG continue). The tenth line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 135 is a line for starting the symbol display (wait for customer A) of the wait for customer demonstration effect, following the symbol display (wait for customer A) of this waiting for customer demonstration effect It has a table configuration in which movie display (waiting for customers B) of effects is performed. For this reason, after that, symbol display and movie display as a demonstration for waiting for customers are repeated, and data for one loop (data from the 10th line to the last line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 135) is prepared. It will be enough.

〔End processing〕
Next, the details of the termination process (step D612) in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (b).
When the end process is started, NULL is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area (step D798), and the end process is ended. As a result, the setting of the target scenario management area disappears, and the scenario ends.
For example, when the op code in the m-th line of the scenario table is an end code, this process is executed, the address area of the target scenario management area is set to NULL in step D798, and the scenario is ended. This process is executed when all the series of scenarios are completed. That is, since all the scenarios have been completed, the address in the scenario management area is erased and terminated.

[Motion control processing]
Next, the details of the motion control process (step D30) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the motion control process is started, the loop process of steps D801 to D818 is repeatedly executed while increasing the number X of the target motion management area from 0, and the termination condition of this loop process (in this example, 14 motion management areas) Since there is a condition, the motion control process is ended when the condition that the control for all the motion management areas 0 to 13 is completed is satisfied. That is, at the start of the motion control process, first, the number of the target motion management area is set to 0 (X = 0) in step D801, and the process proceeds to step D802 to execute the processes after step D802. In step D818, it is determined whether the end condition (X = 14) is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the motion control process is ended and satisfied. If not, the process returns to step D801 and proceeds to step D802.

Hereinafter, step D802 and subsequent steps will be described on the assumption that the number of the target motion management area is X (in practice, it is any one of 0 to 13 in this example).
In step D802, the initialization flag used in this processing is cleared (step D802), and the address of the motion management area X is loaded from the address area of the motion management area X (step D803). move on. That is, one region is loaded at a time.
In step D804, it is determined whether the data of the address loaded in step D803 is NULL, and if it is NULL (step D804; Y), the motion X (the layer of the motion corresponding to the motion management area X) Since the control does not require control, the process proceeds to step D817, and if not NULL (step D804; N), the process proceeds to step D805.

At step D805, based on the address loaded at step D803, data of the motion list table area in the motion management area X (that is, data for specifying the motion list table to be controlled this time and data) is loaded and prepared. (Step D805), and the process proceeds to Step D806.
At step D806, data on the number of display frames in a row of the motion list table (hereinafter referred to as "designated row") specified by the data loaded at step D805 is read, and this display frame number If the number is 0 or less (step D806; Y), the process proceeds to step D817 which is abnormal, and if it is not 0 or less (step D806; N), the process proceeds to step D807 as it is normal. Since the execution period differs for each motion, the corresponding display frame number is defined on the motion list table, and at least one frame should have the display frame number defined. It is abnormal if the definition value on the for-use list table is 0 or less.

  In step D807, the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is read, it is determined whether the value of this frame number is less than 0, and if it is less than 0 (step D807; Y), the motion is newly registered. If it is (when registering motion), the initialization flag is set (step D808), and the process proceeds to step D809. If it is not less than 0 (step D807; N), step D808 is not executed because motion is not registered. Proceed to step D809. In addition, since the frame number is set to “−1” at steps D657 and D662 in the above-described motion data initialization processing 1 and 2 at the time of motion registration, the initialization flag is set at step D808 if motion registration is performed. Be done. Note that this initialization flag is a flag that is cleared in the above-described step D802 and determined in step D812 described later.

In step D809, it is determined whether the value of the frame number in the motion management area X has reached at least the final number of frames (that is, the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of display frames described above). D 809; N) Go to step D 812, and if it is the final frame number or more (step D 809; Y), go to step D 810.
In step D810, the aforementioned motion data initialization process 1 (step D810) is executed to set an initialization flag (step D811) as in step D808, and the process proceeds to step D812.
Here, the fact that the frame number (starting from 0) has reached the final frame number means that the control of the target motion table has been completed until the final frame. Therefore, if the determination result in step D809 is Yes (the frame number has reached the final frame number), motion data initialization processing 1 and setting of the initialization flag are executed as in the motion registration, and the same setting is performed. The motion table is configured to be executed again from the beginning.

In step D812, it is determined whether the initialization flag is set. If the initialization flag is set (step D812; Y), the process proceeds to step D813 in order to execute the target motion table from the beginning. If the initialization flag is not set (step D812; N), that is, if it is cleared, the process proceeds to step D819.
In step D813, the frame number, the number of displays, and the value of the command position in the motion management area X are set to 0 (steps D813 to D815), and the process proceeds to step D816.
In step D819, the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is updated by +1 (step D819), and the process proceeds to step D816. The reason why the process proceeds to step D819 is that the frame number needs to be sequentially increased since the initialization flag is not set (that is, when the target motion table is being executed).

  Note that the value of the display number (value indicating the number of objects under control) set to 0 in step D814 is an object added or deleted in the motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D881 described later). It is updated (+1 or -1) when it is done. In addition, the value of the command position (value indicating the line in the motion table) set to 0 in step D815 is also updated (for example, in step D880 described below) in the motion command execution process described later. When the value of the command position is 0, it indicates that the designated line in the motion table is the first line. Further, the value of the display number is the number of objects under control, not the number of objects (such as a symbol and an announcement character) actually displayed simultaneously on the display screen 41a.

In step D816, motion command execution processing (step D816) for executing control of the target motion table is performed to update the address of the address area itself of the motion management area (step D817), and step D818. Go to That is, at step D 817, updating is performed to increase the value of the number X of the motion management area by one. As a result, the target motion management area and the layer of the target motion are switched to the next. For example, if motion management area 1 (the motion layer is motion 1) is to be controlled before execution of step D817, then motion management area 2 (the motion layer is motion 2) is to be controlled after execution. .
In step D818, if the above-mentioned end condition (in the case of this example, the number X = 14) is satisfied, the process returns. If not, the process returns to step D801 and repeats the process from step D802. .

[Motion command execution processing]
Next, the details of the motion command execution process (step D 816) in the above-described motion control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117.
When the motion command execution process is started, first, from the motion list table area in the motion management area X (target motion management area), address data of the motion list table (also referred to as “motion list table”) (ie, Load the motion list table to be controlled this time and the data specifying the row (step D 821), and proceed to step D 822.

  At step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is read, and the value of this command position is the number of motion commands (the number of motion commands in the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded at step D821). If it is more than the number of motion commands (step D822; Y), motion command execution processing is performed because all commands (all rows of the target motion table) have been executed. When the process is completed and the motion command number is not exceeded (step D822; N), the process proceeds to step D823 to execute the target motion table for the next one frame. For example, if the m-th line in the motion list table is a designated line and the number of motion commands in the m-th line is "1830", the value of the command position in the motion management area X is "1830" in step D822. If it is not "1830" or more, the process proceeds to step D823. Also, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is initialized to 0 at first in steps D658 and D663 in the above-described motion data initialization processing 1 and 2, and each row (command) in the motion table in step D843 described later. Each time is executed, +1 is updated, so if this value is "1830" or more, all rows in the target motion table have been executed, so the motion command execution process is terminated. ing.

In step D823, the motion table address (motion table name) is acquired from the target row of the motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). (Step D823) The process proceeds to Step D824. For example, if the mth row in the motion list table is a designated row and the motion table name of the mth row is "Mdat003", this "Mdat003" is acquired as the address of the motion table (from ROM (PROM 321) Take out). The motion list table area of the RAM (the RAM in the CPU 311) stores the address (pointing to the address of the table in the ROM) of the leftmost column (the position of the number of frames) of the motion list table. In step D821 described above, this address is loaded from the motion list table area of the RAM. Then, at step D823, the value of "motion table name (address)" indicated by the address two records ahead of the address loaded at step D821 is read out from the ROM (PROM 312 in this example).
In this example, since the motion table address corresponds to the motion table name, if the motion table name is acquired, the motion table address is acquired.

  Also, as described above, the motion table is a control table for performing each of the blocked display effects, but the details will be described here. In the present application, FIG. 136 shows an example of the motion table at the start of the left symbol normal fluctuation, but a large number of such motion tables are registered in the ROM (in this example, the PROM 321). As shown in FIG. 136, in each row of the motion table, the code of the command is set at the beginning, and subsequently, parameters corresponding to the command are set. However, there may be no parameter.

  For example, in the first line of FIG. 136, a command of "additional code" and a parameter of "character No. (No. 2: next pattern)" are set, and in the second line, they are "behavior code". The command and parameters "display information area No. (No. 0)" and "behavior No. (No. 0)" are set, and the command "move 1 code" and the "display information area" The parameters “No. (No. 0)”, “X coordinate (0)”, “Y coordinate (-493)”, “image data width (296)”, “image data height (518)” are set, On the same line 10, only the command "end code" is set. Here, the object index (display information area No.) is a number assigned to an object to distinguish each object, and is automatically set in the order of registration by the additional code. For example, the character No. registered additionally on the first line of FIG. In the second character (symbol "2"), the object index (display information area No.) becomes "0", and the character No. 2 additionally registered on the third line is registered. As for the character 1 (pattern “1”), the object index (display information area No.) becomes “1”, and the character No. 1 additionally registered on the fifth line is registered. The character 9 (symbol "9") has an object index (display information area No.) of "2", and so on. Based on the number of characters to be displayed (the number of objects), the object index (display information area No.) The value will increase. Object indexes (display information area No.) 0 to 2 in FIG. 136 are left symbol display information area 0 (next symbol) in the left symbol motion management area (refer to the uppermost row on the right side of FIG. 134), and left symbol display information The area 1 (current symbol) and the left symbol display information area 2 (previous symbol) are pointed out.

Then, the smaller the value of the object index (display information area No.), the more it is displayed in the back of the screen. That is, when the display positions overlap, objects with large values of the object index (display information area No.) are preferentially displayed on the screen.
Further, although three characters are made to appear in the example of FIG. 136, the total number of characters of all the other categories (such as notices) used simultaneously is managed to be 128. That is, in the VDP 312 of this example, 128 characters can be simultaneously displayed and controlled. In addition, since characters can be arranged outside the display screen 41a, the number is not limited to 128 in the display screen 41a.
Also, the example of FIG. 136 is data for the first four frames of the motion table of the normal fluctuation (first half) of the left symbol. The break up to the end code is data of one frame, and for example, (a) of the first to tenth lines is data of the first one frame. In addition, numerical values such as coordinate data and size data may be data including information after the decimal point only by describing values that make sense of this example. Actually, it is data of 16-bit signed fixed decimal point (sign bit, 13 bits of integer part, 2's complement of 2 bits of decimal part).
If the same state as the previous frame is to be continued, only the end code may be defined.

Also, the types and meanings of the motion table commands in this example are as follows.
"Additional code"; a command to add an object. There are one additional code, two additional codes, and three additional codes, depending on the type of object to be added (bitmap, moving image, single-color rectangle).
“Insert code”: a command to insert an object as a specific object index (display information area No.). Depending on the type of object to be inserted (same as above), there are 1 code for insertion, 2 codes for insertion, 3 codes for insertion. By the execution of the insertion code, the value of the object index (display information area No.) of the already registered object deviates.
"Move code": a command for specifying the display position of the object and the display size. There are 1 movement code and 2 movement code according to the specification method (1 point specification, 3 point specification).
"Effect code": a command for instructing an effect to apply processing such as transparency to an image. There are an effect 1 code for specifying an effect type, an effect 2 code for specifying an effect parameter (for example, transmittance value (%)), and an effect 3 code for specifying an effect color.
“Deletion code”: a command instructing deletion of an object.
“Change code”: A command to instruct a change to continue the movement of the object character (pattern, character, etc.) in the middle of the movement and replace it again.
“Decode code”: a command for instructing decoding (decoding) of moving image data.
“Replacement code”: a command to instruct replacement of an object (for example, control to replace the character of object index (display information area No.) 0 and the character of object index (display information area No.) 1).
・ "Behavior code": a command for instructing replacement of the character of the object.
“End code”: a command indicating the end of data for one frame.
The commands of the motion table are not limited to the ones described above, and may be a mode in which commands other than the above are further included, or a mode in which any of the above commands may be deleted.

  In step D824, loop processing in which the steps D824 and D844 are at the loop end is repeatedly executed until an end condition (command = end) is satisfied. That is, immediately after the motion registration, etc., the command position k of the target motion management area X is set to 0 (value specifying the first line of the motion table) by steps D658, D663, and D815 described above (k = 0) Every time the loop processing of steps D824 to D844 is repeated, the value of the command position k of the motion management area X is incremented by 1 (k = k + 1) in steps D843 and D880 etc. It is determined whether (the command at command position k is an end command), and if yes, step D844 is followed to end the motion command execution processing, and if not decided, step D844 is returned to step D824. The process proceeds to step D825.

Hereinafter, step D 825 and subsequent steps will be described, assuming that the value of the command position of the target motion management area X is k.
At step D825, the line corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table (motion table of the address acquired at step D823) (for example, the first line if k = 0, the second line if k = 1, ... If k = N, the N + 1 line command is acquired (step D825), and the command determination is sequentially performed on this command to see if it corresponds to each code (step D826 to D841), whichever If the command determination result of this becomes Yes, the corresponding process (any one of steps D851 to D866) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D844.

Specifically, in step D826, it is determined whether there is an additional 1 code, and if it is an additional 1 code (step D826; Y), after performing a bitmap addition process (step D851) for adding a still image as an object Proceed to step D844, and if it is not an additional 1 code (step D826; N), proceed to step D827.
At step D827, it is determined whether there are two additional codes, and if it is two additional codes (step D827; Y), moving image addition processing (step D852) for adding a moving image as an object is performed, and the procedure goes to step D844 to add If it is not a code (step D 827; N), the process proceeds to step D 828.
At step D828, it is determined whether there are three additional codes, and if it is the additional code 3 (step D828; Y), a single-color rectangle addition process of adding a single-color rectangular image not using data of character ROM (image ROM 325) as an object After performing step D853), the process proceeds to step D844, and if it is not the additional code 3 (step D828; N), the process proceeds to step D829.
In step D829, it is determined whether it is an insertion 1 code. If it is an insertion 1 code (step D829; Y), bitmap insertion processing (step D854) for inserting a still image as an object is performed, and then the processing proceeds to step D844. If it is not the insertion 1 code (step D829; N), the process proceeds to step D830.

At step D830, it is determined whether there is an insertion 2 code, and if it is an insertion 2 code (step D830; Y), moving image insertion processing (step D855) for inserting a moving image as an object is performed, and then the procedure proceeds to step D844 and insertion 2 If it is not a code (step D830; N), the process proceeds to step D831.
At step D831, it is determined whether there is an insert 3 code, and if it is an insert 3 code (step D831; Y), a single color rectangular insert process (step D856) for inserting the single color rectangular image as an object is performed. If it is not the insertion 3 code (step D831; N), the process proceeds to step D832.
At step D832, it is determined whether there is a move 1 code, and if it is a move 1 code (step D832; Y), a one-point designation object move process (1 point designation method) is performed to set the display position and display size of the object After performing step D857), the process proceeds to step D844, and if it is not a move 1 code (step D832; N), the process proceeds to step D833.
At step D833, it is determined whether there is a move 2 code, and if it is a move 2 code (step D833; Y), a three-point specified object move process (set the display position and display size of the object by the three-point specification method) After performing step D858), the process proceeds to step D844, and if it is not a move 2 code (step D833; N), the process proceeds to step D834.

At step D834, it is determined whether the effect 1 code or not. If the effect 1 code (step D834; Y), effect type specification processing (step 859) is performed and then the process proceeds to step D844; Step D834; N) Go to step D835.
If it proceeds to step D 835, it determines whether it is effect 2 code, and if it is effect 2 code (step D 835; Y), performs effect parameter specification processing (step D 860) and then proceeds to step D 844, and if it is not effect 2 code ( Step D 835; N) Go to Step D 836.
At step D836, it is determined whether there is an effect 3 code, and if it is an effect 3 code (step D836; Y), effect color specification processing (step D861) for setting an effect color is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If it is not a code (step D836; N), the process proceeds to step D837.
In step D837, it is determined whether the code is a deletion code. If it is a deletion code (step D837; Y), object deletion processing (step D862) for deleting an object is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D844; Step D837; N) Go to Step D838.

In step D838, it is determined whether it is a change code. If it is a change code (step D838; Y), object change processing (step D863) for changing an object is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D844; Step D838; N) Go to Step D839.
At step D839, it is determined whether the code is a decoded code. If the code is a decoded code (step D839; Y), object moving image decoding processing (step D864) is performed and then the process proceeds to step D844, and if not a decoded code (step D839; N) Go to step D840.
At step D840, it is determined whether it is a replacement code, and if it is a replacement code (step D840; Y), an object replacement process (step D865) for replacing an object is performed and then the procedure goes to step D844; D 840; N), Go to step D 841.
At step D841, it is determined whether it is a behavior code, and if it is a behavior code (step D841; Y), behavior index setting processing (step D866) is performed and then it proceeds to step D844 and it is not a behavior code (step D841; N) Go to step D842.

If the process proceeds to step D842, it is determined whether it is an end code. If it is an end code (step D842; Y), the process proceeds to step D843, and if it is not the end code (step D842; N), the process proceeds to step D843.
In step D843, the value of the command position k is updated by 1 (step D843), and the process proceeds to step D844.
In step D844, if the determination result in step D842 is YES, the motion command execution process is ended, and if NO, the process returns to step D824 to execute step D826 and subsequent steps for the updated command position k.

The specific example of the operation for one frame by the loop processing of the steps D824 to D844 will be described as follows in the case of FIG.
That is, the command position k = 0 at first, and the first line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, so Yes in step D826 and the bitmap addition process of step D851 is executed, and this 1 Character No. in the line Two characters (symbol “2”) are registered as object index (display information area No.) 0. Here, since the normal change start is started, first, the image data of the symbol "2" which is a reference symbol is registered as the next symbol on the upper stage. The first additional registration is filled in advance, and the image data is automatically registered in the image index area of the display information area 0.
Next, k = 1 and the second line in which the behavior code is set is the specified line, and object index (display information area No.) 0 and behavior index (behavior No.) 0 are set as parameters. Therefore, the answer to step D841 is YES, and the behavior index setting process of step D866 is executed, and the behavior index (behavior No.) for the character (ie, pattern “2”) corresponding to object index .) 0 is set. It is necessary to replace the symbol data because there is no meaning in the symbol "2" which is the reference symbol every time. Therefore, here, the subroutine specified by the behavior index (behavior No.) is executed, and data of symbol numbers corresponding to the value of the display symbol area (current symbol area) is replaced to use.

Next, k becomes 2 and the third line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, so Yes in step D826 and the bitmap addition process of step D851 is executed, and the third line is present. Character No. One character (symbol “1”) is registered as an object index (display information area No.) 1. Here, the image data of the symbol "1", which is a reference symbol, is registered as the current symbol in the middle. The image data is automatically registered in the image index area of the display information area 1.
Next, k becomes k = 3, and the fourth line where the behavior code is set is the specified line, and object index (display information area No.) 1 and behavior index (behavior No.) 0 are set as parameters Therefore, the answer to step D841 is YES, and the behavior index setting process of step D866 is executed, and the behavior index (behavior No. 1) for the character (ie, pattern "1") corresponding to the object index (display information area No. 1). .) 0 is set.

Next, k = 4, and the fifth line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, so Yes in step D826 and the bitmap addition process of step D851 is executed, and the fifth line is present. Character No. Nine characters (symbol “9”) are registered as object index (display information area No.) 2. Here, the image data of symbol "9" which is a reference symbol is registered as a lower front symbol. The image data is automatically registered in the image index area of the display information area 2.
Next, k = 5 and the sixth line where the behavior code is set is the specified line, and object index (display information area No.) 2 and behavior index (behavior No.) 0 are set as parameters Therefore, the answer to step D841 is YES, and the behavior index setting process of step D866 is executed, and the behavior index (behavior No.) for the character (namely, pattern “9”) corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) 2 .) 0 is set.

Next, k becomes 6, and the seventh line in which the move 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index (display information area No.) 0 etc. is set as the parameter, so Yes in step D832. The image of the object index (display information area No.) 0 according to the coordinate data and display size data on the seventh line is executed (that is, the symbol “ The display setting of 2 ") is performed. Here, the designated coordinates and designated size data are written in the area of the designated character (that is, the character corresponding to the display information area 0) by the movement 1 code.
Next, k = 7, and the eighth line on which the move 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index (display information area No.) 1 etc. is set as the parameter, so Yes in step D832. The image of the object index (display information area No.) 1 according to the coordinate data and display size data in the eighth line is executed (that is, the symbol “ The display setting of 1 ′ ′) is performed.

Next, k becomes k = 8, and the ninth line in which the move 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index (display information area No.) 2 etc. is set as the parameter, so Yes in Step D832. The image of the object index (display information area No.) 2 according to the coordinate data and display size data in the ninth line is executed (ie, the symbol “ The display setting of 9 ") is performed.
Next, k becomes 9 and the tenth line in which the end code is set is the designated line, so Yes is step D842 and loop processing is ended and the process returns in step D844.
Thus, the first one frame shown by (a) in FIG. 136 is completed. Note that since the data up to the end code is a block of data drawn in one frame, each frame cycle (the above-described processing is also performed for the second and subsequent frames shown in (b), (c) and (d) in FIG. The cycle is performed similarly, for example, every 1/30 seconds. As long as there is no additional code or deletion code, since the character information of the previous frame is taken over, only coordinates and size data are specified in the second and subsequent frames.

[Bitmap addition processing]
Next, details of the bit map addition process (step D851) in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. The bitmap addition process is a process of adding a still image character as a display object as described above.
When the bitmap addition process is started, first, the motion list table address (that is, the motion list table to be controlled this time and data specifying the row) is loaded from the motion list table area in the motion management area X. Then (step D871), the process proceeds to step D872.
In step D 872, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or larger than the maximum display element number. If it is equal to or larger than the maximum display element number (step D 872: Y), the object can not be added. If the addition processing is completed and it is less than the maximum display element number (step D 872: N), the process proceeds to step D 873. Here, the maximum number of display elements is a limit value of the number of displays (the number of objects to be controlled) that can be handled by one motion, taking into consideration the hard limit of VDP 312 and the capacity of VRAM 326 (the area of moving images etc.). In this example, it is set to 18 (still image 16 + moving image 2). However, 18 is only an example and is not limited to this.

  In step D873, the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays is set (step D873). For example, when the addition of an object is performed for the first time, since the number of displays is 1, the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays 1 in the motion management area X is set. As a specific example, for example, the display information area of the motion management area 5 (the motion management area for the left symbol) is the first for the next symbol, the second for the current symbol, and the third for the third previous symbol There is one. Now, for example, assuming that the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. 136, and the command position k = 0, the command in the first line which is the specified line is This process is executed because it is an additional 1 code, but in this case, the display information area for the first next symbol corresponding to the display number 1 among the three display information areas of the motion management area 5 (display In order to set the data of the object (character No. 2 (symbol "2") designated by the parameter of the first line in the information area 0), in the step D873, for the first next symbol The address of the display information area of is set. Similarly, an object specified by the parameter of the third line in the display information area (display information area 1) for the second current symbol corresponding to the display number 2 when k = 2 (specified line is the third line) Since the data of (character No. 1 (symbol "1") is to be set, the address of the display information area for the second present symbol is set in step D873, and k = 4 (designated line Is the fifth line, an object (character No. 9 (pattern “9”) designated by the parameter of the fifth line in the display information area (display information area 2) for the third previous symbol corresponding to the display number 3 In order to set the data ")), the address of the display information area for the third previous symbol is set in step D873.

  Note that “Displayed number” set (stored) in the motion management area basically indicates the MAX number of displayed objects (that is, the number of all objects set as the control target), but as in this process In the additional processing, the number of objects changes by +1 because the number of objects increases (for example, updated in step D881 described later), but such additional processing is not performed. The displayed number will indicate the MAX number of objects to be displayed.

Next, each data of one display information area (hereinafter referred to as "target display information area") specified by the address set in step D873 is cleared to 0 (step D874). Once all the values of the target display information area are set to 0, an initial value is set to the necessary area. Here, it is only one display information area corresponding to the number of displays to be cleared to 0.
Next, an undefined value (for example, “−1”) is saved as the value of the behavior index (behavior No.) in the target display information area (step D875). This is to set a state without a behavior as an initial value. In this example, even when the value of the behavior index (behavior No.) is 0 (when the behavior index (behavior No.) 0 is specified as in the parameters in lines 2, 4 and 6 in FIG. 136), , Behavior (replacement of symbols etc) is present.

Then, the still picture information is saved as data of the display type in the target display information area (step D876). That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a still image is set.
Next, the address (motion table name) of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (specified row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D871) (step D877). This is the same process as step D823 described above.

Next, the still image index corresponding to the command position k is obtained (step D878). Here, the still picture index is a registration number of a still picture character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 325), and is a parameter for specifying a line of the still picture ROM member list table. Now, for example, assuming that the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. 136, and the command position k = 0, it is specified in the first line which is the specified line. Objects are character no. Since it is 2 (design "2"), in the above-mentioned step D878, the value of the still picture index which designates the line corresponding to design "2" is acquired.
Next, the value of the still image index acquired in step D878 is saved as an image index (step D879). The image index is information indicating a specific character (image such as a still image or a moving image) as an object to be displayed, and is information used in step E51 or the like in the effect display editing process described later.

Next, the command position is updated to the next record (step D880). That is, updating is performed to increase the value k of the command position by one. When motion command execution processing is executed in the next cycle, control is performed with the next line of the motion table as the designated line.
Next, since an object is added by this processing, the value of the display number in the motion management area X is updated by 1 (step D881), and the bitmap addition processing is ended thereafter.

The contents of each parameter of the still picture ROM member list table are as follows.
-Image address offset: Indicates an offset value to an address at which the character is stored in the character ROM.
Palette address offset: Indicates an offset value to an address at which pallet data used by the character is stored in the character ROM. Locations using different pallets will have different offset values.
The width and height of the image: This represents the size of the original image of the character. For example, the unit is pixel. It becomes various values for each character. In addition, the size of the character drawn on the design may be slightly different in the normal design, for example, and the size of the appearance may be different. Adjust the size, and if the characters of the same category are set to be the same size.
Width on VRAM: This refers to the width when the character is expanded to VRAM. If you use lossy compression or drop the number of bits in the color palette, the size will be smaller.
· Compression type of image: Indicates the compression type of each character stored in the character ROM. As this compression type, for example, the following types 0 to 6 are available. There may be other types than these.
0: 32 bit full color image compression 1: 8 bit full color image compression 2: 4 bit full color image compression 3: lossless compression 32 bit full color image 4: lossless compression 8 bit full color image 5: lossless compression 4 bit full color image 6: lossy compression image / image Size after compression; indicates capacity after compression of image data (character data). It is used as a parameter or the like at the time of data transfer from the character ROM (image ROM 325) to the VRAM 326.
The category setting of the still image ROM member list table described above is an example,
Other parameters may be set.

[Video addition processing]
Next, details of the moving image addition process (step D852) in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. The movie addition process is a process of adding a movie character as a display object, as described above.
When the moving image addition process is started, first, the address of the motion list table is loaded (step D891) as in step D871, and the process proceeds to step D892.
In step D 892, as in step D 872, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or larger than the maximum display element number. If it is equal to or larger than the maximum display element number (step D 892; Y) If the addition processing is completed and the number is smaller than the maximum display element number (step D892; N), the process proceeds to step D893.

In step D893, as in step D873, the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays is set (step D893), and in the same manner as step D874, one specified by the address set in step D893. Each data of one display information area (target display information area) is cleared to 0 (step D894).
Next, as in step D875, an undefined value (for example, "-1") is saved as the value of the behavior index (behavior No.) in the target display information area (step D895), and the same as step D877. The address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (specified row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D891) (step D896).

  Next, a moving image index corresponding to the command position k is obtained and prepared (step D897), and the process proceeds to step D898. Here, the moving image index is a registration number of a moving image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 325), and is a parameter for specifying a line of the moving image ROM member list table.

  At step D898, the data of the encoding type (described later) in the specified row of the moving picture ROM member list table corresponding to the value of the moving picture index obtained at step D897 is read, and the moving picture encoding to be added based on this data If it is determined that the type is an I picture moving image and if it is an I picture moving image (step D898; Y), the process proceeds to step D899, and if it is not an I picture moving image (step D898; N), the process proceeds to step D904. Note that an I picture means frame data of an image that can be decoded alone without performing inter-frame prediction, and an I picture moving image means a moving image made up of only I pictures.

In step D899, an initial value "-1" is set as data of a frame count number for I picture (frame count in moving picture of only I picture) in a target display information area (step D899). Note that if “−1” is set as the initial value, the frame count number for I picture will start from “0”.
Next, I picture moving image information is saved as data of display type in the target display information area (step D900). That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is an I picture moving image is set.
Next, the value of the moving image index acquired in step D897 is saved as an image index (step D901), and the process proceeds to step D902.

In step D904, a loop playback flag is set to instruct the VDP 312 to loop the moving image (step D904). In addition, the setting which does not loop is also possible.
Next, a moving picture decoding area securing process (step D905) for securing a storage area of a RAM (RAM in the CPU 311) for decoding moving picture data is executed, and the process proceeds to step D906.
At step D906, as a result of the moving image decoding area securing process, it is determined whether the area has been correctly allocated. If the area is correctly allocated (step D906; Y), the process proceeds to step D907. In step D906; N), the moving image addition process is ended. In addition, it becomes No when the area can not be secured correctly due to the capacity over or the like.
In step D 907, normal moving image information is saved as data of the display type in the target display information area (step D 907). That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a normal moving image (that is, not an I picture moving image) is set.
Next, the value of the index of the area allocated by the moving image decoding area securing process is saved as an image index (step D908), and the process goes to step D902.

  In step D902, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D902), and as in step D881, the value of the display number in the motion management area X is updated by +1 (step D903), the video addition process is ended.

The contents of each parameter of the moving picture ROM member list table are as follows.
-Video address offset: Indicates an offset value to an address at which the movie is stored in the character ROM.
The width and height of the moving image: This represents the size of the original image of the movie. For example, the unit is pixel. As in the case of the still image, the size of the movie of the same category is adjusted in the transparent portion so as to be the same.
The number of frames of the moving image: Indicates how many continuous pictures the movie consists of. In this example, the control of 1 second = 30 frames is performed, so a movie is created with that in mind. When the control is performed to 60 frames per second, double speed reproduction is performed. The reverse is also true.

Α value setting: information indicating whether the movie contains alpha channel information or not. 0 = no alpha, 1 = alpha. With alpha, you can change the transparency of the movie. If not, it will only be opaque.
Encoding type: Indicates how the movie is organized. There are the following types 0-2:
0 = consists only of I pictures 1 = composition including I pictures and P pictures of one reference (refer to one past I picture or P picture to make the P picture)
2 = A configuration including two reference P pictures in addition to the above 1 (the P picture is created with reference to one past I or P and two past I or P)
However, the present invention is not limited to the above encoding type, and may be configured to include, for example, a B picture.
The category setting of the moving image ROM member list table described above is an example,
Other parameters may be set.

[One-point specification object move processing]
Next, the details of the one-point designation object moving process (step D857) in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the one-point specification object movement process is started, first, the address of the motion list table is loaded (step D911) as in step D871, and the designated line of the target motion list table is loaded (step D911). The address of the motion table is acquired from the specified row of the motion list table specified by the specified address (step D912).

Next, an object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table identified by the address acquired in step D912 (step D913). For example, if FIG. 136 shows the target motion table and k = 6 (the designated line is the seventh line), this process is executed because the command is the move 1 code. In this case, the seventh line Since the object index (display information area No.) is 0, 0 is obtained as the object index (display information area No.) in step D913.
Next, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) acquired in step D913 is set (step D914). For example, in the case of k = 6 (designated line is the seventh line) in FIG. 136, the object index (display information area No.) 0 is the symbol “2” (next symbol) added in the first line. The address of the first display information area (display information area 0) corresponding to the symbol is set.
Next, X coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired (step D915), and the display upper-left point of the display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D914, hereinafter the same in this processing) is displayed. The X coordinate data acquired in step D915 is saved as the X coordinate and the X coordinate of the display lower left point (step D916).
Next, Y coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired (step D 917), and the Y coordinate data acquired in step D 917 is used as the Y coordinate of the display upper left point and the Y coordinate of the display upper right point in the target display information area. Save (step D918).

Next, width data and height data corresponding to the command position k are acquired (step D919), and the width data acquired in step D919 is added to the X coordinate data acquired in step D915 (step D920). The addition result is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper right point in the target display information area (step D 921).
Next, the height data acquired in step D919 is added to the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917 (step D922), and the addition result is saved as the Y coordinate of the display lower left point in the target display information area (step D923) ).
Next, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D924), and the one-point specification object moving process is ended.

  According to the steps D915 to D923, the following operation is realized. For example, in the case of k = 6 (designated line is the seventh line) in FIG. 136, X coordinate data is “0”, Y coordinate data is “−493” (minus indicates the position outside display screen 41 a on display screen 41 a upper side) The image data width is “296”, and the image data height is “518”. For this reason, "0" is acquired in the step D915, "-493" is acquired in the step D917, and "296" and "518" are acquired in the step D919. Then, the addition result of the step D920 is "296" (= 0 + 296), and the addition result of the step D922 is "25" (= -493 + 518). Therefore, "0" is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper left point and the display lower left point in the step D916, and "-493" is saved as the Y coordinate of the display upper left point and the display upper right point in the step D918. Then, "296" is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper right point, and "25" is saved as the Y coordinate of the display lower left point in step D923. As a result, the display position of the target object (in this case, the next symbol "2") is set as three coordinate points (display upper left point, display lower left point, display upper right point) (see FIG. 137 (a)) . In the case of this embodiment, since the position of the upper left corner on the display screen 41a is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), all Y coordinates set for the target object are negative values. In some cases, the display position of the target object is set outside the display screen 41a on the upper side of the display screen 41a, and the image of the target object is not yet visible on the display screen 41a.

As described above, according to the one-point designation object movement process, although it is a method of one-point designation, three points are designated as a result. The reason is that the object (character) has a quadrilateral shape, so if there are reference point coordinates at the upper left and height data and width data of the object, the upper right point and lower left as in steps D920 and D922 above. This is because the coordinates of the point can be obtained. As described above, in the display information area in the motion management area, there is an area into which each coordinate value of three points determined in this way is put (see FIG. 106 (c)), and in the above steps D916, D918, D921, D923, We are registering to the area.
Although the detailed description of the three-point specified object moving process (step D858) in the above-described motion command execution process is omitted, a process similar to that of the one-point specified object moving process described above is performed. It will be. However, in the case of three-point specification, since each coordinate data is on the motion table, addition processing like steps D920 and D922 described above is unnecessary, and all the coordinate data acquired from the motion table is left as it is The processing content is only for saving in each area of the display information area.

[Effect type specification process]
Next, details of the effect type designation process (step D859) in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 121 (a).
When the effect type designation process is started, first, the address of the motion list table is loaded (step D931) as in step D871, and the designated line of the target motion list table (the address loaded in step D931) The address of the motion table is acquired from the specified row of the list table for motion specified by (step D932).

Next, the object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table identified by the address acquired in step D932 (step D933), and the object index acquired in step D933 The address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to (display information area No.) is set (step D934).
Next, data of an effect type corresponding to the command position k is acquired (step D935), and an effect type in the target display information area (display information area whose address is set in step D934, hereinafter the same in this processing) is obtained. , Save the data acquired in step D935 (step D936).
Next, the data of the effect parameter, the foreground color, and the background color in the target display information area are cleared (steps D937 to D939), and the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880 (step D940), finish the effect type designation process.

  In the effect type designation process described above, for example, the type of blending method when displaying a plurality of objects superimposed is set. That is, for example, the effect type (1) is a kind of effect that gives transparency (transparency), and the effect that gives transparency has the same display position as the image of the display layer behind (back side) that is overlapped with the front. The processing can be said to be processing of mixing (blending) with the image of the display layer of and in this processing, the type of the blend is set.

[Effect parameter specification processing]
Next, the details of the effect parameter designation process (step D860) in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 121 (b).
When the effect parameter designation process is started, first, the address of the motion list table is loaded (step D941) as in step D871, and the designated row of the target motion list table (the address loaded in step D941) The address of the motion table is acquired from the specified row of the list table for motion specified by (step D942).

Next, an object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table identified by the address acquired in step D942 (step D943), and the object index acquired in step D943 The address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to (display information area No.) is set (step D944).
Next, data of an effect parameter corresponding to the command position k is acquired (step D945), and it is used as an effect parameter in the target display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D944, hereinafter the same in this processing). , And save the data acquired in step D945 (step D946).

Here, the effect parameter indicates the ratio of the transparency (darkness) of the object at the time of blending. Assuming that the value of the effect parameter is P, in the case of the present example, data in which the transparency percentage is converted to the “P / 255” numerator is defined on the table. Specifically, for example, when 100% is a normal display (without transparency), the parameter P is 25 (≒ 255 × 10/100) in the case of display with a density of about 10%. For example, when the value of the parameter P is 7, the transparency is about 2.7% (= 100 × 7/255), which is quite thin. However, when 100% display is performed, the effect type specification process and the effect parameter specification process are not executed.
Then, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D947), and the effect parameter specification process is ended.

Object deletion processing
Next, details of the object deletion process (step D862) in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. The object deletion process is a process of deleting an object that does not appear.
When the object deletion process is started, first, the address of the motion list table is loaded (step D951) as in step D871, and the process proceeds to step D952.
In step D 952, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is 0 or less, and if it is 0 or less (step D 952; Y), there is no display number (ie, deletion is made) Since there is no object), the object deletion process is ended, and if it is not 0 or less (step D952; N), the process proceeds to step D953.

In step D953, the motion table address is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (specified row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D951) (step D953), An object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table identified by the address acquired in step D953 (step D954).
Next, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) acquired in step D954 is set (step D955), and the process proceeds to step D956.

In step D956, it is determined whether data of display type in the motion management area X is normal moving picture information. If normal moving picture information is detected (step D956; Y), moving picture decoding area release processing (step D957) is performed. After execution, the process proceeds to step D958, and if it is not normal moving picture information (step D956; N), that is, if it is an I picture moving picture, the process proceeds to step D958 without executing step D957.
In step D958, information in the display information area after the acquired object index (display information area No.) is shifted (moved) forward (step D958). That is, in the motion management area X, the data in the display information area after the address set in step D955 is shifted by one to the previous display information area. As a result, the data in the display information area of the address set in step D955 is deleted, and the object corresponding to the deleted data is deleted.
Next, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D959), and since the object is deleted by this processing, the value of the display number in the motion management area X is updated by -1 (step D960) ), End the object deletion process.

Object change processing
Next, the details of the object change process (step D863) in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. The object change process is a process of replacing the displayed character.
When the object change process is started, first, the address of the motion list table is loaded (step D 961) as in step D 871, and the designated row of the target motion list table (the address loaded in step D 961) The motion table address is acquired from the designated row of the motion list table (step D962), and the object index corresponding to the command position k from the target motion table identified by the address obtained in step D962 (Display information area No.) is acquired (step D963).

Next, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) acquired in step D963 is set (step D964), and the target motion table is displayed. The index (the still image index or the moving image index described above) of the changed character (character after change) corresponding to the command position k is obtained (step D965), and the value of the index obtained in step D965 is saved as an image index Step D966). As a result, an object change in which only an image (a character such as a symbol or a character) changes is realized.
Next, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D967), and the object change process is ended.

Object video decoding process
Next, details of the object moving image decoding process (step D864) in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the object moving image decoding process is started, first, the address of the motion list table is loaded (step D971) as in step D871, and the designated row of the target motion list table (the address loaded in step D971) The address of the motion table is acquired from the specified row of the list table for motion specified by (step D972).

Next, an object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table identified by the address acquired in step D972 (step D973), and the object index acquired in step D973 The address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to (display information area No.) is set (step D 974), and the process proceeds to step D 975.
In step D975, it is determined whether data of display type in the motion management area X is I picture moving image information. If it is I picture moving image information (step D975; Y), the process proceeds to step D977 and I picture moving image If it is not information (step D 975; N), the process proceeds to step D 976.
At step D977, the I picture frame count number (frame count for moving pictures of I pictures only) in the target display information area (the display information area to which the address is set in step D974, hereinafter the same applies to this processing) The address of the area is set (step D977), the I picture frame count data in the target display information area is updated by +1 based on the address set in step D977 (step D978), and the process proceeds to step D979. .

In step D979, it is determined whether or not the I picture frame count number updated in step D978 is greater than or equal to the number of moving image frames (the number of moving image frames corresponding to image index data at this time). If it is (step D979; Y), the process proceeds to step D980, and if it is not the moving image frame number or more (step D979; N), the process proceeds to step D983.
At step D980, the moving image specified by the image index (in this case, the moving image index) is displayed until the last frame, so that the I-picture frame count in the target display information area is started to restart the moving image from the beginning. The number data is set to 0 (start value) (step D980), and the process goes to step D983.

In step D976, it is determined whether data of display type in the motion management area X is normal moving image information. If it is normal moving image information (step D976; Y), the process proceeds to step D981. In (Step D976; N), the object moving image decoding process is ended as abnormal.
At step D981, data registered as an image index at this time (in this case, data of the moving image index) is loaded and prepared (step D981), and one of the moving images corresponding to the index loaded at step D981. A moving image decoding process (step D982) for decoding (decoding) frames is executed, and the process proceeds to step D983.
In step D983, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D983), and the object moving image decoding process is ended.
In the case of I picture moving picture, since the picture of each frame is present independently, the number of frames may be managed. When the internal register of VDP 312 is designated later, the count (frame count number for I picture) becomes important.

Behavioral index setting process
Next, the details of the behavior index setting process (step D866) in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the behavior index setting process is started, first, the address of the motion list table is loaded (step D991) as in step D871, and the designated row of the target motion list table (the address loaded in step D991) The address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the motion list table designated by (step D992). In addition, the behavior table name corresponding to the address of the behavior table is also set in the designated row of the motion list table (in some cases, however, it may be NULL).

Next, an object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table identified by the address acquired in step D992 (step D993). For example, if FIG. 136 shows the target motion table and k = 1 (the designated line is the second line), this process is executed because the command is a behavior code. In this case, an object of k = 1 Since the index (display information area No.) is “0”, 0 is acquired as the object index (display information area No.) in step D993.
Next, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) acquired in step D993 is set (step D994). For example, in the case of k = 1 in FIG. 136, the object index (display information area No.) 0 is the “next symbol” added at k = 0 (first line), so this corresponds to “next symbol” The address of the display information area is set.

Next, the data of the behavior index (behavior No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired (step D995), and the target display information area (the display information area for which the address is set in step D994) The data acquired in step D995 is saved as a behavior index (behavior No.) in step D99) (step D996). For example, in the case of k = 1 in FIG. 136, since the behavior index (behavior No.) is “0”, this is obtained in step D995 and is set in the target display information area in step D996.
Next, as in the step D 880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D 997), and the behavior index setting process is ended.

  The behavior table is a table (a data table registered in the PROM 321) consisting of lines in which the processing address of the behavior (replacement of characters) is set, and a specific line (designated line) of the lines is designated. Is the behavior index (behavior No.). Therefore, when the values of the behavior table and the behavior index (behavior No.) are determined, the processing address of the behavior is determined, and the content of the behavior is specified. This processing is performing control processing for specifying the content of such a behavior. For example, the second line of k = 1 in FIG. 136 indicates the behavior (character's number) specified by the behavior index (behavior No.) 0 for the object (the next pattern) of the object index (display information area No.) 0. Since the execution of replacement is instructed, the setting of the target information display area is performed accordingly. The behavior specified by the behavior index (behavior No.) 0 is, for example, control such as replacing the decorative pattern of the special drawing with a predetermined pattern to be displayed from the basic pattern (reference pattern).

[Effect display editing process]
Next, details of the effect display editing process (step D31) in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIGS. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 and parameters thereof as described in the main process. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands thus set are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instruction for screen drawing) of the main process.
When the effect display editing process is started, the loop process A of steps E1 to E50 is repeatedly executed by the number of motion management areas, and then the effect display editing process is ended. The loop process A includes the loop process B of steps E6 to E48, and the loop process B includes the loop process C of steps E39 to E43.

In loop processing A, the process is executed from step E2 for the motion control area X (ie, motion control area 0 at first) with X = 0 initially, and the address area of the motion control area is updated at step E49 (ie X = X + 1), it is determined in the next step E50 whether the loop processing A has been completed for all motion management areas (in this example, whether X = 14), and the determination result in step E50 is Yes When it becomes (i.e., when the ending condition of the loop processing A is satisfied), the effect display editing processing is ended, and when No, the loop processing A is repeated from step E2.
Hereinafter, the process after step E2 will be described.
At step E2, it is determined whether the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, and if it is NULL (step E2; Y), control on the motion management area X is unnecessary and the process proceeds to step E49. If not NULL (step E2; N), the process proceeds to step E3. When it is determined as NULL (Yes) in step E2 and the process proceeds to step E49, the following processes including the loop process B and the loop process C are not naturally performed for the motion management area X.

At step E3, the motion list table to be controlled this time is loaded and prepared (step E3), and all blend information areas are cleared (step E4). The blend information area is an area in a RAM (RAM in the CPU 311) for storing information of parameters of internal registers of the VDP 312 for comparison between old and new. That is, in the VDP 312, there are four types of internal register parameters that indicate inter-pixel operation fixed values at the time of blending for effects. An area for storing the current setting information and the previous setting information is provided in the RAM in the CPU 311 for each of the four types of parameters, and this is a blend information area.
Next, parameters for inter-pixel operation (that is, four types of parameters set in the internal register of VDP 312) are set (step E5), and the process proceeds to step E6.

  In step E6, loop processing B is started. In loop processing B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed until the final value (final value = displayed number-1) is reached while incrementing the variable i from the initial value 0 by an increment 1 and then the process proceeds to step E49. That is, at step E6, immediately after the start of the loop, the variable i is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E7. In step E48, if the variable i is less than the final value, the process returns to step E6. If the variable i is equal to or more than the final value, the process proceeds to step E49. Then, returning to step E6, the value of the variable i is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step E7. The value of the final value is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the data of the display number set in the motion management area X. That is, in the loop processing B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed by the number of displayed images, and then the process proceeds to step E49.

The processes after step E7 will be described below.
At step E7, the color parameter of the internal register of VDP 312 is set to correspond to the α value (step E7), and the α flag used for processing to be described later is set to α (step E8). The address of the display information area (hereinafter referred to as "target display information area") corresponding to the variable i in is loaded (step E9), and the process proceeds to step E10.
In step E10, the value of the behavior index (behavior No.) in the display information area of the address loaded in step E9 is read, and it is determined whether data of some behavior index (behavior No.) not NULL is set. If it is set (step E10; Y), the process corresponding to the behavior index (step E11) is performed and then the process proceeds to step E12. If not set (step E10; N), step E11 is performed. To step E12 without executing.

The process corresponding to the behavior index (behavior No.) executed in step E11 is the behavior specified by the behavior index (behavior No.) for the object (target object) corresponding to the target display information area. This processing is for executing (replacement of image data), and is processing specified by the processing address set in the row specified by the behavior index in the behavior table described above.
For example, if the object of interest is the actual symbol of the left symbol, processing (display left symbol conversion processing) of the flowchart shown in FIG. 129 (a) described later is executed in the above-mentioned step E11. In the present application, specific examples of the process executed in step E11 are also shown in FIGS. 129 (b) and (c) and FIG. 130, but the details thereof will be described later.
In addition, when step E11 is executed, the data of the image index is changed immediately before display, for example, the basic symbol is replaced by a predetermined symbol to be displayed, or the color of the PB (push button) image is changed from the basic color It may be replaced by a predetermined color (for example, a specific color representing the jackpot reliability) according to the gaming state. Since the display pattern of the character defined on the motion table has become fixed, basically, unless the motion table is changed, it is not possible to cope with different notice symbols etc. due to different stop patterns and different distributions for each change. . Therefore, in this example, the behavior is embedded in the necessary place and the process of replacing the character is performed so that the flexible response can be performed.

  At step E12, data of the effect type set in the target display information area is read, and it is determined whether this is a basic blend, an additive blend, or a subtractive blend (steps E12 to E14). If it corresponds to the blend type, the process proceeds to step E15, and if it does not correspond to any blend type, the process proceeds to step E21.

In step E15, the value of the effect parameter set in the target display information area is loaded and applied to the color parameter (step E15), and then the process proceeds to step E16.
In step E16, it is determined from the data such as the display type set in the target display information area whether the drawing designation is normal video non-playback playback and normal video non-playback playback (step E16; Y) In step E17, if the normal moving image is not transparently reproduced (step E16; N), the process proceeds to step E21.
When it proceeds to step E17, it is determined whether the target moving image (the one determined to be non-transparent reproduction of the normal moving image in step E16) is registered without α, and is registered without α (step E17; Y ) Set the α flag to no α (step E18), proceed to step E21, and if not registered without α (step E17; N), proceed to step E21 without executing step E18. .

At step E21, the data of the effect type set in the target display information area is read, and this is additive blend, subtraction blend, multiplication blend, screen blend, difference blend, comparison (dark) blend It is determined whether each is a reverse blend (steps E21 to E27), and if it corresponds to any blend type, the corresponding process (the corresponding process of steps E31 to E37) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step E39, If it does not correspond to the blend type either, the process proceeds to step E28.
Here, step E31 is a process (process for setting a drawing effect of addition type) to be executed in the case of addition blending, and a step E32 is a process (for setting a drawing effect of subtraction type) to be performed in the case of subtraction blending Step E33 is a process executed in the case of multiplication blending (process for setting a drawing effect of multiplication type), and step E34 is a process executed in the case of screen blending (a drawing effect of screen type) Step E35 is a process to be executed in the case of difference blending (process to set a drawing effect of difference type), and step E36 is a process to be executed in the case of comparison (dark) blending (dark Step E37 is a process of setting the drawing effect of the A process that is executed if (processing for setting a drawing effect of inverting type).

At step E28, it is judged that the setting of the α flag is not α, and if α is not (step E23; Y), the drawing effect without α is set (step E29), and the process proceeds to step E39. If α is not present (step E23; N), that is, if α is present, a drawing effect of α is set (step E38), and the process proceeds to step E39.
In steps E29 and E31 to E38, various parameters (four types in this example) for blending are set in the corresponding blend information area according to the setting of the effect type etc. of the target display information area. There is.

At step E39, loop processing C is started. In loop processing C, steps E39 to E43 are repeatedly executed until the final value (final value = 3) while increasing the variable j corresponding to the four types of blend information areas described above from the initial value 0 by an increment 1 and thereafter Proceed to E44.
That is, at step E39, immediately after the start of the loop, the variable j is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E40.
In step E40, it is determined whether the blend information area corresponding to variable j has been changed. If it has been changed (step E40; Y), the process proceeds to step E41. If it has not been changed (step E40; N) The process proceeds to step E43. Here, the determination in step E40 is performed by determining that the previous data and the current data of the corresponding blend information area do not match if they do not match, and determining that they do not change if they match.
At step E41, the inter-pixel operation fixed value of the resist parameter corresponding to the variable j is set in the internal register of VDP 312 (step E41), and the present blend information is set as the previous blend information (step E42). , Step E43.

At step E43, if the variable j is less than the final value, the process returns to step E39. If the variable j is the final value, the loop process C is exited and the process proceeds to step E44. Then, returning to step E39, the value of the variable j is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step E40.
The reason why there are four ranges of the variable j is because, as described above, there are four types of parameters of the internal register for instructing the VDP 312 to calculate the inter-pixel operation fixed value at the time of blending. In addition, areas corresponding to each register (blend information area) are provided for the previous and for the current, and the setting process of step E41 is performed only when the new and old data of the blend information area are compared and disagreed. This is to set the register of the VDP 312 only when the value to be changed changes (for the efficiency of setting process to the VDP).

At step E44, the data of the display type (display type) set in the target display information area is read, and it is judged whether it is a still image, a normal moving image, an I picture moving image or a single color rectangle respectively Steps E44 to E47) After performing corresponding processing (corresponding processing among steps E51 and E52, steps E53 and E54, or steps E55 to E57) as long as any display type other than single color square is applied At E58, if it is a monochrome square, the process proceeds to step E59. If it does not correspond to any display type, the process proceeds to step E48.
Here, steps E51 and E52 are executed in the case of a still image, load data of an image index in step E51, and set an attribute of still image data based on data of the loaded image index in step E52. Execute the process After passing through step E52, the character drawing process (step E58) is executed based on the data loaded in step E51 and the setting of step E52.

Further, steps E53 and E54 are executed in the case of a normal moving image, load data of an image index in step E53, and set an attribute of normal moving image data based on data of the loaded image index in step E54. Execute the process After passing through step E54, a character drawing process (step E58) is executed based on the data loaded in step E53 and the setting of step E54.
Further, steps E55 to E57 are executed in the case of I picture moving picture, load the data of the image index in step E55, and count the frame count for I picture from the target display information area in step E56 In step E57, processing such as setting of an attribute of I picture moving image data is executed based on the loaded data. After passing through step E57, character drawing processing (step E58) is executed based on the data loaded in steps E55 and E56 and the setting of step E57.
Further, step E59 is executed in the case of a single-color square, and a process of drawing a rectangular image (a single-color square image) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) 326a of the VRAM 326 (ie, sprite of the rectangular image into the virtual drawing space 326a Paste processing).
After step E58 or step E59, the process proceeds to step E48.

At step E48, it is determined whether the variable i of the loop process B has reached the final value (the number of displayed items-1). If it has reached, the loop process B is exited and the process proceeds to step E49. It returns to E6 and repeats loop processing B.
In step E49, the number X of the target motion management area is updated by 1 (step E49), and the process proceeds to step E50.
At step E50, it is determined whether X has reached the final value (14 in this example) of the loop processing A. If it has reached, the loop processing A is exited and the effect display editing processing is ended, and if it has not reached Returning to step E1, loop processing A is repeated from step E2.

  In the step of setting the attributes of steps E52, E54 and E57, a process of transferring the character data (still image data or moving image data) from the character ROM (image ROM 325) to the VRAM 326 is also performed simultaneously. However, when the same one already exists in VRAM 326, this data transfer is not performed. Also, in the case of a single-color square, this data transfer is not necessary because the data in the character ROM is not used. Here, the attribute is basic information of the character, and includes, for example, α mode, color mode (how many colors are displayed, etc.), character size, color palette specification, and the like.

[Character drawing process]
Next, the details of the character drawing process (step E58) in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the character drawing process is started, first, at step E61, data of the X coordinate of the display upper left point and the X coordinate of the display lower left point from the target display information area (display information area corresponding to the variable i) in the motion management area X Are read to determine whether they match, and if they match (step E61; Y), the process proceeds to step E62, and if they do not match (step E61; N), the process proceeds to step E77.
At step E62, data of the Y coordinate of the display upper left point and the Y coordinate of the display upper right point are read out from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and it is determined whether they match or not (step E62) Y: Proceed to step E63, and if they do not match (step E62; N), proceed to step E77.
If the image is a quadrangle (rectangle), the determination result in steps E61 and E62 is Yes and the process proceeds to step E63, but if it is a triangular character (an image of a triangle), any determination is No Control then proceeds to step E77.
At step E77, a triangular character drawing process (step E77) is performed to end the character drawing process.

At step E63, the X coordinate data of the display upper left point is read out from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the upper left base point X coordinate of the character (step E63). Data of the Y coordinate of the display upper left point is read out from the target display information area, and this is set as the upper left base Y coordinate of the character (step E64).
Next, the X coordinate of the display upper right point and the X coordinate of the display upper left point are read out from the display information area of the object in the motion management area X, and their difference (= X coordinate of display upper right point-X coordinate of display upper left point) Are set as character width data (step E65), and the Y coordinate of the display lower left point and the Y coordinate of the display upper left point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and their difference (= display lower left The Y coordinate of the point-the Y coordinate of the upper left display point) is set as height data of the character (step E66).
Subsequently, no horizontal flip and no vertical flip are set (step E67), and the process goes to step E68. Here, horizontal flip means image inversion in the horizontal direction (X coordinate direction), and vertical flip means image inversion in the vertical direction (Y coordinate direction).

At step E68, it is determined whether the width data set at step E65 is less than 0 (ie, a negative value). If it is less than 0 (step E68; Y), there is a horizontal flip, so the process proceeds to step E69. If it is not less than 0 (step E68; N), the process proceeds to step E72 because there is no horizontal flip.
At step E69, the X coordinate data of the display upper left point is read out from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the addition result obtained by adding the width data (minus value) set at step E65 to the upper left of the character The base point X coordinate is updated and set (step E69), the width data (minus value) set in step E65 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new width data (step E70).
Next, processing is performed to set the presence of horizontal flip (change the setting in step E67) (step E71), and the process proceeds to step E72.

In step E72, it is determined whether the height data set in step E66 is less than 0 (ie, a negative value). If it is less than 0 (step E72; Y), vertical flipping is present, so step E73 is performed. If not (step E72; N), the process proceeds to step E76 since there is no vertical flip.
At step E73, the Y coordinate data of the display upper left point is read out from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the addition result obtained by adding the height data (minus value) set at step E66 to this is the character The upper left base point Y coordinate is updated and set (step E73), and the height data (minus value) set in step E66 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new height data (step E74).
Next, processing is performed to set the presence of vertical flip (change the setting in step E67) (step E75), and the process proceeds to step E76.
When the process proceeds to step E76, an image (designation of a predetermined character corresponding to data of the image index loaded in any of the steps E51, E53, and E55) based on the settings of the processes (steps E63 to E75). A process of drawing an image) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) 326a of the VRAM 326 (ie, a process of pasting a sprite of an image of a predetermined character (designated image) into the virtual drawing space 326a) (step E76), End the character drawing process.

[Display left symbol conversion process]
Next, the details of the display left symbol conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (a).
When the display left symbol conversion process is started, first, data of the image index (data before replacement by behavior) is loaded (step E81), and data of the index (symbol number) of the current symbol (left) to be displayed (For example, the data set in step D727 or D747 described above) is loaded (step E82). In addition, in the case of this example, since there are nine types of symbols, the data of the index (symbol number) of the symbol (the decorative symbol of the special figure) is any numerical value from 0 to 8.

  Next, the data of the index of the current symbol (left) loaded in step E82 is added to the data of the index of the current symbol (left) set in the image index loaded in step E81, and this addition result is used as the update index After setting (step E83), the process proceeds to step E84. For example, when the value of the image index before replacement (conversion) loaded in step E81 is 0, and the data of the index of the current symbol (left) to be replaced loaded in step E82 is 6, the above At step E83, 6 (= 0 + 6) is set as the value of the update index.

At step E84, it is determined whether the data of the update index set at step E83 exceeds the symbol upper limit (8 in this example), and if it exceeds (step E84; Y), the process proceeds to step E85. If it does not exceed (step E84; N), the process proceeds to step E86.
At step E85, a value obtained by adding 1 to the symbol upper limit (9 in this example) is subtracted from the value of the update index, and the result of this subtraction is set as a new update index value (step E85). Go to step E86. According to these steps E84 and E85, when the value of the update index exceeds the symbol upper limit, the value of the update index is updated to the value of one round.

In step E86, a left symbol index conversion table is set (step E86), and the process proceeds to step E87. The left symbol index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the update index and the value of the image index of the left symbol to be displayed on the designated row is set.
At step E87, a new image index value is acquired from the row designated by the update index in the left symbol index conversion table set at step E86 (step E87), and the value acquired at step E87 is newly set. The image left is saved in the image index area (area where the image index is saved) as the value of the image index (step E88), and then the display left symbol conversion process is ended.
Although the display left symbol conversion processing has been described above, the same processing is also applied to the right symbol and the middle symbol (details will be omitted).

[PB color conversion processing]
Next, the details of the PB color conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (b).
When the PB color conversion process is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the PB color area of the effect distribution result area (step E91), and the PB index conversion table is set (step E92). The PB index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the sorting result saved in the PB color area, and the value of the image index of the image of PB (push button) to be displayed in the designated row is set. .

Next, a new image index value (PB index value) is acquired from the row designated by the distribution result in the PB index conversion table set in step E92 (step E93), and the value acquired in step E93 is Then, the new image index value is saved in the image index area (step E94), and the PB color conversion process is ended.
Note that only the button character that is the default color is registered as motion control data (especially image index data) for PB advance notice (push button advance notice). When changing, this processing (PB color conversion processing) is executed. There is also a process for converting (substituting) characters of appearing warlords according to behaviors as well as this advance notice.

[Leach character conversion process]
Next, details of the reach character conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the reach character conversion process is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the reach character area of the effect distribution result area (step E101), and the reach character index conversion table is set (step E102). The reach character index conversion table is a table in which a line is specified by the distribution result saved in the reach character area, and the value of the image index of the image of the reach character to be displayed on the specified line is set.
Next, a new image index value (reach character index value) is acquired from the line designated by the above-mentioned distribution result in the reach character index conversion table set in step E102 (step E103), and the process proceeds to step E104.

In step E104, it is determined whether the reach character index acquired in step E103 is a value indicating "no character", and if it is a value indicating "no character" (step E104; Y), the character of the reach character When the size of (image) is set to 0 (step E105) and the reach character conversion process is finished and the value does not indicate “no character” (step E104; N), step E105 is not performed to reach End character conversion processing.
In the present example, default characters are displayed in motion control data (particularly, image index data) even for reach characters such as "reach!", "Senki", and "win" displayed at the moment the reach occurs. It has a configuration, and if necessary, behavior such as changing the character or replacing the color of each character immediately before display.
In the reach character conversion process described above, for example, if the letter size is changed to 0 in step E105 when the reliability of the big hit notice is a change with low reliability, the reach letter in control exists but it is actually visible There is no control. However, the method of not displaying may not be limited to this configuration. For example, the reach character display may not be performed.

[Warlord 1 serif conversion process]
Next, details of the military commander-one-serif conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When warlord-one-serif conversion processing is started, first, the serif SU distribution result is loaded from the serif SU region of the effect distribution result region (step E111), and the process proceeds to step E112.
At step E112, it is determined whether the serif SU is the SU1 system (not SU2 system or SU3 system) based on the serif SU distribution result loaded at step E111, and if it is the SU1 system (step E112; Y), The process proceeds to step E117, and when it is not the SU1 system (step E112; N), the process proceeds to step E113.
At step E117, the distribution result is loaded from the serif 1 area of the effect distribution result area (step E117), the military commander 1SU1 serif index conversion table is set (step E118), and the process proceeds to step E115. The warlord 1 SU 1 serif index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the distribution result saved in the serif 1 area, and the value of the image index of the serif image to be displayed in the designated row is set.

At step E113, it is determined whether the dialog SU is of SU2 system (only one appearing character is SU2 system) based on the serif SU distribution result loaded at step E111, and if it is SU2 system (step E113; Y), The process proceeds to step E119, and in the case where the system is not SU2 system (step E113; N), the process proceeds to step E114.
At step E119, the distribution result is loaded from the serif 2 area of the effect distribution result area (step E119), the military commander 1SU2 serif index conversion table is set (step E120), and the process proceeds to step E115. The warlord 1SU2 serif index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the distribution result saved in the serif 2 area, and the value of the image index of the serif image to be displayed in the designated row is set.

In step E114, it is determined whether the dialog SU is SU3 (based on two appearing characters in SU3) based on the serif SU distribution result loaded in step E111, and if it is SU3 (step E114; Y) At step E121, if it is not SU3 system (step E114; N), the process proceeds to step E115.
At step E121, the distribution result is loaded from the serif 3 area of the effect distribution result area (step E121), the military commander 1SU3 serif index conversion table is set (step E122), and the process proceeds to step E115. The warlord 1SU3 serif index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the distribution result saved in the serif 3 area, and the value of the image index of the serif image to be displayed in the designated row is set.

At step E115, a new image index is acquired from the row specified by the loaded distribution result in the serif index conversion table set at the immediately preceding step (any one of step E118, step E120, step E122, etc.). The value (serif index value) is acquired (step E115), and the value acquired in step E115 is saved as a new image index value in the image index area (bitmap index area) (step E116). 1) Complete the serif conversion process.
Note that there may be types other than SU1 system, SU2 system, and SU3 system as the type of serif SU, in which case processing steps corresponding to the portions omitted by broken lines in FIG. 130 are provided.

[VDP interrupt processing]
Next, VDP interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the effect control device 300, the interrupt signals INT0 to INT are input from the VDP 312 which is an interrupt factor to the CPU 311, and the CPU 311 generates a plurality (up to 2 at maximum) by the interrupt signals INT0 to n n-th number of interrupts (hereinafter referred to as "VDP interrupts") can be accepted. In this example, for this VDP interrupt, V blank start interrupt, V line start interrupt, drawing command INT interrupt, drawing error interrupt, drawing end interrupt, data transfer 1 completion interrupt, data transfer 2 completion interrupt, data transfer 3 completed There are an interrupt, a checksum end interrupt, a compression expansion event interrupt, and a serial command interrupt.
The present process (VDP interrupt process) is started when at least one of the plurality of VDP interrupts occurs. When at least one of the plurality of VDP interrupts occurs, the on data of the interrupt flag indicating the occurrence of the interrupt is set in the register of the CPU 311.

When VDP interrupt processing is started, first, the interrupt signals INT0 to n are read to acquire the status of each interrupt factor (information on the presence or absence of occurrence of the plurality of VDP interrupts) (step E131). The status information is set in the VDP 312 interrupt register.
Next, since the status is read in step E131, each interrupt factor is cleared (step E132). That is, setting is performed to return all the status data (data of the register for interrupt of VDP 312) of each of the interrupt factors described above to the value without interrupt. The CPU 311 and the VDP 312 can perform two-way communication, and the setting in step E132 is performed by this communication.
Next, based on the status acquired in step E131, each interrupt processing (processing such as determining the presence or absence of an interrupt and setting a flag) is executed (steps E133 to E143), and the interrupt flag is set. It clears (step E144) and ends VDP interrupt processing. That is, the off data of the interrupt flag is set in the register of the CPU 311.

Although the effect control device 300 has a function of monitoring various interrupts of the VDP 312 as described above, it is not limited to using all of them.
Further, conditions for generating each interrupt are as follows.
V-blank start interrupt; an interrupt occurs at the start of the V-blank period.
V line start interrupt: an interrupt is generated at the start of the designated display line (by the user).
Drawing command INT interrupt; occurs when analysis of drawing command is interrupted.
• Drawing error interrupt; occurs when the drawing circuit becomes abnormal.
・ Drawing end interrupt; occurs when drawing is finished.
Data transfer 1 to 3 completion interrupt: generated when data transfer between memories is completed.
Data transfer can be performed among the image ROM 325, the CPU 311 (data in the RAM in the CPU 311 or data in the control ROM 321), the VRAM 326, and the like. Since three sets of data transfer 1 to 3 are independent, they can be transferred simultaneously, but priority is provided in the order of 1>2> 3 and waiting occurs when the transfer destination is the same, etc. .
Checksum end interrupt: There is a function to automatically calculate the checksum of the image ROM 325 (by an instruction from the CPU 311), which occurs at the end of the calculation.
In addition, it is possible to specify parameters such as an address to start calculation, an address to end calculation, and a unit to be calculated (for example, in 32-bit unit / 64-bit unit) for the calculation of checksum.
Compression decompression event interrupt; occurs when decoding of one frame of a moving image is completed, or when a decoding error occurs.
Serial command interrupt: This occurs, for example, when an instruction is issued to the sound source LSI 314 connected to the serial interface by a serial command and the execution is completed.

[V blank start interrupt processing]
Next, the V-blank start interrupt process (step E133) in the VDP interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The V blank start interrupt (also referred to as “V blank interrupt” or “V sink interrupt”) is generated every time one scan of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation period of the V blank start interrupt is, for example, 1/60 seconds as described above.
When the V blank start interrupt process is started, it is first determined in step E151 whether or not a V blank start interrupt is generated based on the status acquired in step E131 described above, and if it is generated (step E151; Y) Go to step E152, and if not generated (step E151; N), end the V blank start interrupt processing.
In step E152, the value of V blank count is updated by 1 (step E152), and then the process proceeds to step E153. The V blank count is a counter for performing the same drawing a predetermined number of times (two times in this example). The frame switching timing described in step D33 in the main process described above is, in principle, the time when this V blank count reaches a predetermined value (2 in this example). That is, in this example, the value of V blank count is normal except when V blank count instantaneously becomes 2 (the moment after it becomes 2 after updating in step E 152 and is cleared to 0 in step E 155). If there is, 0⇔1 are alternately repeated, and as a result, the frame is switched every two V blank interrupts. Since the V blank interrupt occurs every 1/60 seconds, frame switching is performed every 1/30 seconds (33.333 ms).

  At step E153, it is determined whether the result of execution of compression and decompression is an error or not. If it is an error (step E153; Y), the V blank start interrupt processing is ended, and if not an error (step E153; N), the step Go to E154. Here, the execution result of the compression and expansion means the result of whether or not the process of expanding the data of the compressed movie is successful. The determination value indicating the execution result of the compression and expansion is configured to be set in the compression and expansion event interrupt process of step E142, and the determination of step E153 is performed based on the determination value. Note that, due to the presence of this step E153, when the expansion of the movie fails due to processing time or the like, the frame switching is not executed even if the V blank count has reached the predetermined value, and the same drawing is repeated.

  In step E154, it is determined whether the value of V blank count is equal to or more than a predetermined value (in this example, whether it is a value larger than 1). If it is equal to or more than a predetermined value (step E154; Y), ie, In step E155, if it is not above the predetermined value (step E154; N), that is, not larger than 1, the V blank start interrupt processing is terminated. This step E154 substantially determines whether or not the frame switching timing has come. In this example, as described above, if the same drawing is executed twice, in principle (that is, if the execution result of the compression / decompression is not an error), this frame switching timing is reached. However, it is not limited to 2 times, 3 or more times may be sufficient.

Steps E155 to E158 are processing for frame switching for switching the drawing content. At step E155, the V blank count described above is cleared to 0 (step E155), the on data of the frame switching flag is set (step E156), the frame buffer is switched (step E157), and the corresponding frame buffer ( The screen display (display data generation) of the frame buffer after switching is permitted (step E158), and the V blank start interrupt processing is ended.
Here, the frame switching flag set in step E156 is used in step D33 in the main process described above. That is, in the above-described step D33, when on data of the frame switching flag is set, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. In step E158, the display circuit of the VDP 312 accesses the VRAM 326 to permit generation of display data.

The frame buffer corresponds to the virtual drawing space 326a described in steps E59 and E76, and is a buffer configured by the VRAM 326. As this frame buffer, in the case of this example, there are a frame buffer number 0 and a frame buffer number 1. In this example, for example, if the frame buffer for display is No. 0, the frame buffer No. 1 is used for drawing work and is alternately used for display. At step E157, a process of switching the frame buffer for display to the next one (in this example, a process of switching from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0) is executed. In step E158, generation of display data for the display frame buffer switched in step E157 is permitted.
According to the V blank start interrupt processing described above, frame switching is performed when the same drawing is repeated a predetermined number of times and a V blank start interrupt occurs a predetermined number of times unless a compression / decompression error occurs. In this example, frame switching is performed when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank start interrupt is generated twice, and the frame switching timing cycle is 2 of the cycle of the V blank start interrupt (for example, 1/60 seconds). (E.g. 1/30 seconds.apprxeq.33.33 ms).

[Specific example of data table for effect control and effect display]
Next, a specific example of the data table used in the control of the effect control device 300 described above and a specific example of the effect display performed on the display screen 41a of the display device 41 by the control will be described with reference to FIGS. Do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, “scenario” means the flow of presentation (which determines which motion is to be executed, etc.). That is, the display elements (background, left pattern,...) That constitute the display screen 41a are picked up through all the effects as a pachinko gaming machine, and the contents of the effects to be performed in the scene are managed. is there. In addition, as a scenario, what was illustrated in this embodiment (a scenario for background, a scenario for left symbol, a scenario for right symbol, a scenario for middle symbol, a scenario for notice 1, a scenario for notice 2, a scenario for suspension, and a fourth In addition to the symbol scenario), a scenario for an error message (because an error message is displayed regardless of the game effect), a scenario for a hall / player setting screen, and the like can be considered.

  In addition, “motion” means a rendering operation (blocked in the case of the present embodiment, specifically, display effects on the display device 41 are blocked) in a blocked (partized) manner. That is, in order to draw on the display screen 41a, detailed control such as character image, character number, coordinates, size, transparency,. If reference data (reference data) is defined, perform adjustment to the reference data by behavior processing (replace character images in effects following the same locus, adjust size according to character images, adjust transparency Yes, etc.) is possible. If all the character images and coordinate data are defined in all the effects that are slightly different, the amount of data will be huge, but by adjusting the reference data by behavior processing, the minimum motion pattern is defined. It is possible to save data capacity and improve development efficiency.

  Also, "behavior" is sometimes referred to in the field of programming and the like that defines how a specific element operates under a certain condition, but is used for display elements on the display screen 41a. When a user performs a specific operation, the corresponding program is used to describe processing such as execution.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of an address area of a scenario management area and a scenario management area.
In this embodiment, as shown on the left side of FIG. 133, the address area of the scenario management area is composed of eight areas for storing scenario layer 0 address to scenario layer 7 address. At each process, the effect control device 300 executes a scenario setting process (see FIG. 103) to check all the address areas in order from the top, and an address of the RAM to control to the corresponding address area (in the case of this embodiment, the scenario) Perform processing on the scenario layer in which the start address of the management area is stored. In the address area corresponding to the scenario layer not to be drawn, NULL is stored instead of the RAM address.

Each scenario management area is, as shown on the right side of FIG. 133, four areas for storing the value of the scenario timer, the value of the PB timer, the value of the PB detection flag, and the address of the scenario data table. Is a structure including For example, in the scenario management area 0 (see the top row on the right side of FIG. 133), it is managed as a background which motion table is used for drawing. During the time-up of the scenario timer, the drawing based on the specified motion is performed, and when the time-up, the process of repeating the motion shown in the next scenario is repeated.
A scenario management area for setting each scenario is provided at the specified address, and among the areas in the scenario management area, no setting is made for areas unnecessary for the scenario setting, and “scenario data table area” The address of the data table (scenario table) currently controlled is stored.

In addition, since PB (push button) is basically used only at the time of the notice scenario, “PB timer area” and “PB detection flag area” in each area of the scenario management area are for notice. This is an area unnecessary for scenario settings other than a scenario, but in order to share the configuration of the scenario management area and common processing, the scenario management area for notice (for the present embodiment, scenario management area 4 and scenario management area) The "PB timer area" and the "PB detection flag area" are also provided in the scenario management areas other than 5).
Further, in the present embodiment, two types are provided as the scenario layer for notice, that is, the scenario layer for notice 1 (scenario layer 4) and the scenario layer for notice 2 (scenario layer 5). It has become possible to appear an independent preview effect.

FIG. 134 shows an example of the address area of the motion management area.
In the present embodiment, as shown on the left side of FIG. 134, the address area of the motion management area consists of 14 areas for storing the addresses for motion 0 to the address for motion 13 respectively.

Here, an address area for storing an address for motion 1 (notice A) to an address for motion 4 (notice D), that is, an address area for motion management area 1 to motion management area 4 is a decorative symbol (left symbol, right symbol, And the middle symbol), and is used by the scenario for notice 1 or the scenario for notice 2 when it is desired to cause the notice character to appear behind the In the case of the present embodiment, since four areas of the motion management area 1 to the motion management area 4 are secured, up to four motions can be simultaneously executed on the back side of the decorative pattern, that is, different movements to four simultaneously It is possible to cause a foreboding character to appear. In this way, it is possible to form a notice such that a plurality of advance characters perform independent movements by lottery (specifically, for example, to form one advance notice by interchanging of a plurality of advance characters). it can. If there is only a fixed movement from the beginning to the end, even if a plurality of advance characters appear, control can be performed with one motion (that is, one motion management area).
In addition, the address area for storing the address for motion 8 (notice E) and the address for motion 9 (notice F), that is, the address area for motion management area 8 and motion management area 9 used.
In addition, an address area for storing an address for motion 11 (notice G) and an address for motion 12 (notice H), that is, an address area for motion management area 11 and motion management area 12 used.

Also, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), each motion management area includes four areas for storing the number of displays, the frame number, the command position, and the address of the list table for motion, and the display information for the number of displays And a region.
In each display information area, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), display type, effect type, effect parameter, X coordinate of display upper left point, Y coordinate of display upper left point, X coordinate of display upper right point, display upper right It contains the Y coordinate of the point, the X coordinate of the display lower left point, the Y coordinate of the display lower left point, the image index, the background color, the foreground color, the moving image frame count of IPicture only, and the area storing the behavior index data. It is.

In the present embodiment, the method of scrolling the three symbols (the next symbol, the present symbol, and the previous symbol) as the left symbol follows the determined rule, so the motion management area for the left symbol (in the case of this embodiment, the motion management) In the area 5), as shown at the top of the right side of FIG. 134, the left symbol display information area 0 (next symbol), the left symbol display information area 1 (current symbol) and the left symbol display information area 2 (previous symbol) Three display information areas are provided, and three characters of the next symbol, the current symbol and the previous symbol are controlled by one motion. The next symbol, the actual symbol, and the previous symbol are changed by behavior. The same applies to the right symbol and the middle symbol.
Also, in the fourth symbol motion management area (in the case of this embodiment, the motion management area 13), as shown in the lowermost part on the right side of FIG. 134, the fourth symbol display information area 0 to fourth symbol display information area Four display information areas of 3 are provided.
Also, a motion management area for background (motion management area 0 in the case of this embodiment) and a motion management area for notice (in the case of this embodiment, motion management area 1, motion management area 2, motion management area 3, motion management area) Similarly, in the motion management area 8, the motion management area 9, the motion management area 11, and the motion management area 12, there are display information areas for the number of displays, and among them, the display information specified by the motion table An area is selected.

  FIG. 135 is an example of a scenario table used at the start of customer waiting effect presentation. The scenario table used at the start of the customer waiting presentation defines the flow of the presentation as the customer waiting presentation. In the case of the present embodiment, since the display for the customer waiting effect (the customer waiting demonstration effect) is only performed in a fixed flow, as described above, the customer waiting effect is scenario layer 0 (mainly for display control of background image The scenario layer 0 is used only for the scenario layer to be used, and motion settings for patterns etc. are also made in the scenario layer 0. Therefore, the scenario table used at the time of the customer waiting presentation start is configured only with the background scenario table.

In the scenario table shown in FIG. 135, the motion delete code (M1DEL, M2DEL, M3DEL, M4DEL, M4DEL, M8DEL) as the operation code is added to the first line (// deletion (gate)) to the 8th line (// deletion (reach character)). , M9DEL, M11DEL, M12DEL) are set, and 0 is set as an operand. As a result, motions that need to be erased when performing customer-facing effects are collectively deleted. Specifically, motion 1 (notice A), motion 2 (notice B), motion 3 (notice C), motion 4 (notice Motion management areas 1, 2, 3 and 4 to stop drawing the motion 8 (notice E), motion 9 (notice F), motion 11 (notice G), and motion 12 (notice H). , 8, 9, 11 and 12 control data is deleted (initialized). The 0s in the right column operands are unused data.
In addition, a motion registration code (M13 SET) is set as an operation code on the ninth line (// fourth symbol), and 21 is set as an operand. Thus, the motion table number 21 of the fourth symbol stop display is registered in the motion management area 13 in order to stop and display the motion 13 (fourth symbol) at a predetermined position.

In the scenario table shown in FIG. 135, the next 10th line (// BG continuation) is a line for starting symbol display (waiting for customer A) of waiting for customer effects.
Specifically, a motion continuation code (M0KPX) is set as an operation code in the 10th line (// BG continuation), and 12 is set as an operand. Thereby, in order to display motion 0 (background) based on motion table number 12, when motion table number 12 of background display is registered in motion management area 0, the state is continued and registered. If not, the motion table number 12 of background display is registered in the motion management area 0.
Further, a motion registration code (M10SET) is set as an operation code on the 11th line (// display (pending)), and -1 is set as an operand. As a result, motion 10 (pending) is displayed in a manner based on the RAM area containing the pending number. If the number of holdings is 0, only the holding display frame is displayed.

In addition, in the 12th line (// stop symbol set), a stop symbol set code (LZSTOP) is set as an operation code, and 0 is set as an operand. Thereby, the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is written in the display symbol area (present symbol area (left)) in order to rewrite the present symbol of the left symbol to the stop symbol of the left symbol.
In addition, a motion registration code (M5SET) is set as an operation code on the 13th line (// customer waiting left symbol), and 76 is set as an operand. Thus, the left symbol for waiting for a customer is displayed as the motion 5 (left symbol). While waiting for a customer, it is different from during change, and only the middle pattern (the present pattern) is displayed.
The same applies to the right symbol and the middle symbol (see lines 14 to 17).
Also, on the 18th line (// wait), a constant wait code (CWAIT) is set as an operation code, and 3600 is set as an operand. This waits for this row for 3600 frames (ie for 120 seconds = 3600 x (1/30 seconds)).

In the scenario table shown in FIG. 135, the next 19th line (// deletion) is a line for starting movie display (waiting for customer B) of waiting for customer effects.
Specifically, the motion deletion code (M5DEL, M6DEL, M7DEL, M10DEL) is set as the op code in the 19th line (// deletion) to the 22nd line (// deletion (hold)), 0 is set as the operand It is done. This controls the motion management areas 5, 6, 7, 10 to stop drawing motion 5 (left symbol), motion 6 (right symbol), motion 7 (middle symbol), and motion 10 (hold). Delete (initialize) the data.
In addition, a motion registration code (M0SET) is set as an operation code on the 23rd line (// BG), and 13 is set as an operand. As a result, in order to display motion 0 (background) based on the motion table number 13 (specifically, display a movie waiting for a customer), the motion table number 13 of background display is registered in the motion management area 0.
Also, on the 24th line (// wait), a constant wait code (CWAIT) is set as an operation code, and 900 is set as an operand. This waits for this line for 900 frames (ie, for 30 seconds = 900 × (1/30 seconds)).

In addition, a repetition code (SQRTN) is set as the op code on the 25th line (// repetition), and 15 is set as the operand. Thereby, in order to restart the symbol display (customer waiting A) of customer waiting production, it returns to the data on 15 lines (namely, 10th line (// BG continuation)).
Note that data in a range surrounded by a square in the scenario table shown in FIG. 135 is processed in one frame.

FIG. 136 is an example of a motion table at the time of the start of left symbol normal fluctuation, and FIG. 137 is an example of a display result by the motion table shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 137, the upper left corner of the display screen 41a is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and the vertical direction is the Y axis direction, so the lower left corner of the display screen 41a is the X coordinate When it is 0, the Y coordinate is 767. Further, in the display screen 41a, since the horizontal direction is the X-axis direction, the upper right corner of the display screen 41a is X coordinate = 1023 and Y coordinate = 0, and the lower right corner of the display screen 41a is X coordinate = 1023 Coordinates are set at 767. In addition, the concrete numerical value of such a coordinate is only an example.

  FIG. 137 (a) corresponds to (a) of the motion table shown in FIG. 136, that is, the first one frame (1/30 seconds). The symbol "2" is the next symbol (object index (display information area No.) 0), the symbol "1" is the present symbol (object index (display information area No. 1), and the symbol "9" is the front These objects are symbols (object index (display information area No.) 2), and these objects are additionally registered by the first to sixth lines of the motion table shown in FIG. 136, and the behavior is set. The display positions and sizes of these objects are set in the seventh to ninth lines of the motion table shown in FIG. 136, whereby the display shown in FIG. 137A is performed. However, in practice, since a part of the next symbol and a part of the front symbol are at positions outside the display screen 41a, neither the next symbol nor the front symbol can be seen in its entirety.

  Further, FIG. 137 (b) corresponds to (b) of the motion table shown in FIG. 136, that is, the second frame (1/30 seconds). The settings of the design and behavior of each object remain as the first frame (a), and the display position and size of these objects are set in the 11th to 13th lines of the motion table shown in FIG. 136, Thus, the display shown in FIG. 137 (b) is performed. In this case, the value of the Y coordinate is changed by all −8 from the first one frame (a) (for example, the symbol of the object index (display information area No.) 1 has a Y coordinate value of 7 to −1) And each symbol is slightly moved upward on the display screen 41a. This is a part of the movement to hop once in the operation of scrolling (fluctuation) downward after each symbol hops (slightly rises) once at the start of fluctuation. In the second one frame (b), the entire next symbol is located outside the display screen 41a, but character information that goes outside the display screen 41a is also arranged in the VRAM 326 in this manner.

  Also, FIG. 137 (c) corresponds to (c) of the motion table shown in FIG. 136, that is, the third frame (1/30 second), and FIG. 137 (d) shows the motion shown in FIG. It corresponds to (d) of the table, that is, the fourth frame (1/30 seconds). Since the third and fourth frames (c) and (d) are also part of the motion to hop once, the Y coordinate is sequentially changed by -8.

In the present embodiment, in the drawing control of the display screen 41 a displayed on the display device 41, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer −) is used. The scenario is, for example, a background scenario, a scenario for the left symbol, a scenario for the right symbol, ..., etc., and the display effects such as the variation effect of the symbol are divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) to make a table in advance. It is a method of generating a picture of one screen by setting and controlling them individually as a scenario and combining all the scenarios.
A plurality of display layers (scenario layers) are individually categorized for each display element, for example, background, left pattern, right pattern,..., And each of them independently has a plurality of motion information simultaneously or continuously. Is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching to and displaying effects.

In this embodiment, the display elements (display components) used in the effects of the display device 41 are "background", "left symbol", "right symbol", "middle symbol", "notice 1 character", "notice" It is divided into eight elements of "2 characters", "hold display (decorative display start memory display)", and "fourth design".
Then, a scenario table in display effects such as variation effects is created by being divided into each of a plurality of display elements. In the present embodiment, the scenario table includes "background control scenario table (background scenario table)", "left symbol control scenario table", "right symbol control scenario table", "middle symbol control scenario table", and " Eight elements of the notice 1 character control scenario table, the notice 2 character control scenario table, the hold display control scenario table, and the fourth symbol control scenario table (fourth symbol scenario table) It is divided and created.
Further, each display element is constituted by a display layer, and the plurality of display layers are sequentially superimposed from the back side to the front side of the screen to create one display screen 41a. In the case of this embodiment, in the display layer, "background layer", "left symbol layer", "right symbol layer", "middle symbol layer", "notice A layer" to "notice H layer", "pending layer" , And 14 types of "fourth symbol layer".

In the effect display editing process (see FIGS. 125 to 127), the effect control device 300 repeatedly executes the loop process A of steps E1 to E50 in the order of the number of motion management areas by the number of motion management areas. Then, in the loop processing A, when the data in the address area of the motion management area X is not NULL, step E59 is executed to draw a rectangular image in the virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326 (ie, sprite of rectangular image Or the step E76 in the character drawing process (step E58) or the predetermined step (step E76) in the triangular character drawing process (step E77) of the character drawing process (step E58) The process is executed to execute the process of drawing the designated image in the virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326 (that is, the process of pasting the sprite of the designated image into the virtual drawing space 326a).
As shown in FIG. 138, the virtual drawing space 326a is divided into 14 drawing areas of a drawing area for motion management area 0 to a drawing area for motion management area 13. The drawing areas are arranged in the order of the numbers of the corresponding motion management areas, and in each drawing area, a display layer on which a rectangular image or a designated image is drawn is stored.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first executes loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 for the motion management area 0, and the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL. Then, the “background layer” in which the rectangular image or the designated image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 0 of the virtual drawing space 326 a.
Next, loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 for motion management area 1 is executed, and when the data in the address area of motion management area 1 is not NULL, “notice A layer” in which the rectangular image or the designated image is drawn , And stored in the drawing area for motion management area 1 of the virtual drawing space 326a.
Next, loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 for the motion management area 2 is executed, and when the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, “the notice B layer” in which the rectangular image or the designated image is drawn , And is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 2 of the virtual drawing space 326a.

  Similarly, loop processing A on the motion management area 3 is executed to store the "notice C layer" in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 of the virtual drawing space 326a, and then loop processing on the motion management area 4 Execute A to store the "notice D layer" in the drawing area for the motion management area 4 of the virtual drawing space 326a, and then execute loop processing A for the motion management area 5 to virtually draw the "left graphic layer" Store in the drawing area for motion management area 5 in space 326a, and then execute loop processing A on motion management area 6 to store the "right symbol layer" in the drawing area for motion management area 6 in virtual drawing space 326a Then, loop processing A on the motion management area 7 is executed to set the "middle symbol layer" in the virtual drawing space 326a. It stores it in the drawing area for the application management area 7 and then executes loop processing A on the motion management area 8 to store the "notice E layer" in the drawing area for the motion management area 8 of the virtual drawing space 326a. Execute loop processing A on the motion management area 9 to store the "notice F layer" in the drawing area for the motion management area 9 of the virtual drawing space 326a, and then execute loop processing A on the motion management area 10 The "pending layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 of the virtual drawing space 326a, and then loop processing A for the motion management area 11 is executed to make the "notice G layer" the motion management area of the virtual drawing space 326a. 11 and store it in the drawing area, and then execute loop processing A for the motion management area 12 The "notice H layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 12 of the virtual drawing space 326a, and then loop processing A for the motion management area 13 is executed to make the "fourth design layer" a motion of the virtual drawing space 326a. It stores in the drawing area for the management area 13 and ends the effect display editing process.

Here, when the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area, so the drawing area remains blank. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is NULL, the display layer (in the case of the present embodiment, “notice of Since the G layer “) is not stored, the drawing area for the motion management area 11 remains blank. In addition, it is possible to sequentially store the display layer so that the non-blank drawing area continues (that is, store the display layer while filling it in front), but in that case, one display screen 41a Since the drawing area for storing display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers to be configured, the drawing area for storing the display layers is stored each time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space 326a (ie, Among the blank drawing areas, it is necessary to search for the drawing area on the front (head) side, and the processing becomes complicated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by configuring each display layer to be stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect content (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen 41a). Since it is not necessary to search the drawing area for storing the display layer one by one every time the display layer is stored in the virtual drawing space 326a, the processing load can be reduced.
As shown in FIG. 138, the display layers stored in each drawing area are sequentially superimposed from the back side (lower layer side) to the front side (upper layer side) of the screen in the order of arrangement of the drawing areas, and one display screen is displayed. 41a is created. Specifically, for example, when all 14 drawing areas are filled, in the present embodiment, “14” is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 1 positioned at the beginning of the 14 drawing areas. The "fourth design layer" stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 13 located at the end of the 14 drawing areas is the most screen. It is placed on the near side (uppermost layer).

  In such effect control, when generating the effect screen (display screen 41a), it is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the effect screen and set in advance as a table, and then they are By individually controlling as a scenario and combining all the scenarios in the form of a display layer, a picture of one screen is generated and displayed as an effect screen of the display device 41, and a display such as a fluctuation effect of a symbol (special figure) A presentation is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in drawing control of the display device 41 controlled by the effect control device 300, the display elements of the background, left symbol, right symbol, ... are individually classified into individual display elements, and each of them is independent. Then, a table of operation scenarios for switching a plurality of motion information simultaneously or continuously and displaying effects is set for each display element, and a scenario table is selected according to an effect command from the game control apparatus 100, and the combination is selected. By combining them, it is possible to create the drawing contents (one frame) of one screen.
Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is only necessary to define a minimum operation pattern (partization of operation), and it is possible to save data capacity and improve development efficiency.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of producing effects by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Scenario data setting means for setting scenario data for each display element in drawing control of a screen displayed on the display means;
Screen creation means for selecting and combining preset scenario data for each display element in response to a command from the game control device, and creating one screen of drawing contents;
A game machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes scenario data setting means, and the VDP 312 constitutes screen creation means.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment in that the decorative symbol is divided into a number part and a character part and drawn on different display layers. Therefore, in the following, parts having the same configuration as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described.

The decorative symbol Z is composed of only the number part Z1 or, for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), is composed of the number part Z1 and the character part Z2.
In the case of the first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (b), in the decorative symbol Z, the numeral Z1 and the character Z2 are drawn on the same display layer (the decorative symbol layer), but this embodiment Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (c), the decorative symbol Z is divided into the numeral Z1 and the character Z2, and the numeral Z1 is drawn on the numeral layer and the character Z2 is drawn on the character layer. Do. When a plurality of display layers are sequentially overlapped to create one display screen 41a, the character portion layer is disposed on the screen rear side of the number portion layer.

In the present application, when the left symbol layer, the right symbol layer, and the middle symbol layer are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decorative symbol layer.
Also, a left symbol number portion layer in which number symbol Z1 of the left symbol is drawn, a right symbol number portion layer in which number portion Z1 of the right symbol is drawn, and a middle symbol number portion in which number portion Z1 of middle symbol is drawn When it does not distinguish from a layer, it only calls it a numeral part layer.
In addition, a left symbol character portion layer in which a left symbol character portion Z2 is drawn, a right symbol character portion layer in which a right symbol character portion Z2 is drawn, and a middle symbol character portion in which a middle symbol character portion Z2 is drawn When the layer is not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a character part layer.

In the first embodiment, when the notice character Y is made to appear, the notice character Y is arranged, for example, on the screen front side of the decorative symbol layer as shown in FIG. 140 (a) (first embodiment) In the case of, the notice layer is drawn on any of the notice E layer to the notice H layer or, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of the first embodiment, any one of the notice A layer to the notice D layer is drawn. When the notice character Y is drawn on the notice layer arranged on the screen front side of the decorative symbol layer, for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), the decorative symbol Z is hidden by the notice character Y. Further, when the notice character Y is drawn on the notice layer disposed on the screen rear side of the decorative symbol layer, for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (d), the notice character Y is hidden by the decorative symbol Z.
If the decorative symbol Z, in particular, the numeral Z1 is hidden by the notice character Y, the state of the decorative feature variation display game (whether it is changing or not, whether the reach is being generated, etc.), stop result mode It becomes difficult to understand (such as what the stop symbol is ("stop" here includes "temporary stop"), etc.).
Also, when the advance notice character Y is hidden by the decorative symbol Z, the effect of the advance notice character Y is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, the decorative symbol Z is divided into the numeral part Z1 and the character part Z2, the numeral part Z1 is drawn in the numeral part layer, and the character part Z2 is more screen than the numeral part layer. Since it is drawn in the character part layer arranged on the back side, for example, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), it becomes possible to arrange a notice layer between the numeral part layer and the character part layer. Then, when making the preview character Y appear, by drawing the preview character Y on the preview layer disposed between the number portion layer and the character portion layer, for example, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), the number portion Z1 is not hidden by the preview character Y, and it is possible to minimize the hidden part (part to be in the non-displayed state) of the preview character Y to a necessary minimum. Therefore, since the numeric part Z1 is not hidden by the advance notice character Y, it is not difficult to grasp the state of the decorative feature variation display game and the stop result mode even if the advance notice character Y appears. In addition, in the decorative design Z, only the numeral portion Z1 hides the forerunner character Y, and the character portion Z2 does not hide the forerunner character Y. Therefore, the hidden portion of the forerunner character Y can be minimized. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the rendering effect by the preliminary announcement character Y.

FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example of an address area of a motion management area in the second embodiment.
In the first embodiment, the following 14 motions can be performed (see FIG. 134).
-Motion 0 = Background motion-Motion 1 = Notice A Motion-Motion 2 = Notice B Motion-Motion 3 = Notice C Motion-Motion 4 = Notice D Motion-Motion 5 = Left Pattern Motion-Motion 6 = Right Pattern Motion-Motion 7 = Middle pattern motion motion 8 = notice E motion motion 9 = notice F motion motion 10 = hold display motion motion 11 = notice G motion motion 12 = notice H motion motion 13 = fourth pattern motion

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the following 14 motions can be performed (see FIG. 142).
・ Motion 0 = Background motion ・ Motion 1 = Background notice motion ・ Motion 2 = Middle symbol character part motion · Motion 3 = Left symbol character part Motion · Motion 4 = Right symbol character part Motion · Motion 5 = Inter-pattern notice motion · Motion 6 = Middle figure number part motion motion 7 = left figure number part motion motion 8 = right figure number part motion motion 9 = front notice 1 motion motion 10 = front notice 2 motion motion 11 = hold display motion motion 12 = Foremost notice motion · Motion 13 = 4th pattern motion

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, there are eight scenario layers, and scenario layer numbers are from 0 to 7. And of these eight scenario layers, scenario layer 0 is basically for background, scenario layer 1 is for left pattern, scenario layer 2 is for right pattern, and scenario layer 3 is for middle pattern The scenario layer 4 is for notice 1, the scenario layer 5 is for notice 2, the scenario layer 6 is for holding, and the scenario layer 7 is for the fourth symbol.
In the first and second embodiments, the number of scenarios is not limited to eight. The number of scenarios is increased or decreased according to the model specification, and in the first and second embodiments, the number is limited to as few as possible.
Also, in the first and second embodiments, the number of motions is not limited to fourteen. The number of motions is increased or decreased according to the model specification, and in the first and second embodiments, the number of motions is limited to as few as possible.

In the first embodiment, the order of the scenario and the motion is the same, but the order may be different as in the second embodiment. That is, in the first embodiment, the scenario and the motion are also in the order of "left symbol" → "right symbol" → "middle symbol", but for example, the scenario is "left symbol" → "right symbol" → "middle symbol" As the order of, the motion may be “middle symbol” → “left symbol” → “right symbol” or “right symbol” → “middle symbol” → “left symbol” or the like.
In the second embodiment, the order of the scenario and the motion is made different, but the order may be made the same as in the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, the scenario is in the order of "left symbol" → "right symbol" → "middle symbol", and the motion is in order of "middle symbol" → "left symbol" → "right symbol", For example, the scenario and the motion may be in the order of “left symbol” → “right symbol” → “middle symbol”.

In the present embodiment, the address areas for storing the address for motion 2 (middle symbol character portion) and the address for motion 6 (middle symbol number portion), that is, the address regions for motion management region 2 and motion management region 6 are the same. Are used at the same time according to the scenario of However, in the case where the middle symbol is configured by only the number part Z1, only the motion management area 6 is used.
In addition, the address area for storing the address for motion 3 (left symbol character portion) and the address for motion 7 (left symbol number portion), that is, the address regions of motion management region 3 and motion management region 7 are the same scenario (left symbol Are used at the same time depending on the However, in the case where the left symbol is configured by only the number part Z1, only the motion management area 7 is used.
In addition, the address area for storing the address for motion 4 (right symbol character part) and the address for motion 8 (right symbol numeral part), that is, the address areas of motion management area 4 and motion management area 8 are the same scenario (right symbol) Are used at the same time depending on the However, in the case where the right symbol is configured by only the number part Z1, only the motion management area 8 is used.

  In addition, an address for motion 1 (background notice), an address for motion 5 (notice between figures), an address for motion 9 (front notice 1), an address for motion 10 (front notice 2), and for motion 12 (front notice). The address area for storing addresses, that is, motion management area 1, motion management area 5, motion management area 9, motion management area 10, and address area of motion management area 12 are used by the scenario for notice 1 or the scenario for notice 2. Ru. The whole of motion management area 1, 5, 9, 10, 12 may be used or only a part may be used, and the scenario for notice 1 and the scenario for notice 2 are the contents of the notice effect The motion control area to be used is selected accordingly. Further, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the same motion management area is not used at the same time in the scenario for notice 1 and the scenario for notice 2.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the display layer includes "background layer", "background notice layer", "middle symbol character portion layer", "left symbol character portion layer", "right symbol character portion layer", and "symbol Between the notice layer "middle figure number part layer""left figure number part layer""right figure number part layer""front notice 1 layer""front notice 2 layer""retentionlayer" There are 14 types of "front notice layer" and "fourth symbol layer".
Further, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 143, the virtual drawing space 326a is divided into 14 drawing areas of a motion management area 0 drawing area to a motion management area 13 drawing area as in the first embodiment. ing. The drawing areas are arranged in the order of the numbers of the corresponding motion management areas, and in each drawing area, a display layer on which a rectangular image or a designated image is drawn is stored.

Then, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first executes the loop process A of steps E1 to E50 for the motion management area 0, and if the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL, The “background layer” in which the image or the designated image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 0 of the virtual drawing space 326 a of the VRAM 326.
Next, loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 for motion management area 1 is executed, and when the data in the address area of motion management area 1 is not NULL, “background notice layer” on which the rectangular image or designated image is drawn is , And stored in the drawing area for motion management area 1 of the virtual drawing space 326a.
Next, loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 is executed for the motion management area 2, and when the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, a rectangular image or a designated image is drawn. Is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 2 of the virtual drawing space 326a.

  Thereafter, similarly, loop processing A on the motion management area 3 is executed to store the “left symbol character part layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 of the virtual drawing space 326 a, and then, for the motion management area 4. Execute loop processing A to store the "right symbol character part layer" in the drawing area for motion management area 4 of virtual drawing space 326a, and then execute loop processing A for motion management area 5 "Layer" is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 5 of virtual drawing space 326a, and then loop processing A for motion management area 6 is executed to make "middle symbol number part layer" a motion management area of virtual drawing space 326a 6 and store it in the drawing area, and then execute loop processing A for the motion management area 7 The numeral part layer is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 of the virtual drawing space 326a, and then the loop processing A for the motion management area 8 is executed to make the “right figure numeral part layer” a motion of the virtual drawing space 326a. It stores in the drawing area for the management area 8, and then executes loop processing A on the motion management area 9 to store the "front notice 1 layer" in the drawing area for the motion management area 9 of the virtual drawing space 326a. Execute loop processing A on the motion management area 10 to store "front notice 2 layer" in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 of the virtual drawing space 326a, and then execute loop processing A on the motion management area 11 Store the “pending layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 of the virtual drawing space 326a, and then Execute loop processing A on the motion management area 12 to store the “frontmost notice layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 12 of the virtual drawing space 326a, and then execute loop processing A on the motion management area 13 The “fourth symbol layer” is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 13 of virtual drawing space 326a, and the effect display editing process is ended.

  Then, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, no display layer is stored in the corresponding drawing area, so the drawing area remains blank. It becomes. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is NULL, the display layer (in the case of the present embodiment, “hold” in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 of the virtual drawing space 326 a of the VRAM 326 Since the layer “) is not stored, the drawing area for the motion management area 11 is left blank. In addition, it is possible to sequentially store the display layer so that the non-blank drawing area continues (that is, store the display layer while filling it in front), but in that case, one display screen 41a Since the drawing area for storing display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers to be configured, the drawing area for storing the display layers is stored each time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space 326a (ie, Among the blank drawing areas, it is necessary to search for the drawing area on the front (head) side, and the processing becomes complicated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by configuring each display layer to be stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect content (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen 41a). Since it is not necessary to search the drawing area for storing the display layer one by one every time the display layer is stored in the virtual drawing space 326a, the processing load can be reduced.

For example, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), the display layers stored in each drawing area are sequentially overlapped from the back side (lower layer side) to the front side (upper layer side) of the screen in the arrangement order of the drawing areas. For example, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), one display screen 41a is created. Specifically, for example, when all 14 drawing areas are filled, in the present embodiment, “14” is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 1 positioned at the beginning of the 14 drawing areas. The "fourth design layer" stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 13 located at the end of the 14 drawing areas is the most screen. It is placed on the near side (uppermost layer).
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), the display screen 41a shown in FIG. 144 (a) is a “background layer”, a “character part layer”, a “numeric part layer” and a “front notice 1 layer”. It is one display screen which the "retention layer" and the "fourth design layer" were piled up one by one, and was created. That is, the "background layer", the "character part layer", the "number part layer", the "front notice 1 layer", the "pending layer" and the "fourth design layer" are stored in the virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326. It is one display screen created without storing the background notice layer, the “pattern notice layer”, the “front notice 2 layer”, and the “front notice layer”.

The notice character Y drawn on the inter-symbol notice layer disposed between the numeral part layer and the character part layer is not limited to the character image as shown in FIG. It may be an effect image as shown in 145 (b), or a character image as shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to (c) or 147 (a), (b) or 148 (b). It is good.
FIG. 145 is a view showing an example of the display screen 41a created by layering a plurality of display layers including a numeral part layer and an inter-pattern notice layer, in the case of an effect that the notice character Y appears momentarily It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed on. In the example shown in FIG. 145, the preview character Y is an effect image imitating lightning.

Further, FIG. 146 is a view showing an example of the display screen 41a created by laminating a plurality of display layers including a numeral part layer and an inter-pattern notice layer, and the notice character Y scrolls along with the decorative figure Z It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed in the case of presentation. In the example shown in FIG. 146, the advance character Y is a character image imitating a sword. According to the example shown in FIG. 146, for example, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the type of the weapon (preliminary character Y) that scrolls with the decorative symbol Z.
Further, FIG. 147 is a view showing an example of the display screen 41a created by laminating a plurality of display layers including the numeral part layer and the inter-pattern notice layer, and in the case of the effect that the notice character Y is seen and hidden. It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 147, the preliminary announcement character Y is a character image imitating the sun. In the example shown in FIG. 147, by changing the position of the notice character Y (the relative position with respect to the number part Z1), specifically, the notice character Y on the notice layer between the symbols, all the numbers of the left symbols By moving between the position where the part Z1 overlaps with the front and back, and the position where at least a part does not overlap with the number part Z1 of the left symbol, an effect that the notice character Y appears and is realized is realized. In FIG. 147 (a), all the preview characters Y are at positions where they overlap with the number part Z1 of the left symbol in the front and back, and all are hidden by the number part Z1 (that is, all the number parts Z1). (In the non-displayed state), it is shown by a broken line.

FIG. 148 is also a view showing an example of the display screen 41a created by stacking a plurality of display layers including the numeral part layer and the inter-symbol notice layer, and in the case of the effect that the notice character Y is seen and hidden. It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 148, the preview character Y is a character image imitating a smile. In the example shown in FIG. 148, by changing the size of the number part Z1, an effect of making the notice character Y appear and disappear is realized. According to the example shown in FIG. 148, for example, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the expression of the advance character Y.
Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 148, although not shown, a movie effect by an image (moving image) drawn on the background preview layer is executed at the central portion of the display screen 41a. Further, the decorative symbol Z is constituted only by the number part Z1, and is variably displayed in a variation display mode such that the disc rotates about an axis along the radial direction. Therefore, not only the surface of the disk (the surface on which numbers are written) but also the back surface can be viewed. In the inter-symbol preview layer, as the preview character Y, a left character all overlapping with the number part Z1 of the left symbol, a middle character all overlapping with the number part Z1 of the middle symbol, and all right symbols The numeral portion Z1 of and the right character overlapping in front and back are drawn.
For example, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), when reach occurs, the reach formation symbol (in this example, the left symbol and the right symbol) is pivoted to a period during which the back surface of the symbol becomes visible. It is changed from normal size to 0 and apparently disappears. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), in a period in which the back surface of the reach formation pattern can be viewed, all the notice characters Y (left and right characters in this example) corresponding to the reach formation symbol can be viewed As shown in FIGS. 148 (a) and 148 (c), the notice character Y corresponding to the reach formation symbol can not be seen in a period in which the back surface of the reach formation symbol is not visible.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to display the numeric part Z1 prior to the notice character Y by using the inter-symbol notice layer. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, by using the inter-symbol notice layer, a notice character Y having a lower display priority than the numeric part Z1 and a display priority higher than the character part Z2 is made to appear. Is possible.
Specifically, in the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is a case in which during the reach effect, during the PB effect such as the promotion effect, etc., during the temporary stop display effect, and during the time-shortening (general charge support) effect. It is assumed that it holds.

That is, in the present embodiment, an address area for storing an address for motion 5 (inter-pattern notice), that is, an address area of the motion management area 5 is used by a scenario for notice 1 for "at the time of reach effect" or a scenario for notice 2 Ru. By configuring in this way, during reach occurrence, SP reach development, etc., the numerical part Z1 is displayed prior to the advance character Y, so the appearance effect by the reach effect is reduced by the appearance of the advance character Y. It can prevent that it does.
In addition, the address area of the motion management area 5 is used by the scenario for notice 1 of “when PB effect” or the scenario for notice 2. By configuring in this manner, when a character image imitating a PB (push button) appearing in a PB effect such as a promotion effect or the like is used as the advance notice character Y, priority is given to a character image in which the number part Z1 imitates PB. Because it is displayed, it can be prevented that the effect of the variation effect of the symbol is reduced by the PB effect.

Further, the address area of the motion management area 5 is used by the scenario for notice 1 of "provisional stop display effect" or the scenario for notice 2. By configuring in this manner, when decorative symbol Z is displayed for temporary stop (for example, swing display at a fixed position (see FIG. 147)), numeric part Z1 is displayed with priority over preview character Y. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reduction effect of the temporary stop display effect due to the appearance of the advance notice character Y.
Further, the address area of the motion management area 5 is used by the scenario for notice 1 of “time reduction effect time” or the scenario for notice 2. While the time is short, the variation time is short, and it is highly likely that the game result will be displayed during the appearance of the advance character Y, but by configuring in this way, the number part Z1 is more than the advance character Y during the time reduction. Since priority display is performed, it is possible to prevent the advance notice character Y from hiding the game result (stop result mode).

  In the present embodiment, in the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the case where one of the reach effect, the PB effect such as the promotion effect, etc., the temporary stop display effect, and the time reduction effect is selected. Although it was comprised so that the notice layer between symbols might be used, when predetermined conditions are satisfied, it is not limited to these, It can change suitably. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the stage change effect is being performed, when the background change effect is being performed, the decorative symbol Z may be configured by only the number part Z1.

In the case where the decorative symbol Z is composed of the number portion Z1 and the character portion Z2 and the type of the number portion Z1 is associated with the type of the character portion Z2, the user is used to the model If it is a player, the character part Z2 can estimate the numeral part Z1 (the numeral shown in the numeral part Z1). Therefore, even if the numeral part Z1 is hidden by the advance character Y, a part of the character part Z2 (ie, If the part that can identify the type is not hidden at least, it is possible to grasp the state of the decorative special feature variation display game and the stop result mode. However, decorative symbol Z may be displayed in the corner of display screen 41a during SP reach development or during a time, for example, when decorative symbol Z is displayed in the center of display screen 41a. (See FIGS. 145 to 148) Since the display is reduced in size, the decorative symbol Z is often configured with only the number part Z1 in order to ensure the visibility of the number part Z1. In such a case, that is, when the decorative symbol Z is constituted only by the numeral Z1, even the player who is used to the model can not estimate the numeral Z1 by the character Z2. Use of the inter-pattern notice layer is effective.
From that point of view, for example, even when the type of the number part Z1 and the type of the character part Z2 are associated, the number part Z1 and the character part Z2 are displayed separated from each other. In this case, the character part Z2 can not estimate the numeral part Z1. Therefore, when the effect of displaying the number part Z1 and the character part Z2 forming the decorative design Z at a distance is being displayed is used as the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, in which case the inter-symbol notice layer is used. It is good.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the variation display mode of the decorative symbol Z when the notice character Y whose display priority is lower than that of the numeric part Z1 appears.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 149 (a), while the variable display is performed in the variable display mode in which the decorative symbol Z is scrolled in the horizontal direction, the notice character Y appears, and the numeral more than the notice character Y When the part Z1 is displayed with priority, as shown in FIG. 149 (b) and FIG. 149 (c), for example, the decorative symbol Z is a variable display mode before the warning character Y appears (normal It is possible to perform an effect of fluctuating display in a fluctuation display mode different from the fluctuation display mode). By configuring in this manner, not only the advance notice character Y appears, but also the change display mode of the decorative design Z changes, so that the interest can be enhanced.

As a variable display mode different from the normal variable display mode, FIG. 149 (b) exemplifies a variable display mode in which the decorative symbol Z is vertically scrolled, and in FIG. 149 (c) Although the display mode has been exemplified, the variable display mode different from the normal variable display mode is not limited to these, and can be appropriately changed. For example, even the variable display mode in which the decorative symbol Z is diagonally scrolled good.
In addition, the variation display mode of the normal state is not limited to the variation display mode in which the decorative symbol Z is horizontally scrolled, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the variation display mode in which the decorative symbol Z is vertically scrolled may be used , And may be a variation display mode in which the decorative symbol Z is scrolled obliquely (moving from upper right to lower left or moving from upper left to lower right), or a variable display mode in which the decorative symbol Z is axially rotated Also good. In addition, the fluctuation display mode different from the normal fluctuation display mode may be horizontal scrolling, as long as the normal fluctuation display mode is other than horizontal scrolling.

  According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game in which the plurality of identification information is variably displayed becomes a predetermined result. In the display control unit (display control unit 300) for displaying the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the effect display unit (the display unit 41), the effect control unit having a predetermined effect image at a predetermined timing (In the case of this embodiment, the advance notice character Y) can be displayed on the effect display device, and the predetermined effect image has a display priority lower than that of the identification information (in the case of this embodiment, the numeral Z1). The matching part where the identification information matches the display position is hidden by the identification information.

Therefore, since the identification information (numeric part Z1) is displayed prior to the predetermined effect image (notice character Y), even if the predetermined effect image appears, the identification information can be visually recognized, and the variable display is performed. It does not become difficult to grasp the state of the game (the decoration special view variable display game) or the stop result mode.
Here, the predetermined effect image is an image displayed at a predetermined timing of the advance character Y or the like, and the predetermined effect image does not include an image constantly displayed such as a background image.
Further, among the predetermined effect images, the matching portion where the identification information and the display position coincide with each other may be part or all of the predetermined effect image.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) identifies in correspondence with the display of a predetermined effect image (in the case of this embodiment, the advance notice character Y). It is possible to configure so that the change display mode of the information (in the case of the present embodiment, at least the numeral Z1) can be changed (see FIG. 149).
By configuring in this way, not only a predetermined effect image (notice character Y) appears, but also the variation display mode of the identification information (numeric part Z1 (decorative symbol Z)) changes, so that the interest can be enhanced. it can.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the predetermined effect image (in the case of the present embodiment, the advance notice character Y) has more identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the numeral portion Z1). The display priority is low, and the first effect image (the notice character Y drawn on the inter-pattern notice layer) in which the matching portion where the display position matches the identification information is hidden by the identification information and the display The second effect image (the front notice 1 layer, the front notice 2 layer, or the forefront) that hides the part corresponding to the matching part of the identification information by the matching part where the priority is high and the identification information matches the display position. And the preview character Y) drawn on the preview layer may be included.
By configuring in this manner, an effect in which one of a predetermined effect image that is not displayed with priority over identification information (numeric part Z1) and a predetermined effect image that is displayed with priority over identification information appears Since the effect in which both appear is also executable, the effect by the predetermined effect image (predictive character Y) can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, it is possible to configure the predetermined effect image (in the case of this embodiment, the advance notice character Y) to be a moving image (FIG. 146 or FIG. 146) See Figure 147).
By configuring in this way, the predetermined effect image (preliminary character Y) changes with the identification information (numeric part Z1) or appears or disappears due to the identification information (numeric part Z1), thereby enhancing interest. it can.
On the other hand, even if the predetermined effect image is a still image, the predetermined effect image (notice character Y) is identified even when the identification information is variably displayed in a variable display mode such as scroll display or axis rotation display. Because the information (numeric part Z1) is used to hide and show, it is possible to enhance interest.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the effect control means (effect control device 300), together with the identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the numeral Z1) and the additional information (in the present embodiment) The character portion Z2) can be displayed on the effect display device (display device 41), and the additional information is lower in display priority than the identification information and the predetermined effect image (in the case of the present embodiment, the advance notice character Y). It is possible to configure. That is, the additional information has a lower display priority than the identification information or the predetermined effect image, and a portion where the display information matches the identification information or the predetermined effect image is hidden by the identification information or the predetermined effect image. It is possible to configure.

  By configuring in this way, of the identification information (numeric part Z1) and the additional information (character part Z2), only the identification information hides the predetermined effect image (notice character Y), and the additional information is predetermined Since the effect image is not hidden, the hidden part of the predetermined effect image can be suppressed to the minimum necessary, and the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect image can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game in which the plurality of identification information is variably displayed becomes a predetermined result. In the display control unit (display control unit 300) for displaying the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the effect display unit (the display unit 41), the effect control unit having a predetermined effect image at a predetermined timing (In the case of the present embodiment, the notice character Y) can be displayed on the effect display device, and a display screen 41a to be displayed on the effect display device is created by one display layer or a plurality of stacked display layers. It comprises a creation means (VDP 312 etc.) and a display control means (signal conversion circuit 313 etc.) for displaying the display screen 41a created by the creation means on the effect display device. The creation means is a display layer (left symbol number portion layer, right symbol number portion layer, middle symbol number portion layer) for displaying identification information (number portion Z1 in the case of this embodiment), and a predetermined effect image A predetermined display screen 41a can be created by a plurality of display layers including a display layer for display (inter-pattern notice layer), and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the predetermined display screen 41a. The display layer is located lower than the display layer for displaying the identification information, and a matching portion in which the display position matches the identification information in the predetermined effect image is hidden by the identification information.

  Therefore, since the identification information (numeric part Z1) is displayed prior to the predetermined effect image (notice character Y), even if the predetermined effect image appears, the identification information can be visually recognized, and the variable display is performed. It does not become difficult to grasp the state of the game (the decoration special view variable display game) or the stop result mode.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the variation display mode of the identification information (in the case of this embodiment, at least the numeral Z1 in the present embodiment) is the predetermined display on the predetermined display screen 41a. It can be configured to be different from the variation display mode in the display screen 41a other than the screen 41a (for example, a display screen created by stacking a plurality of display layers not including the inter-symbol notice layer).
By configuring in this way, not only a predetermined effect image (notice character Y) appears, but also the variation display mode of the identification information (numeric part Z1 (decorative symbol Z)) changes, so that the interest can be enhanced. it can.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the predetermined effect image (in the case of the present embodiment, the advance notice character Y) includes the first effect image and the second effect image, and is created. The means (VDP 312, etc.) includes a display layer (left symbol number portion layer, right symbol number portion layer, middle symbol number portion layer) for displaying identification information (number portion Z1 in the case of this embodiment); A display layer for displaying an effect image (inter-pattern notice layer) and a display layer for displaying a second effect image (in the case of this embodiment, a front notice 1 layer, a front notice 2 layer, or a foremost notice layer) And a plurality of display layers including at least one of the first display image and the second display image, wherein the display layer for displaying the first effect image is identification information in the predetermined display screen 41a. A matching portion which is located on the lower layer side (screen rear side) than the display layer to be displayed, and in which the identification information of the first effect image matches the display position is hidden by the identification information, and the second The display layer for displaying the effect image is located on the upper layer side (the screen front side) of the display layer for displaying the identification information, and the display position coincides with the identification information of the second effect image. It is possible to constitute so that a portion corresponding to the corresponding portion in the identification information may be hidden by the corresponding portion.
By configuring in this manner, an effect in which one of a predetermined effect image that is not displayed with priority over identification information (numeric part Z1) and a predetermined effect image that is displayed with priority over identification information appears Since the effect in which both appear is also executable, the effect by the predetermined effect image (predictive character Y) can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the effect control means (effect control device 300), together with the identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the numeral Z1) and the additional information (in the present embodiment) , The character portion Z2) can be displayed on the effect display device (display device 41), and on the predetermined display screen 41a, a display layer (left symbol character portion layer, right symbol character portion layer) for displaying additional information , Middle symbol character portion layer) is a display layer (left symbol number portion layer, right symbol number portion layer, middle symbol number portion layer) for displaying identification information and a display layer for displaying a predetermined effect image It is possible to configure so as to be located on the lower layer side (screen rear side) than the inter-symbol notice layer).

  By configuring in this way, of the identification information (numeric part Z1) and the additional information (character part Z2), only the identification information hides the predetermined effect image (notice character Y), and the additional information is predetermined Since the effect image is not hidden, the hidden part of the predetermined effect image can be suppressed to the minimum necessary, and the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect image can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game in which the plurality of identification information is variably displayed becomes a predetermined result. In the display control unit (display control unit 300) for displaying the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the effect display unit (the display unit 41), the effect control unit having a predetermined effect image at a predetermined timing (In the case of the present embodiment, the notice character Y) can be displayed on the effect display device, and a display screen 41a to be displayed on the effect display device is created by one display layer or a plurality of stacked display layers. Creation means (VDP 312 or the like), display control means (signal conversion circuit 313 or the like) for displaying the display screen 41a created by the creation means on the effect display device, display image And storage means (virtual drawing space 326a of VRAM 326) for storing information of a display layer used to create 41a, and the storage means displays identification information (number part Z1 in the case of this embodiment). At least includes an identification information layer storage area for storing information of a display layer, and a first effect image layer storage area and a second effect image layer storage area for storing information of a display layer for displaying a predetermined effect image. A plurality of layer storage areas are provided in order from the top side of the storage means, and the information of the display layer stored in the layer storage area is a plurality of layers as the position of the layer storage area is closer to the top of the storage means. It is arranged on the lower layer side (screen rear side) when the display layer is stacked, and the identification information layer storage area is located on the rear side of the storage means than the first effect image layer storage area And the display layer information for displaying a predetermined effect image is stored in the first effect image layer storage area, since the second effect image layer storage area is located on the top side of the storage means with respect to the second effect image layer storage area. The matching information in which the display position matches the identification information of the predetermined effect image is hidden by the identification information, and the information of the display layer for displaying the predetermined effect image is stored in the second effect image layer storage area If it is determined that the identification information in the predetermined effect image matches the display position, it is displayed to hide the portion corresponding to the matching portion in the identification information, and the predetermined effect image is displayed. Information on the display layer to be displayed may be any of the following: when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, during reach effect, during PB effect such as promotion effect, during temporary stop effect, or during time reduction effect And when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is stored in the second effect image layer storage area.
In the case of the present embodiment, the identification information layer storage area is a drawing area for motion management area 6 in which the middle symbol number part layer is stored, a drawing area for motion management area 7 in which the left symbol number part layer is stored, and the right pattern It is a drawing area for motion management area 8 in which a numeral part layer is stored.
The first effect image layer storage area is a drawing area for motion management area 5 in which an inter-symbol notice layer is stored.
In the second effect image layer storage area, a drawing area for motion management area 9 in which the front notice 1 layer is stored, a drawing area for motion management area 10 in which the front notice 2 layer is stored, and a foremost notice layer are stored. Motion area 12 for the motion management area 12.

Therefore, since the identification information (numeric part Z1) is displayed prior to the predetermined effect image (notice character Y), even if the predetermined effect image appears, the identification information can be visually recognized, and the variable display is performed. It does not become difficult to grasp the state of the game (the decoration special view variable display game) or the stop result mode.
Further, regardless of the effect content (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen 41a), the information of each display layer is stored in a predetermined layer storage area (drawing area). It is not necessary to search for a layer storage area for storing information of the display layer each time information is stored in the storage means (virtual drawing space 326a of VRAM 326), and processing load can be reduced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the effect control means (effect control device 300), together with the identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the numeral Z1) and the additional information (in the present embodiment) , And the character portion Z2) can be displayed on the effect display device (display device 41), and the plurality of layer storage areas include an additional information layer storage area for storing information of a display layer for displaying additional information. The additional information layer storage area is configured to be positioned on the top side of the storage unit (the virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326) than the identification information layer storage area, the first effect image layer storage area, and the second effect image layer storage area. It is possible.
In the case of this embodiment, the additional information layer storage area is a drawing area for motion management area 2 in which the middle symbol character part layer is stored, a drawing area for motion management area 3 in which the left symbol character part layer is stored, and the right pattern It is a drawing area for motion management area 4 in which a character part layer is stored.

  By configuring in this way, of the identification information (numeric part Z1) and the additional information (character part Z2), only the identification information hides the predetermined effect image (notice character Y), and the additional information is predetermined Since the effect image is not hidden, the hidden part of the predetermined effect image can be suppressed to the minimum necessary, and the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect image can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, among the decorative symbols Z, the numeral Z1 is used as identification information and the character Z2 is added information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the character Z2 may be a first character and a second character. The character part is divided into numeric part Z1 and the first character part as identification information, and the second character part as additional information, the display priority of the numeric part Z1 and the first character part is predetermined effect image The priority of display of the second character portion may be lower than (predicted character Y) and lower than a predetermined effect image (predicted character Y).
The identification information can also be displayed small (smaller than when displayed at the center of the display screen 41a) at the corners of the display screen 41a.

Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the notice layer between designs may be arrange | positioned between the left figure, the middle design, and the number part layer of the right design, and the left figure, the middle design, and the character part layer of the right design. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, as an inter-symbol preview layer, a left inter-symbol preview layer disposed between the left symbol's number layer and the character portion layer, and a middle symbol's number layer and character portion It is also possible to provide a middle symbol notice layer disposed between the layers and a right symbol notice layer disposed between the numeral portion layer of the right symbol and the character portion layer.
That is, in the present embodiment, when stacking a plurality of display layers, the character portion layer (middle symbol character portion layer → left symbol number portion layer → right symbol number portion layer) → inter-symbol notice layer → number portion layer (middle symbol number It arranges in order of (part layer → left figure number part layer → right figure number part layer), but it is not limited to this, for example, middle figure character part layer → middle figure notice layer → middle figure number part layer → left It may be arranged in the order of the symbol character part layer → left symbol inter-notice layer → left symbol number part layer → right symbol character part layer → right inter-symbol notice layer → right symbol number part layer.

  Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. In particular, the screen shot function and the setting function of the customer waiting demonstration effect can be applied. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be combined appropriately and applied.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 game machine 41 display device (effect display device)
41a Display screen Y notice character (predetermined effect image)
Z1 number part (identification information)
Z2 character part (additional information)
300 Effect control device (effect control means)
312 VDP (creation method)
313 Signal conversion circuit (display control means)
326 VRAM (storage means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a result of a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed becomes a predetermined result,
The game apparatus further comprises an effect control means for displaying the variable display game on the effect display device,
The effect control means creates a display screen to be displayed on the effect display device by one display layer or a plurality of stacked display layers, and generates a predetermined effect image on the effect display device at a predetermined timing. While being able to display, the identification information and additional information corresponding to the identification information can be displayed on the effect display device,
The predetermined effect image includes a first preview image displayed by a first preview image layer of the plurality of display layers, and a second preview image displayed by a second preview image layer of the plurality of display layers . The preview image and the background image displayed by the background image layer of the plurality of display layers are included,
The identification information includes first identification information and second identification information of the plurality of identification information, and is displayed by an identification information layer of the plurality of display layers.
The additional information includes first additional information corresponding to the first identification information and second additional information corresponding to the second identification information, and is displayed by the additional information layer among the plurality of display layers.
The display priority of the first notice image, the first identification information, the second rather lower than the display priority of the identification information and the second warning image, and the first additional information, the second additional information and as Naru rather higher than the display priority of the background image, the first warning image layers, as well as positioned on the lower layer side than the identification information layer, from the additional information layer and the background image layer Also located on the upper side ,
Display priority of the second warning image, the first identification information, the second identification information, the first warning image, before Symbol first additional information, the priority of display of the second additional information, and the background image A game characterized in that the second notice image layer is located above the identification information layer, the first notice image layer, the additional information layer, and the background image layer so as to be higher than the ranks. Machine.